XC60 Owners Manual MY11 en-GB Tp18267

WEB EDITION
OWNER'S MANUAL
DEAR VOLVO OWNER
THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we
pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been recommend that you familiarise yourself with the
designed for the safety and comfort of you and equipment, instructions and maintenance infor-
your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in mation contained in this owner's manual.
the world. Your Volvo has also been designed to
satisfy all current safety and environmental
requirements.
Table of contents
01 Introduction 02 Safety
Owner information.................................... 13 General information on seatbelts.............. 25 Safety mode - moving the car.................. 41
Reading the owner's manual.................... 13 Seatbelt - putting on................................. 26 General information on child safety.......... 41
Digital owner's manual in the car.............. 16 Seatbelt - loosening.................................. 26 Child seats................................................ 43
Recording data......................................... 18 Seatbelt - pregnancy................................ 27 Child seats - location................................ 48
01 02 02
Accessories and extra equipment............ 19 Seatbelt reminder...................................... 27 Child seat - two-stage booster seat*........ 49
Information on the Internet....................... 19 Seatbelt tensioner..................................... 28 Two-stage booster seat* - raising............. 50
Volvo ID..................................................... 20 Safety - warning symbol........................... 28 Two-stage booster seat* - lowering.......... 51
Volvo Car Corporation's environmental Airbag system........................................... 29 Child seat - ISOFIX................................... 52
philosophy................................................. 21 Driver airbag.............................................. 30 ISOFIX - size classes................................ 52
The owner's manual and the environ- Passenger airbag...................................... 31 ISOFIX - types of child seat...................... 54
ment.......................................................... 23
Passenger airbag - activating/deactivat- Child seats - upper mounting points........ 56
Laminated glass........................................ 23 ing*............................................................ 32
Side airbag (SIPS)..................................... 34
Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster
cushion..................................................... 35
Inflatable Curtain (IC)................................ 35
General information on WHIPS (whiplash
protection)................................................. 36
WHIPS - child seats.................................. 37
WHIPS - seating position.......................... 37
Roll Over Protection System (ROPS)........ 38
When the systems deploy......................... 38
General information on safety mode......... 39
Safety mode - attempting to start the
car............................................................. 40
2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Table of contents
03 Instruments and controls

Instruments and controls, left-hand drive Seats, rear................................................. 83 Rearview mirror - interior........................ 105
car - overview........................................... 58 Steering wheel.......................................... 85 Compass*............................................... 106
Instruments and controls, right-hand Heating* of the steering wheel.................. 86 Panorama roof* - general........................ 107
drive car - overview................................... 61
Light switches........................................... 87 Panorama roof* - operation.................... 108
Combined instrument panel...................... 64
03 03 03
Position/parking lamps............................. 88 Menu navigation - combined instrument
Analogue combined instrument panel - panel....................................................... 110
overview.................................................... 64 Daytime running lights.............................. 89
Tunnel detection*...................................... 90 Menu overview - combined instrument
Digital combined instrument panel - panel....................................................... 110
overview.................................................... 65 Main/dipped beam.................................... 90
Messages................................................ 111
Eco guide & Power guide*........................ 68 Active main beam*.................................... 91
Messages - handling............................... 112
Combined instrument panel - meaning of Active Xenon headlamps*......................... 93
indicator symbols...................................... 69 MY CAR.................................................. 112
Rear fog lamp........................................... 94
Combined instrument cluster - meaning Trip computer......................................... 114
of warning symbols................................... 71 Brake lights............................................... 95
Trip computer - analogue combined
Outside temperature gauge...................... 73 Hazard warning flashers........................... 95 instrument panel..................................... 115
Trip meter.................................................. 73 direction indicators................................... 96 Trip computer - digital combined instru-
Interior lighting.......................................... 96 ment panel.............................................. 119
Clock......................................................... 74
Home safe light duration........................... 98 Trip computer - supplementary informa-
Combined instrument panel - licenses..... 74 tion.......................................................... 123
Symbols in the display.............................. 75 Approach lighting...................................... 98
Trip computer - trip statistics*................ 124
Volvo Sensus............................................ 78 Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pat-
tern............................................................ 99
Key positions............................................ 79
Wipers and washing.................................. 99
Key positions - functions at different lev-
els.............................................................. 79 Power windows....................................... 101
Seats, front................................................ 81 Door mirrors............................................ 103
Seats, front - electrically operated*.......... 82 Windows and rearview and door mirrors
- heating.................................................. 104
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3

Table of contents
04 Climate control 05 Loading and storage

General information on climate control... 126 Engine and passenger compartment Storage spaces....................................... 149
Actual temperature................................. 127 heater*..................................................... 140 Tunnel console........................................ 151
Sensors - climate control........................ 127 Engine block heater and passenger com- Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and
partment heater* - direct start................ 141 ashtray*................................................... 151
Air quality................................................ 127
Engine block heater and passenger com-
04 04 05
Air quality - passenger compartment fil- Glovebox................................................. 151
partment heater* - immediate stop......... 142
ter............................................................ 128 Inlay mats*.............................................. 152
Air quality - Clean Zone Interior Package partment heater* - timer.......................... 142 Vanity mirror............................................ 152
(CZIP)*..................................................... 128 Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets............... 152
Air quality - IAQS*................................... 129 partment heater* - messages................. 144 Loading................................................... 153
Air quality - material................................ 129 Additional heater*.................................... 146 Loading - long load................................. 154
Menu settings - climate control.............. 129 Fuel-driven additional heater*................. 146 Roof load................................................. 155
Air distribution in the passenger com- Electric additional heater*....................... 147 Load retaining eyelets............................. 155
partment.................................................. 130
Loading - bag holder*............................. 155
Electronic climate control - ECC............. 132
12 V electrical socket - cargo area*........ 156
Heated front seats*................................. 133
Safety net*............................................... 156
Heated rear seat*.................................... 133
Safety net* combined with cargo cover.. 158
Fan.......................................................... 134
Safety grille............................................. 158
Auto-regulation....................................... 134
Cargo cover............................................ 159
Temperature control in the passenger
compartment.......................................... 135
Air conditioning....................................... 135
Demisting and defrosting the wind-
screen..................................................... 136
Air distribution - recirculation.................. 137
Air distribution - table............................. 138

Table of contents
06 Locks and alarm 07 Driver support

Remote control key................................. 161 Keyless drive* - locking........................... 172 Active chassis - Four C*.......................... 187
Remote control key - losing ................... 161 Keyless drive* - unlocking....................... 173 Electronic stability control (ESC) - gen-
Remote control key - personalisation*.... 162 Keyless drive* - unlocking with the key eral.......................................................... 187
Locking/unlocking - indicator................. 163 blade ...................................................... 173 Electronic stability control (ESC) - opera-
tion.......................................................... 188
06 06 07
Immobiliser.............................................. 163 Keyless Drive* - lock settings................. 174
Keyless Drive* - antenna location........... 174 Electronic stability control (ESC) - sym-
Remote-controlled immobiliser with bols and messages................................. 190
tracking system*..................................... 164 Locking/unlocking - from the outside..... 175
Road Sign Information (RSI)*.................. 192
Remote control key - functions............... 164 Locking/unlocking - from the inside....... 176
Road sign information (RSI)* - operation 192
Remote control key - range.................... 166 Global opening........................................ 176
Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations 194
Remote control key with PCC* - unique Locking/unlocking - glovebox................. 177
functions................................................. 166 Cruise control*........................................ 195
Locking/unlocking - tailgate.................... 177
Remote control key with PCC* - range... 167 Cruise control* - managing speed.......... 195
Power operated tailgate*........................ 178
Detachable key blade............................. 168 Cruise control* temporary deactivation
Deadlocks*.............................................. 180 and standby mode.................................. 196
Detachable key blade - detaching/ Child safety locks - manual activation.... 181
attaching................................................. 168 Cruise control* - resume set speed........ 197
Child safety locks - electrical activation* 181 Cruise control* - deactivate.................... 197
Detachable key blade - unlocking doors 169
Alarm....................................................... 182 Adaptive cruise control - ACC*............... 197
Remote control key - replacing the bat-
tery.......................................................... 169 Alarm indicator........................................ 183 Adaptive cruise control* - function......... 198
Keyless drive*.......................................... 171 Alarm - automatic re-arming................... 183 Adaptive cruise control* - overview........ 200
Keyless Drive* - remote control key Alarm - remote control key not working. 184 Adaptive cruise control* - managing
range....................................................... 171 Alarm signals........................................... 184 speed...................................................... 201
Keyless drive* - secure handling of the Reduced alarm level............................... 184 Adaptive cruise control* - set time inter-
remote control key.................................. 172 val............................................................ 202
Type approval - remote control key sys-
Keyless drive* - interference to remote tem.......................................................... 185 Adaptive cruise control* - temporary
control key function................................ 172 deactivation, and standby mode............ 202

Table of contents
Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking Collision warning system* - detection of Park assist syst* - backward.................. 240
another vehicle........................................ 203 cyclists.................................................... 224 Park assist syst* - forward...................... 241
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate...... 204 Collision warning system* - detection of Park assist syst* - fault indication........... 242
Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue assis- pedestrians............................................. 225
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors. 242
tance....................................................... 204 Collision warning system* - operation.... 226
07 07 07
Park assist camera*................................ 243
Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise Collision warning system* - limitations... 227
control functionality................................ 206 Park assist camera - settings................. 245
Collision warning system* - camera sen-
Radar sensor........................................... 206 sor limitations.......................................... 228 Park assist camera - limitations.............. 246
Radar sensor - limitations....................... 207 Collision warning system* - symbols and BLIS*....................................................... 246
Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing messages................................................ 230 BLIS* - operation.................................... 247
and action............................................... 209 Driver Alert System*................................ 232 CTA* ....................................................... 249
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and Driver Alert Control (DAC)*...................... 232 BLIS - symbols and messages............... 251
messages................................................ 210 Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation... 233 Adjustable steering force*....................... 251
Distance Warning*.................................. 212 Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and Type approval - radar system................. 251
Distance Warning* - limitations............... 213 messages................................................ 234
Distance Warning* - symbols and mes- Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*............. 235
sages....................................................... 214 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - func-
City Safety™........................................... 215 tion.......................................................... 235
City Safety™ - function........................... 215 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - opera-
City Safety™ - operation........................ 216 tion.......................................................... 236
City Safety™ - limitations....................... 217 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita-
tions........................................................ 237
City Safety™ - laser sensor.................... 219
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - sym-
City Safety™ - symbols and messages.. 221 bols and messages................................. 238
Collision warning system*....................... 222 Park Assist*............................................. 239
Collision warning system* - function...... 223 Park assist syst* - function..................... 239

Table of contents
08 Starting and driving

Alcohol lock*........................................... 254 Start/Stop*.............................................. 275 Fuel filler flap - manual opening.............. 295
Alcohol lock* - functions and operation.. 254 Start/Stop* - function and operation....... 276 Filling up with fuel................................... 295
Alcohol lock* - storage............................ 255 Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop... 277 Fuel - handling........................................ 296
Alcohol lock* - before starting the engine 255 Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts........ 279 Fuel - petrol............................................. 297
08 08 08
Alcohol lock* - to bear in mind................ 257 Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- Fuel - diesel............................................. 297
Alcohol lock* - symbols and text mes- start......................................................... 280 Catalytic converters................................ 299
sages....................................................... 258 Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual Diesel particle filter (DPF)........................ 299
Starting the engine.................................. 259 gearbox................................................... 280
Economical driving.................................. 300
Switching off the engine......................... 260 Start/Stop* - settings.............................. 281
Driving with a trailer*............................... 301
Steering lock........................................... 260 Start/Stop* - symbols and messages..... 282
Driving with a trailer* - manual gearbox.. 302
Remote start (ERS)*................................ 261 ECO*....................................................... 284
Driving with a trailer* - automatic gear-
Remote start (ERS) - operation............... 261 Foot brake............................................... 286 box.......................................................... 303
Remote start (ERS) - symbols and mes- Foot brake - anti-lock braking system.... 287 Towing bracket/Towbar*......................... 303
sages....................................................... 263 Foot brake - emergency brake lights and Detachable towbar* - storage................. 304
Jump starting with battery...................... 264 automatic hazard warning flashers......... 287
Detachable towbar* - specifications....... 304
Gearboxes............................................... 265 Foot brake - emergency brake assis-
tance....................................................... 287 Detachable towbar* - attachment/
Manual gearbox...................................... 265 removal................................................... 305
Parking brake.......................................... 288
Gear shift indicator*................................ 266 Trailer Stability Assist - TSA.................... 307
Driving in water....................................... 292
Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic*........... 267 Towing.................................................... 309
Overheating............................................. 292
Automatic gearbox -- Powershift*.......... 270 Towing eye.............................................. 310
Driving with open tailgate/boot lid.......... 293
Gear selector inhibitor............................. 272 Recovery................................................. 311
Overload - starter battery........................ 293
Hill start assist (HSA)*............................. 273
Before a long journey.............................. 294
All Wheel Drive - AWD*........................... 273
Winter driving.......................................... 294
Hill Descent Control (HDC)*.................... 274
Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing............. 295

Table of contents
09 Wheels and tyres 10 Maintenance and service

Tyres - maintenance............................... 313 Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - rec- Volvo service programme....................... 345
Tyres - direction of rotation.................... 314 ommendations........................................ 328 Book service and repair*......................... 345
Tyres - tread wear indicators.................. 315 Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - driv- Raising the car........................................ 348
eable punctured tyres*............................ 329
Tyres - air pressure................................. 315 Bonnet - opening and closing................. 350
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - recti-
09 09 10
Wheel and wheel rim dimensions........... 316 fying low tyre pressure............................ 330 Engine compartment - overview............. 350
Tyres - dimensions.................................. 317 Tyre pressure monitoring (TM)*............... 330 Engine compartment - checking............. 352
Tyres - load index................................... 317 Emergency puncture repair*................... 332 Engine oil - general................................. 352
Tyres - speed ratings.............................. 318 Emergency puncture repair kit* - loca- Engine oil - checking and filling.............. 353
Wheel bolts............................................. 318 tion.......................................................... 333 Coolant - level......................................... 357
Winter tyres............................................. 319 Emergency puncture repair kit* - over- Brake and clutch fluid - level.................. 358
view......................................................... 333
Changing wheels - removing wheels...... 319 Power steering fluid - level...................... 358
Emergency puncture repair* - operation. 334
Changing wheels - fitting........................ 322 Climate control system - fault tracing and
Emergency puncture repair* - recheck- repair....................................................... 359
Warning triangle...................................... 323 ing........................................................... 336
Tools....................................................... 323 Lamp replacement - general................... 359
Emergency puncture repair kit* - inflating
Jack*....................................................... 324 the tyres.................................................. 337 Lamp replacement - headlamps............. 360
First aid kit*............................................. 324 Emergency puncture repair kit* - sealant 337 Lamp replacement - cover for main/
dipped beam bulbs................................. 361
Tyre pressure monitoring*....................... 325 Type approval - tyre pressure monitoring
(TPMS).................................................... 338 Lamp replacement - dipped beam......... 362
Tyre pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)* - general.................................... 325 Lamp replacement - main beam............. 362
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - Lamp replacement - extra main beam.... 363
adjust (recalibration)................................ 326 Lamp replacement - direction indicators
Tyre pressure monitoring system front......................................................... 363
(TPMS)* - status...................................... 327 Lamp replacement - rear lamp............... 363
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - acti- Lamp replacement - location of rear
vate/deactivate....................................... 328 lamps...................................................... 364

Table of contents
11 Specifications
Lamp replacement - number plate light- Rustproofing........................................... 390 Type designations................................... 395
ing........................................................... 364 Cleaning the interior................................ 391 Dimensions............................................. 398
Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo Paint damage.......................................... 392 Weights................................................... 399
area......................................................... 365
Towing capacity and towball load.......... 400
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror light-
10 10 11
ing........................................................... 365 Engine specifications.............................. 402
Lamps - specifications ........................... 366 Engine oil - adverse driving conditions... 404
Wiper blades........................................... 366 Engine oil - grade and volume................ 405
Washer fluid - filling................................ 368 Coolant - grade and volume................... 407
Starter battery - general.......................... 369 Transmission fluid - grade and volume... 408
Battery - symbols.................................... 371 Brake fluid - grade and volume............... 410
Starter battery - replacement.................. 371 Power steering fluid - grade.................... 410
Battery - Start/Stop................................. 373 Washer fluid - quality and volume.......... 410
Electrical system..................................... 375 Fuel tank - volume.................................. 411
Fuses - general....................................... 375 Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions... 412
Fuses - in engine compartment.............. 377 Tyres - approved tyre pressures............. 415
Fuses - under glovebox.......................... 381
Fuses - in the control module under the
glovebox................................................. 383
Fuses - in cargo area.............................. 385
Fuses - in the engine compartment's
cold zone................................................ 386
Car wash................................................. 388
Polishing and waxing.............................. 389
Water and dirt-repellent coating............. 390
9
Table of contents
12 Alphabetical Index
Alphabetical Index.................................. 416
12
10
Table of contents
11
INTRODUCTION
01 Introduction
Owner information Reading the owner's manual 01

NOTE
Your car is fitted with a screen which shows A good way of getting to know your new car
The owner's manual is available for down-
information on how your car is working1. is to read the owner's manual, ideally before load as a mobile application (applies for
your first journey. certain car models and mobile devices),
For cars with owner information in the screen, see www.volvocars.com.
the printed owner's manual is a supplement Reading the owner's manual will give you the
and contains important text, the latest opportunity to familiarise yourself with new The mobile application also includes video
functions, advice on how best to handle the and searchable content and easy naviga-
updates, as well as instructions that can be
tion between different sections.
useful when, for practical reasons, you are car in different situations and to make the
unable to read the information on the screen. best use of all the car's features. Please pay
attention to the safety instructions contained Options/accessories
Changing the screen's language may mean
in the owner's manual. All types of option/accessory are marked with
that certain information is no longer in
an asterisk*.
accordance with national or local laws and The specifications, design features and illus-
regulations. trations in the owner's manual are not bind- In addition to standard equipment, the
ing. We reserve the right to make modifica- owner's manual also describes options (fac-
IMPORTANT tions without prior notice. tory fitted equipment) and certain accessories
(retrofitted extra equipment).
The driver is always responsible that the © Volvo Car Corporation
vehicle is driven safely in traffic and that The equipment described in the owner's
applicable laws and regulations are fol- Owner's Manual in mobile devices manual is not available in all cars - they have
lowed. It is also important that the car is different equipment depending on adapta-
maintained and handled in accordance tions for the needs of different markets and
with Volvo's recommendations in the
owner's information. national or local laws and regulations.
If there should be a difference between the In the event of uncertainty over what is stand-
information on the screen and in the prin- ard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo
ted manual then it is always the printed dealer.
information that applies.
1 Applies to certain car models.

}}

01 Introduction
||
01 Special texts information in a simple and clear manner. The Risk of property damage
decals in the car have the following descend-
WARNING ing degree of importance for the warning/
information.
Warning texts appear if there is a risk of
injury. Warning for personal injury
IMPORTANT
"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of
damage.
NOTE
G031592
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facili-
tate the use of e.g. features and functions.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on

Footnote black or blue warning field and message field.
There is footnote information in the owner's Used to indicate the presence of danger
manual that is located at the bottom of the G031590 which, if the warning is ignored, may result in
page. This information is an addition to the damage to property.
text that it refers to via a number. If the foot- Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,
note refers to text in a table then letters are white text/image on black message field.
used instead of numbers for referral. Used to indicate the presence of danger
which, if the warning is ignored, may result in
Message texts serious personal injury or fatality.
In the car there are displays that show menu
texts and message texts. In the owner's man-
ual the appearance of these texts differs from
the normal text. Examples of menu texts and
message texts: Media, Sending location.
Decals
The car contains different types of decal
which are designed to convey important
14
01 Introduction
Information When there is a series of illustrations for Related information 01

step-by-step instructions each step is Related information refers to other articles
numbered in the same way as the corres- containing closely-associated information.
ponding illustration.
Images
There are numbered lists with letters
The manual's images are sometimes sche-
adjacent to the series of illustrations
matic and may deviate from the car's appear-
where the order of the instructions is not
ance depending on equipment level and mar-
significant.
ket.
Arrows appear numbered and unnum-
bered and are used to illustrate a move- To be continued
ment. }} This symbol is located furthest down to
Arrows with letters are used to clarify a the right when an article continues on the fol-
movement when the reciprocal order is of lowing page.
G031593
no relevance.
Continued from previous page
If there is no series of illustrations for step-by- || This symbol is located furthest up to the
White ISO symbols and white text/image on step instructions then the different steps are left when an article continues from the previ-
black message field. numbered with normal numbers. ous page.
NOTE Position lists Related information

Red circles containing a number are used • The owner's manual and the environment
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in overview images where different com- (p. 23)
in the owner's manual should be exact ponents are pointed out. The number
replicas of those in the car. They are
recurs in the position list featured in con-
• Information on the Internet (p. 19)
included to show their approximate
appearance and location in the car. The nection with the illustration that describes
information that applies to your particular the item.
car is available on the respective decals
for your car. Bulleted lists
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
Procedure lists
Procedures where action must be taken in a Example:
certain sequence are numbered in the • Coolant
owner's manual.
• Engine oil
15
01 Introduction
01 Digital owner's manual in the car • Search - Search function for finding an Search
The owner's manual can be read on the article.
screen in the car2. The content is searchable • Categories - All articles sorted into cate-
and it is easy to navigate between different gories.
sections. • Favourites - Quick access to favourite-
bookmarked articles.
Open the digital owner's manual - press the
MY CAR button in the centre console, press • Quick Guide - A selection of articles for
OK/MENU and select Owner's manual. common functions.
Select the information symbol in the lower
For basic navigation, see Operating the sys-
right-hand corner in order to obtain informa-
tem. See below for a more detailed descrip-
tion about the digital owner's manual.
tion.
NOTE Searching using the character wheel.
The digital owner's manual is not available Character list.
while driving.
Changing the input mode (see following
table).
Use the character wheel to enter a search
term, e.g. "seatbelt".
1. Turn TUNE to the desired letter, press
OK/MENU to confirm. The number and
letter buttons on the control panel in the
centre console can also be used.
Owner's manual, start page. 2. Continue with the next letter and so on.
There are four options for finding information
in the digital owner's manual:
2 Applies to certain car models.
16
01 Introduction
3. To change the input mode to numbers or Enter with the numerical keyboard The same article can be in several appropri- 01
special characters, or to perform a ate categories in order to be found more
search, turn TUNE to one of the options easily.
(see explanation in the following table) in
Turn TUNE to navigate in the category tree
the list for changing the input mode (2),
and press OK/MENU to open a category -
press OK/MENU.
selected - or article - selected . Press
EXIT to go back to the previous view.
123/AB Change between letters and
C numbers with OK/MENU. Favourites
Located here are the articles that are saved
MORE Change to special characters
as favourites. To select an article as a favour-
with OK/MENU.
ite, see the heading "Navigating in an article"
OK Perform the search. Turn TUNE below.
Numerical keyboard.
to select a search result article, Turn TUNE to navigate in the favourite list
press OK/MENU to go to the Another way of entering characters is to use and press OK/MENU to open an article.
article. the centre console's buttons 0-9, * and #. Press EXIT to go back to the previous view.
a|A Changes between lowercase When e.g. 9 is pressed, a bar appears with all
Quick Guide
and uppercase letters with OK/ characters3 under the button, e.g. W, x, y, z
Located here is a selection of articles for get-
MENU. and 9. Quick presses on the button move the
ting to know the car's most common func-
cursor through these characters.
||}
tions. The articles can also be accessed via
Changes from the character
wheel to the search field. Move • Stop with the cursor on the desired char- categories, but are collected here for quick
acter in order to select it - the character is access.
the cursor with TUNE. Delete
shown on the enter line.
any misspelling with EXIT. To Turn TUNE to navigate in the Quick Guide
return to the character wheel, • Delete/undo using EXIT. and press OK/MENU to open an article.
press OK/MENU. To enter a number, hold in the corresponding Press EXIT to go back to the previous view.
number key.
Note that the digit and letter
buttons on the control panel Categories
can be used for editing in the The articles in the owner's manual are struc-
search field. tured into main categories and subcategories.
3 The character for each button may vary depending on market/country/language.

}}
17
01 Introduction
||
01 Navigating in an article Recording data for a certain length of time, but also as a
Certain information about the vehicle's opera- result of a collision or incident. This informa-
tion and functionality, and any incidents, are tion may be stored by Volvo as long as it can
recorded in the car. help to further develop and further enhance
safety and quality and as long as there are
Your vehicle contains a number of computers legal requirements and other regulations that
whose function is to continuously check and Volvo needs to consider.
monitor the vehicle's operation and function-
Volvo will not contribute to the above-descri-
ality. Some of the computers can record
bed information being disclosed to third par-
information during normal driving if they
ties without the vehicle owner's consent.
detect an error. In addition, information is
However, due to national legislation and reg-
recorded in the event of a collision or inci-
ulations Volvo may be required to disclose
dent. Parts of the recorded information are
such information to authorities such as police
required so that technicians can diagnose
Home - leads to the start page for the authorities, or others who may assert a legal
and rectify faults in the vehicle during servic-
owner's manual. right to have access to it.
ing and maintenance and so that Volvo can
Favourite - adds/removes an article as a fulfil legal requirements and other regulations. To be able to read and interpret the informa-
favourite. You can also press the FAV In addition to this, the information is used for tion recorded by the computers in the vehicle
button in the centre console to add/ research purposes by Volvo in order to con- requires special technical equipment that
remove an article as a favourite. tinually develop quality and safety, as the Volvo, and workshops that have entered into
Highlighted link - leads to linked article. information can contribute to a better under- agreements with Volvo, have access to. Volvo
standing of the factors that cause accidents is responsible that the information, which is
Special texts - if the article contains and injuries. The information includes details transferred to Volvo during servicing and
warnings, important or note texts then an of the status and functionality of various sys- maintenance, is stored and handled in a
associated symbol is shown here as well tems and modules in the vehicle with regard secure manner and that the handling com-
as the number of such texts in the article. to engine, throttle, steering and brake sys- plies with applicable legal requirements. For
Turn TUNE to navigate between the links or tems, amongst other things. This information further information - contact a Volvo dealer.
scroll in an article. When the screen has may include details regarding the way the
scrolled to the start/end of an article the driver drives the vehicle, such as vehicle
home and favourite options are accessed by speed, brake and accelerator pedal use,
scrolling a further step up/down. Press OK/ steering wheel movement and whether or not
MENU to activate the selection/highlighted the driver and passengers have used their
link. Press EXIT to go back to the previous seatbelts. For the reasons given this informa-
view. tion may be stored in the vehicle's computers
18
01 Introduction
Accessories and extra equipment Information on the Internet 01

The incorrect connection and installation of At www.volvocars.com there is further infor-
accessories and extra equipment can nega- mation concerning your car.
tively affect the car's electronic system.
With a personal Volvo ID it is possible to log in
Certain accessories only function when asso- to My Volvo web, which is a personal web
ciated software is installed in the car's com- page for you and your car.
puter system. Volvo therefore recommends
that you always contact an authorised Volvo
workshop before installing accessories or
extra equipment which are connected to or
affect the electrical system.
Areas where IR film is not applied.
Heat-reflecting windscreen*
The windscreen is equipped with a heat- A is the distance from the top edge of the QR code
reflecting film (IR) that reduces the solar heat windscreen down to the start of the field. B is
A QR code reader is required to read the QR
radiation into the passenger compartment. the distance from the top edge of the wind-
code, which is available as a supplemental
screen down to the end of the field.
The positioning of electronic equipment, such program (app) for several mobile phones. The
as a transponder, behind a glass surface with QR code reader can be downloaded from e.g.
heat-reflecting film may affect its function and Dimensions App Store, Windows Phone or Google Play.
performance. A 47 mm
For the optimal function of electronic equip-
ment, it should be positioned on the part of B 87 mm
the windscreen with no heat-reflecting film
(see the highlighted area in the illustration).

01 Introduction
01 Volvo ID ate a Volvo ID via one of the following serv-

Volvo ID is your personal ID that provides ices:
access to various services4. • My Volvo - Enter your e-mail address and
follow the instructions.
Examples of services:
• For an Internet-connected car* - Enter
• My Volvo - Your personal web page for your e-mail address in the app that
you and your car. requires Volvo ID and follow the instruc-
• In an Internet-connected car* - Certain tions. Alternatively press the Connect
functions and services require that you button in the centre console and
have registered your car to a personal select Apps Settings and follow the
Volvo ID, for example to be able to send a instructions.
new address from a map service on the
Internet directly to the car. • Volvo On Call, VOC* - Download the lat-
est version of the VOC app. Choose to
• Volvo On Call, VOC* - Volvo ID is used create a Volvo ID from the start page,
when logging in to the Volvo On Call enter e-mail address and follow the
mobile app. instructions.
Advantages of Volvo ID Related information
• One user name and one password to • Information on the Internet (p. 19)
access online services, i.e. only one user-
name and one password to remember.
• When changing the username/password
for a service (e.g. VOC) it will also be
changed automatically for other services
(e.g. My Volvo)
Create a Volvo ID
To create a Volvo ID you need to enter a per-
sonal e-mail address. Then follow the instruc-
tions in the e-mail message that is automati-
cally sent to the specified address in order to
complete the registration. It is possible to cre-
4 The services available may vary over time and vary depending on equipment level and market.

01 Introduction
Volvo Car Corporation's tured in one of the cleanest and most 01

environmental philosophy resource-efficient plants in the world.
Your Volvo complies with strict international
environmental standards and is also manufac-
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Cor- Fuel consumption Efficient emission control
poration's core values which influence all Volvo cars have competitive fuel consump- Your Volvo is manufactured following the
operations. We also believe that our custom- tion in each of their respective classes. Lower concept "Clean inside and out" – a concept
ers share our consideration for the environ- fuel consumption generally results in lower that encompasses a clean interior environ-
ment. emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon diox- ment as well as highly efficient emission con-
Volvo Car Corporation has global ISO certifi- ide. trol. In many cases the exhaust emissions are
cation, which includes the environmental well below the applicable standards.
It is possible for the driver to influence fuel
standard ISO 14001 covering all factories and consumption. For more information read Clean air in the passenger
several of our other units. We also set under the heading, Reducing environmental compartment
requirements for our partners so that they impact.
A passenger compartment filter prevents dust
work systematically with environmental
and pollen from entering the passenger com-
issues.
partment via the air intake.
}}
21
01 Introduction
||
01 A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* required to guarantee good environmental Following this advice can save money, the
(Interior Air Quality System) ensures that the care. planet's resources are saved, and the car's
incoming air is cleaner than the air in the traf- durability is extended. For more information
fic outside. Reducing environmental impact and further advice, see Eco guide (p. 68),
You can easily help reduce environmental Economical driving (p. 300) and Fuel con-
The system consists of an electronic sensor impact - here are a few tips: sumption (p. 412).
and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni-
tored continuously and if there is an increase • Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off
Recycling
in the level of certain unhealthy gases such as the engine when stationary for longer
periods. Pay attention to local regula- As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it is
carbon monoxide then the air intake is important that the car is recycled in an envi-
closed. Such a situation may arise in heavy tions.
ronmentally sound manner. Almost all of the
traffic, queues and tunnels for example. • Drive economically - think ahead.
car can be recycled. The last owner of the car
The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level • Perform service and maintenance in is therefore requested to contact a dealer for
ozone and hydrocarbons is prevented by the accordance with the instructions in the referral to a certified/approved recycling
carbon filter. owner's manual - follow the Service and facility.
Warranty Booklet's recommended inter-
Interior vals. Related information
The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea- • If the car is equipped with an engine • The owner's manual and the environment
sant and comfortable, even for people with block heater*, use it before starting from (p. 23)
contact allergies and for asthma sufferers. cold - it improves starting capacity and
Extreme attention has been given to choosing reduces wear in cold weather and the
environmentally-compatible materials. engine reaches normal operating tem-
perature more quickly, which lowers con-
Volvo workshops and the environment sumption and reduces emissions.
Regular maintenance creates the conditions • High speed increases consumption con-
for a long service life and low fuel consump- siderably due to increased wind resis-
tion for your car. In this way you contribute to tance - a doubling of speed increases
a cleaner environment. When Volvo's work- wind resistance 4 times.
shops are entrusted with the service and
maintenance of your car it becomes part of
• Always dispose of environmentally hazar-
dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in
our system. Volvo makes clear demands an environmentally safe manner. Consult
regarding the way in which our workshops a workshop in the event of uncertainty
are designed in order to prevent spills and about how this type of waste should be
discharges into the environment. Our work- discarded - an authorised Volvo work-
shop staff have the knowledge and the tools shop is recommended.

01 Introduction
The owner's manual and the Laminated glass 01

environment
The paper pulp in a printed owner's manual Laminated glass
comes from FSC® certified forests or other The windscreen and panorama roof
controlled sources. have laminated glass. It is reinforced
which provides better protection
The Forest Stewardship Council® symbol against break-ins and improved
shows that the paper pulp in a printed sound insulation in the passenger compart-
owner's manual comes from FSC® certified ment. Other glass surfaces*.
forests or other controlled sources.
Related information
• Volvo Car Corporation's environmental
philosophy (p. 21)

SAFETY
02 Safety
General information on seatbelts Remember Related information

Heavy braking can have serious consequen- • Do not use clips or anything else that can • Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 27)
ces if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly. • Seatbelt - loosening (p. 26)
all passengers are using their seatbelts during • The seatbelt must not be twisted or • Seatbelt tensioner (p. 28)
the journey. caught on anything. 02
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a
seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly,
this may diminish the protection provided
by the airbag in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one per-
son.
Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the WARNING
diagonal shoulder belt up towards the shoulder.
The hip strap must be positioned low down (not Never modify or repair the seatbelts your-
over the abdomen). self. Volvo recommends that you contact
an authorised Volvo workshop.
It is important that the seatbelt lies against
If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major
the body so it can provide maximum protec-
load, such as in conjunction with a colli-
tion. Do not lean the backrest too far back. sion, the entire seatbelt must be replaced.
The seatbelt is designed to protect in a nor- Some of the protective characteristics of
mal seating position. the seatbelt may have been lost, even if it
appears to be undamaged. In addition,
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fas-
replace the seatbelt if the belt is worn or
ten their (p. 26) seatbelt by means of an damaged. The new seatbelt must be type-
audio and visual reminder (p. 27). approved and intended for installation in
the same position as the replaced seatbelt.
25
02 Safety
Seatbelt - putting on Seatbelt - loosening

Put on the seatbelt (p. 25) before driving Loosen the seatbelt (p. 25) when the car is
starts. stationary.
02 Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle
pressing its locking tab into the seatbelt and then let the belt retract. If the seatbelt
buckle. A loud "click" indicates that the belt does not retract fully, feed it in by hand so
has locked. that it does not hang loose.
Related information
• Seatbelt - putting on (p. 26)
• Seatbelt reminder (p. 27)
Incorrectly fitted seatbelt. The belt must rest on
the shoulder.
The buckles only fit the intended lock in the
rear seat1.
Remember
The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
• if it is pulled out too quickly
Correctly fitted seatbelt.
• during braking and acceleration
• if the car leans heavily.
Related information
• Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 27)
• Seatbelt - loosening (p. 26)
• Seatbelt tensioner (p. 28)
• Seatbelt reminder (p. 27)
1 Certain markets.
26
02 Safety
Seatbelt - pregnancy The aim should be to position the seat with as Seatbelt reminder
Seatbelt (p. 25) must always be worn during large a distance as possible between abdo- Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fas-
pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in men and steering wheel. ten their (p. 26) seatbelt by means of an audio
the correct way. and visual reminder.
Related information 02
• Seatbelt - putting on (p. 26)
• Seatbelt - loosening (p. 26)
G020998
G017726
The diagonal section should wrap over the The audio reminder is speed dependent, and
shoulder then be routed between the breasts in some cases time dependent. The visual
and to the side of the abdomen. reminder is located in the roof console and in
the combined instrument panel (p. 64).
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs
and as low as possible under the abdomen. – Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt
It must never be allowed to ride upward. reminder system.
Remove the slack from the seatbelt and
ensure that it fits as close to the body as pos- Rear seat
sible. In addition, check that there are no The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
twists in the seatbelt. subfunctions:
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant dri- • Provides information on which seatbelts

vers must adjust the seat (p. 81) and steer- (p. 25) are being used in the rear seat. A
ing wheel (p. 85) such that they can easily message appears in the combined instru-
maintain control of the vehicle as they drive ment panel when the seatbelts are in use,
(which means that they must be able to easily or if one of the rear doors has been
opened. The message is cleared auto-
operate the foot pedals and steering wheel).
}}
27
02 Safety
||
matically after driving for approximately Seatbelt tensioner Safety - warning symbol
30 seconds or after pressing the indicator All the seatbelts (p. 25) are equipped with belt The warning symbol is shown if a fault is
stalk OK button (p. 110). tensioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt ten- detected during fault tracing or if a system
• Provides a warning if one of the rear seat- sioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a has been activated. Where required, the
02 belts is unfastened during travel. This sufficiently violent collision. The seatbelt then warning symbol is shown together with a
warning takes the form of a message in provides more effective restraint for the occu- message in the combined instrument panel
the combined instrument panel along with pants. (p. 64) information display.
the audio/visual signal. The warning stops
when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can WARNING
also be acknowledged manually by
pressing the OK button. Never insert the tongue of the passenger's
seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's
The message in the combined instrument side. Always insert the tongue of the seat-
panel showing which seatbelts are in use is belt into the buckle on the correct side. Do
always shown. Press the OK button to see not make any damages on seatbelts nor
stored messages. insert any foreign objects into a buckle.
The seatbelts and buckles would then
Certain markets possibly not function as intended in the
An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remind event of a collision. There is a risk of
the driver and front seat passenger to use a serous injury.
seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one.
At low speed, the audible reminder will sound Warning triangle and warning symbol for the air-
for the first 6 seconds. bag system (p. 29) in the analogue combined
instrument panel.
28
02 Safety
Service required or SRS airbag Service Airbag system

urgent appears in the display. Volvo recom- In the event of a frontal collision the airbag
mends that you contact an authorised Volvo system helps to protect the head, face and
workshop immediately. chest of the driver and passenger.
02
Related information
• General information on safety mode
(p. 39)
Warning triangle and warning symbol for the air-

bag system in the digital combined instrument
panel.
G018665
The warning symbol in the combined instru-
ment panel illuminates when the remote con-
trol key is in key position II (p. 79). The sym- Airbag system viewed from above, left-hand-
bol is extinguished after approx. 6 seconds drive car.
provided the airbag system is fault-free.
WARNING
If the warning symbol for the airbag sys-
tem remains illuminated or illuminates
while driving, it means that the airbag sys-
tem does not have full functionality. The
symbol indicates a fault in the seatbelt ten-
sioner system, SIPS, the IC system or
some other fault in the system. Volvo rec-
ommends that you contact an authorised
G018666
Volvo workshop immediately.
Airbag system viewed from above, right-hand-
If the warning symbol malfunctions, the warn- drive car.
ing triangle illuminates and SRS airbag
}}
29
02 Safety
||
The system consists of airbags and sensors. • Safety - warning symbol (p. 28) Driver airbag
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors To supplement the protection afforded by the
and the airbag(s) are inflated and become seatbelt (p. 25) the car is equipped on the
hot. The airbag cushions the initial collision driver's side with an airbag (p. 29).
02 impact for the occupant. The airbag deflates
when compressed by the collision. When this This airbag is fitted into the centre of the
occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked
completely normal. The entire process, AIRBAG.
including inflation and deflation of the airbag,
occurs within tenths of a second. WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the
WARNING belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
Volvo recommends that you contact an may diminish the protection provided by
authorised Volvo workshop for repair. the airbag in the event of a collision.
Defective work in the airbag system could
cause malfunction and result in serious Related information
personal injury.
• Passenger airbag (p. 31)
NOTE
The detectors react differently depending
on the nature of the collision and whether
or not the seatbelts are fastened. Applies
to all belt positions.
It is therefore possible that only one (or
none) of the airbags may inflate in a colli-
sion. The detectors sense the force of the
collision on the vehicle and the action is
adapted accordingly so that one or more
airbags are deployed.
Related information
• Driver airbag (p. 30)
30
02 Safety
Passenger airbag
To supplement the protection afforded by the
seatbelt (p. 25) on the passenger side, the car
is equipped with an airbag (p. 29).
02
The airbag is folded up into a compartment
above the glovebox. Its cover panel is
marked AIRBAG.
Location of the front passenger airbag in a right- Alternative 2: Position of airbag label on passen-
hand drive car. ger side door pillar. The label becomes visible
when the passenger door is opened.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is
fitted in one of the following two locations in
the car:
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on a
seat protected by an activated airbag. Fail-
ure to follow this advice can lead to death
or serious injury to the child.
Location of the front passenger airbag in a left-
hand drive car.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by
the airbag in the event of a collision.
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
Alternative 1: Position of airbag label on passen- possible with their feet on the floor and
ger side sun visor. backs against the backrest. Seatbelts
must be secured.
}}
31
02 Safety
||
WARNING Passenger airbag - activating/ never children in a child seat or on a
deactivating* booster cushion.
Do not put objects in front of or above the
dashboard where the passenger airbag is Front passenger airbag (p. 31) can be deacti- The airbag is deactivated. With the switch
located. vated if the car is equipped with a switch, in this position, children in a child seat or
02 PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). on a booster cushion can sit in the front
passenger seat, but never persons taller
WARNING Switch - PACOS than 140 cm.
The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS)
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the air- is located on the passenger end of the instru- WARNING
bag is activated. ment panel and is accessible when the pas-
senger door is open. Activated airbag (passenger seat):
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front
of the front passenger seat. Check that the switch is in the required posi- Never place a child in a child seat or on a
tion. The remote control key's key blade booster cushion on the front passenger
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever seat when the airbag is activated. This
sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag (p. 168) should be used to change position. applies to everyone shorter than 140 cm.
is activated.
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life. No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit
in the front passenger seat when the air-
bag is deactivated.
Switch - PACOS*
The front passenger airbag can be deacti- can endanger life.
vated (p. 32) if the car is equipped with a
switch, PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off
Switch). NOTE
WARNING When the remote control key is in key
position II (p. 79) the warning symbol
If the car is equipped with a front passen- (p. 28) for the airbag is shown in the com-
ger airbag, but does not have a PACOS Location of airbag switch. bined instrument panel for
switch (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch), The airbag is activated. With the switch in approx. 6 seconds.
then the airbag will always be activated. this position, persons taller than 140 cm Following which, the indicator in the roof
can sit in the front passenger seat, but console is illuminated showing the correct
Related information status for the front passenger seat airbag.
• Child seats (p. 43)

02 Safety
WARNING
can endanger the lives of passengers in
2
the car.
02
Related information
• Child seats (p. 43)
G017800
G017724
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is
activated. deactivated.
A warning symbol in the roof console indi- A text message and a symbol in the roof con-
cates that the airbag for the front passenger sole indicate that the airbag for the front pas-
seat is activated (see preceding illustration). senger seat is deactivated (see preceding
illustration).
WARNING
WARNING
booster cushion in the front seat if the air- Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas-
bag is activated and the symbol in senger seat if the message in the roof con-
the roof console is illuminated. Failure to sole indicates that the airbag is deacti-
follow this advice could endanger the life vated, and if the warning symbol(p. 28) for
of the child. the airbag system is also displayed on the
combined instrument panel. This indicates
that there has been a severe malfunction.
Visit a workshop as soon as possible.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop.
33
02 Safety
Side airbag (SIPS) WARNING

In a side impact collision a large proportion of
the collision force is transferred by the SIPS
• Volvo recommends that repairs are
only carried out by an authorised Volvo
(Side Impact Protection System) to beams, workshop. Defective work in the SIPS-
02 pillars, the floor, the roof and other structural bag system could cause malfunction
parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv- and result in serious personal injury.
er's and front passenger seats protect the
chest area and the hip and are an important • Do not put objects in the area between
the outside of the seat and the door
part of the SIPS.
panel, since this area is required by
the side airbag.
• Volvo recommends the use only of car
Driver's seat, left-hand drive. seat covers approved by Volvo. Other
seat covers may impede the operation
of the side airbags.
• Side airbags are a supplement the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Related information
G032949
The SIPS bag system consists of two main

• Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster
cushion (p. 35)
components, side airbag and sensors. The
side airbags are located in the front seat's • Inflatable Curtain (IC) (p. 35)
backrests. Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag
inflates between the occupant and the door
panel and thereby cushions the initial impact.
The airbag deflates when compressed by the
collision. The side airbag is normally only
deployed on the side of the collision.
34
02 Safety
Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster Inflatable Curtain (IC) WARNING

cushion The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
The protection provided by the car to children driver and passengers from striking their handles in the roof. The hook is only
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion heads on the inside of the car during a colli- designed for light clothing (not for solid
is not diminished by the side airbag (p. 34). sion. objects such as umbrellas for example). 02
Child seat/booster cushion (p. 43) can be Do not screw or install anything onto the
placed on the front passenger seat provided car's headlining, door pillars or side pan-
els. This could compromise the intended
that the car does not have an activated airbag protection. Volvo recommends that you
(p. 32) on the front passenger side. only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are
approved for placement in these areas.
Related information
• General information on child safety WARNING
(p. 41) Do not load the car higher than 50 mm
under the top edge of the windows in the
doors. Otherwise, the intended protection
of the inflatable curtain, which is con-
cealed in the headlining, may be compro-
Inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is part mised.
of the SIPS system (p. 34) and the airbag sys-
tem (p. 29). It is fitted in the headlining along
both sides of the roof and protects the car's
WARNING
occupants sitting in the outer seats. A suffi- The inflatable curtain is a supplement to
ciently violent collision trips the sensors and the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
the inflatable curtain is inflated.
Related information
• General information on seatbelts (p. 25)
35
02 Safety
General information on WHIPS WARNING

(whiplash protection)
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the
WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) is a pro- seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
tection against whiplash injuries. The system
02 consists of energy absorbing backrests and
specially designed head restraints in the front Seat properties
seats. When the WHIPS system is deployed, the
front seat backrests are lowered backward to
change the seating position of the driver and
front seat passenger. This reduces the risk of
whiplash injury.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
system yourself. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
Related information
• WHIPS - child seats (p. 37)
• WHIPS - seating position (p. 37)
• General information on seatbelts (p. 25)
The WHIPS system is actuated by a rear-end

collision, where the angle and speed of the
collision, and the nature of the colliding vehi-
cle all have an influence.
36
02 Safety
WHIPS - child seats WHIPS - seating position WARNING

The protection provided by the car to children For optimum protection from the WHIPS sys-
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion tem (p. 36) the driver and passenger must rear seat cushion and the front seat's
is not diminished by the WHIPS system have the correct seating position and make backrest. Make sure you do not to
(p. 36). sure that the system's function is not obstruc- obstruct the function of the WHIPS sys- 02
ted. tem.
Child seat/booster cushion (p. 43) can be
placed on the front passenger seat provided Seating position
that the car does not have an activated airbag Set the correct seating position in the front
(p. 32) on the front passenger side. seat (p. 81) before driving starts.
Related information Driver and front seat passenger should sit in
• General information on child safety the centre of the seat with as little space as
(p. 41) possible between the head and the head
restraint.
Function
Do not place objects on the rear seat that may

prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the
corresponding front seat must be moved
forward so that it does not make contact
with the folded backrest.
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the
driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the
WHIPS system from functioning.
}}
37
02 Safety
WARNING Roll Over Protection System (ROPS) When the systems deploy
Volvo's Roll-Over Protection System (ROPS) In the event of a collision Volvo's different
If a seat has been subjected to extreme
forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, has been designed to reduce the risk of the personal safety systems work together in
the WHIPS system must be checked. car overturning and to provide the best possi- order to minimise injury.
02 Volvo recommends that it is checked by ble protection in the event of such an acci-
an authorised Volvo workshop. dent. System Triggered
Part of the WHIPS system's protective The system consists of a stabiliser system, Seatbelt ten- In the event of a
capacity may have been lost even if the
Roll Stability Control (RSC) that minimises the sioner (p. 28) front frontal collision,
seat appears to be undamaged.
risk of overturning, for example, during sud- seat and/or side-impact
Volvo recommends that you contact an den evasive manoeuvres or if the car skids. collision, and/or
authorised Volvo workshop to have the
The RSC system uses a sensor which regis- rear-end collision
system checked even after a minor rear-
end collision. ters changes in the car's lateral inclination and/or overturning
angle. This information is used to calculate Seatbelt tensioner, In a frontal collision
the risk of the car overturning. If a risk exists rear seat and/or side-impact
then the ESC system (p. 187) engages, accident and/or
engine torque is reduced and one or more overturning
wheels are braked until the car has regained
its stability. Airbags In a frontal colli-
(Steering wheel sionA
WARNING
(p. 30) and passen-
Under normal driving conditions, the RSC ger airbag (p. 31))
system improves the car's road safety, but
this must not be seen as an opportunity to Side airbags In a side-impact
increase speed. Always follow the normal (SIPS) (p. 34) accidentA
precautions for safe driving.
38
02 Safety
System Triggered WARNING General information on safety mode

Safety mode is a protective state that is
Inflatable Curtain In the event of a The airbag system's control module is
located in the centre console. If the centre enforced when the collision may have dam-
IC (p. 35) side impact and/or console is drenched with water or other aged any of the car's vital functions, such as
overturning and/or liquid, disconnect the battery cables. Do the fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety 02
some frontal colli- not attempt to start the car since the air- systems, or the brake system.
sionsA bags may deploy. Recovering the car.
Volvo recommends that you have it con-
Whiplash protection In a rear-end colli- veyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.
WHIPS (p. 36) sion
A The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a WARNING
collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors
such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed Never drive with deployed airbags. They
of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the
different safety systems of the car are activated. can make steering difficult. Other safety
systems may also be damaged. The
If the airbags (p. 29) have deployed, the fol- smoke and dust created when the airbags
lowing is recommended: are deployed can cause skin and eye irrita-
tion/injury after intensive exposure. In case
• Recovering the car. Volvo recommends of irritation, wash with cold water. The
that you have it conveyed to an author- rapid deployment sequence and airbag
ised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with fabric may cause friction and skin burns. Warning triangle in the analogue combined
deployed airbags. instrument panel.
• Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to handle the
replacement of components in the car's
safety systems.
• Always contact a doctor.
NOTE
The airbags and belt tensioner system are
deployed only once during a collision.
}}
39
02 Safety
||
Related information Safety mode - attempting to start the
• Safety mode - attempting to start the car car
(p. 40) If the car is set in safety mode (p. 39) then an
• Safety mode - moving the car (p. 41) attempt to start the car can be made if every-
02 thing seems normal and the absence of fuel
leakage has been checked.
First, check that no fuel is leaking from the

car. There must be no smell of fuel either.
If everything seems normal and you have
checked for indications of fuel leakage, you
may attempt to start the car.
Warning triangle in the digital combined instru-
ment panel. Remove the remote control key and open the
driver's door. If a message is now shown to
If the car is involved in a collision, the text
the effect that the ignition is on, press the
Safety mode See manual may appear in the
start button. Then close the door and reinsert
combined instrument panel (p. 64) informa-
the remote control key. The car's electronics
tion display. This means that the car has
will now try to reset themselves to normal
reduced functionality.
mode. Then try to start the car.
WARNING If the message Safety mode See manual is

still shown on the display then the car must
Never attempt to repair your car or reset not be driven or towed but a vehicle recovery
the electronics yourself if the car has been
service (p. 311) used instead. Even if the car
in safety mode. This could result in per-
sonal injury or the car not functioning as appears to be driveable, hidden damage may
normal. Volvo recommends that you make the car impossible to control once mov-
engage an authorised Volvo workshop to ing.
check and restore the car to normal status
after Safety mode See manual has been
displayed.
40
02 Safety
WARNING Safety mode - moving the car General information on child safety
If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
Never, under any circumstances, attempt
to restart the car if it smells of fuel when See manual has been reset after attempting correctly secured in the car. Never allow a
the Safety mode See manual message to start the car (p. 40) , the car can be moved child to sit on the knee of a passenger.
is displayed. Leave the car at once. carefully out of a dangerous position. 02
Volvo recommends that children travel in
Do not move the car further than necessary. rear-facing child seats until as late an age as
WARNING possible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and
Related information then front-facing booster cushions/child seats
If the car is in safety mode it must not be • General information on safety mode
towed. It must be transported from its until up to 10 years of age.
(p. 39)
location. Volvo recommends that it is The position of a child in the car and the
transported to an authorised Volvo work- choice of equipment are dictated by the
shop. child's weight and size; see Child seats
(p. 43).
Related information
• Safety mode - moving the car (p. 41) NOTE
Regulations regarding the placement of
children in cars vary from country to coun-
try. Check what does apply.
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats,

booster cushions & attachment devices)
which is designed for your particular car.
Using Volvo's child safety equipment pro-
vides you with optimum conditions for your
child to travel safely in the car. Furthermore,
the child safety equipment fits and is easy to
use.
}}
41
02 Safety
||
NOTE
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety products, contact the manufacturer
for clearer instructions.
02
Child safety locks

The rear doors and rear door windows* can
be blocked manually (p. 181) or electronically
(p. 181)* from opening from the inside.
Related information
• Child seats - location (p. 48)
• Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 52)
• Child seats - upper mounting points
(p. 56)

02 Safety
Child seats NOTE

Children should sit comfortably and safely.
When using child safety products it is
Make sure that the child seat is being used important to read the installation instruc-
correctly. tions included.
02
WARNING
Do not secure the straps of the child seat
to the seat's horizontal adjustment bar,
springs or the rails and beams under the
seat. Sharp edges may damage the straps.
Look in the installation instructions for the

child seat for the correct fitting.
G020739
Child seats and airbags are not compatible.
}}
43
02 Safety
||
Recommended child seats2
Weight Front seat (with deactivated air- Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
bag)
02 Group 0 Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing
child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system.
max 10 kg
Type approval: E1 04301146
Group 0+
(L)
max 13 kg
Group 0 Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant
rear-facing child seat, secured with the child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt. Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
max 10 kg
car's seatbelt. secured with the car's seatbelt.
Group 0+ Type approval: E1 04301146 Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
max 13 kg (U) (U)
Group 0 Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear- Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing Rear-facing child seat (Child
facing child seat, secured with the car's child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
max 10 kg
seatbelt and straps. straps. secured with the car's seatbelt
Group 0+ and straps.
Type approval: E5 03135 Type approval: E5 03135
max 13 kg Type approval: E5 03135
(L) (L)
(L)
Group 0 Child seats which are universally Child seats which are universally approved. Child seats which are universally
approved. approved.
max 10 kg (U)
(U) (U)
Group 0+
max 13 kg
2 With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
44
02 Safety
bag)
Group 1 Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-fac- Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, 02
9-18 kg
ing child seat, secured with the car's secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
seatbelt and straps.
(L)
(L)
Group 1 Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear- Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing Rear-facing child seat (Child
facing child seat, secured with the car's child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
9-18 kg
seatbelt and straps. straps. secured with the car's seatbelt
and straps.
(L) (L)
(L)
Group 1 Britax Fixway – rear-facing child seat, secured with

the ISOFIX fixture system and straps.
9-18 kg
(L)
Group 1 Child seats which are universally Child seats which are universally approved. Child seats which are universally
approved. approved.
9-18 kg (U)
(U) (U)
}}
45
02 Safety
||
bag)
Group 2 Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Volvo rear-facing/turnable child
02 (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-fac- Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, seat (Volvo Convertible Child
15-25 kg
ing child seat, secured with the car's secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
seatbelt and straps. secured with the car's seatbelt
and straps.
(L)
(L)
(L)
Group 2 Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo
(Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-fac- Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child seat,
15-25 kg
ing child seat, secured with the car's secured with the car's seatbelt.
seatbelt.
(U)
(U)
Group 2/3 Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Volvo booster seat with backrest
Booster Seat with backrest). Seat with backrest). (Volvo Booster Seat with
15-36 kg
backrest).
(UF) (UF)
(UF)
Group 2/3 Booster cushion with and without back- Booster cushion with and without backrest Booster cushion with and with-
rest (Booster Cushion with and without (Booster Cushion with and without backrest). out backrest (Booster Cushion
15-36 kg
backrest). with and without backrest).
(UF)
(UF) (UF)
46
02 Safety
bag)
Group 2/3 Integrated booster cushion (Integrated Booster
Cushion) - available as a factory fitted option. 02
15-36 kg
(B)
L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.
B: Built-in child seats approved for this weight class.
Related information
• Child seats - location (p. 48)
• Child seats - upper mounting points
(p. 56)
• General information on child safety (p. 41)
47
02 Safety
Child seats - location WARNING

Always fit child seats/booster cushions (p. 43)
in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is acti- booster cushion in the front seat if the air-
vated (p. 32). If a child is sitting on the front bag is activated.
02 passenger seat then he/she could suffer seri-
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front
ous injury if the airbag deploys.
of the front passenger seat.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is No one shorter than 140 cm should ever
fitted in one of the following two locations in sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag
the car: is activated.
can endanger life.
Alternative 2: Position of airbag label on passen-
ger side door pillar. The label becomes visible
when the passenger door is opened. WARNING
You may place: Booster cushions/child seats with steel
braces or some other design that could
• a child seat/booster cushion on the front rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening but-
passenger seat provided there is no acti- ton must not be used, as they could cause
vated airbag on the front passenger side. the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
• one or more child seats/booster cushions Do not allow the upper section of the child
in the rear seat. seat to rest against the windscreen.
Alternative 1: Position of airbag label on passen- WARNING

ger side sun visor. Related information
Never use a rear-facing child seat on a
seat protected by an activated airbag. Fail- • General information on child safety (p. 41)
ure to follow this advice can lead to death • Child seats - upper mounting points
or serious injury to the child. (p. 56)
48
02 Safety
Child seat - two-stage booster seat* WARNING

The integrated booster seats in the rear seat
Volvo recommends that repair or replace-
allow children to sit comfortably and safely. ment is only carried out by an authorised
Volvo workshop. Do not make any modifi-
The booster cushions are specially designed 02
cations or additions to the booster cush-
to provide optimum safety. In combination ion. If an integrated booster cushion has
with the seatbelt (p. 25) they are approved for been subjected to a major load, such as in
children who weigh between 15 and 36 kg conjunction with a collision, the entire
and who are at least 95 cm in height. booster cushion must be replaced. Even if
the booster cushion appears to be undam-
aged, it may not afford the same level of
protection. The booster cushion must also
be replaced if it is heavily worn.
Incorrect position, the head restraint must be
adjusted as high as the head and the seatbelt
must not be below the shoulder. WARNING
Check before driving that: If the instructions for the two-stage
• the integrated two-stage booster seat is booster seat are not followed then the
correctly set in accordance with the table child could sustain serious injury in the
(p. 50) and in locked position event of an accident.
• the seatbelt is in contact with the child's

body and is not slack or twisted
Correct position, the seatbelt should be posi-
tioned in on the shoulder. • the seatbelt does not lie across the
child's throat or below the shoulder (see
preceding illustrations)
• the lap section of the seatbelt is posi-
tioned low over the pelvis to provide opti-
mal protection.
Adjusting the booster seat's two levels is per-
formed by raising (p. 50) and lowering
(p. 51).

02 Safety
Two-stage booster seat* - raising Stage 24

The integrated booster seat (p. 49) in the rear
seat can be folded up into two stages. How
many stages the cushion should be folded up
02 depends on the child's weight.
Stage 1 Stage 2
Weight 22-36 kg 15-25 kg
Stage 13
Press the booster cushion backwards to

lock. Start from the lower stage. Press the but-
ton.
Pull the handle forward and up in order to

release the booster cushion.
3 Lower stage.
4 Upper stage.

02 Safety
Two-stage booster seat* - lowering

The integrated booster seat (p. 49) in the rear
seat can be folded down from the upper or
lower stage to fully lowered position in the
seat cushion. However, it is not possible to 02
adjust the booster cushion from the upper
stage to the lower stage.
Lift the booster cushion up at the front Press down with your hand in the centre
edge and press it back against the back- of the cushion in order to lock it.
rest to lock.
IMPORTANT
NOTE Check that there are no loose objects (e.g.
It is not possible to adjust the booster seat toys) left behind in the space under the
from stage 2 to stage 1. It must first be cushion before lowering.
reset by being fully folded down (p. 51)
into the seat cushion. Pull the handle forwards to release the
cushion. NOTE
Related information When folding the rear backrest the booster
• Two-stage booster seat* - lowering seat must first be lowered.
(p. 51)
Related information
• Two-stage booster seat* - raising (p. 50)

02 Safety
Child seat - ISOFIX • General information on child safety (p. 41) ISOFIX - size classes
ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child seats There is a size classification for child seats
(p. 43) that is based on an international stand- using the ISOFIX (p. 52) fixture system in
ard. order to assist users in choosing the correct
02 type of child seat (p. 54).
Size Description
class
A Full size, front-facing child
seat
B Reduced size (alt. 1), front-

facing child seat
B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front-fac-

ing child seat
C Full size, rear-facing child seat

Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system
are concealed behind the lower section of the D Reduced size, rear-facing
rear seat backrest, in the outer seats. child seat
The location of the mounting points is indi-
E Rear-facing infant seat
cated by symbols in the backrest upholstery
(see preceding illustration). F Transverse infant seat, left-
Press the seat cushion down to access the hand
mounting points. G Transverse infant seat, right-
Always follow the manufacturer's installation hand
instructions when connecting a child seat to
the ISOFIX mounting points.
Related information
• ISOFIX - size classes (p. 52)
• ISOFIX - types of child seat (p. 54)
52
02 Safety
WARNING
Never place the child in the passenger
seat if the car is fitted with an activated air-
bag.
02
NOTE
If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi-
cation, the car model must be included on
the vehicle list for the child seat.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo dealer for recommenda-
tions about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo
recommends.
53
02 Safety
ISOFIX - types of child seat seats are suitable for all seats in all car mod-
Child seats are in different sizes – cars are in els.
different sizes. This means that not all child
02 Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Infant seat transverse max 10 kg F X X
G X X
Infant seat, rear-facing max 10 kg E X OK

(IL)
Infant seat, rear-facing max 13 kg E X OK

(IL)
D X OK
(IL)
C X OK
(IL)
Child seat, rear-facing 9-18 kg D X OK

(IL)
C X OK
(IL)
54
02 Safety
Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Front-facing child seat 9-18 kg B X OKA 02
(IUL)
B1 X OKA
(IUL)
A X OKA
(IUL)
X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.
IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal catego-
ries.
IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.
A Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
Make sure you select the right size class

(p. 52) of child seat with ISOFIX (p. 52) fixture
system.
55
02 Safety
Child seats - upper mounting points NOTE

The car is equipped with upper mounting
In cars with a cargo cover over the lug-
points for certain front-facing child seats gage compartment, this must be removed
(p. 43). These mounting points are located on before child seats can be attached to the
02 the rear of the seat. securing points.
For detailed information on how the child seat

should be tensioned in the upper mounting
points, see the seat manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
WARNING
The child seat's straps must always be
drawn through the hole in the head
restraint leg before they are tensioned at
the attachment point.
The upper mounting points are primarily Related information

intended for use with front-facing child seats. • General information on child safety (p. 41)
Volvo recommends that small children should • Child seats - location (p. 48)
sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age • Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 52)
as possible.
NOTE
Fold the head restraints in order to facili-
tate fitting this type of child seat in cars
with folding head restraints on the outer
seats.
56
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Instruments and controls, left-hand

drive car - overview
The overview shows where the car's displays
and controls are located.
03
58
Overview, left-hand drive cars
03
}}
59
||
Function See Function See Function See
Menus and mes- (p. 110), Door handle – Headlamp control, (p. 87),
sages, direction (p. 112), opener for fuel filler (p. 295) and
indicators, main/ (p. 96), Control panel (p. 176), flap and tailgate (p. 177).
dipped beam, trip (p. 90) and (p. 181),
computer (p. 123). (p. 101) and Seat adjustment* (p. 82).
(p. 103).
Manual gear chang- (p. 267). Related information
03 ing in an automatic Hazard warning (p. 95).
• Outside temperature gauge (p. 73)
gearbox* flashers
• Trip meter (p. 73)
Cruise control* (p. 195) and Control panel for (p. 112) and • Clock (p. 74)
(p. 197). infotainment system the Sensus
and menu naviga- Infotainment
Horn, airbags (p. 85) and tion supplement.
(p. 29).
Control panel for cli- (p. 132).
Combined instru- (p. 64). mate control
ment panel
Gear selector (p. 265) or
Menu navigation, (p. 112) and (p. 267).
audio control, the Sensus
phone control* Infotainment Controls for active (p. 187).
supplement. chassis (Four-C)*
START/STOP (p. 259). Wipers and washing (p. 99).

ENGINE button
Steering wheel (p. 85).
Ignition switch (p. 79). adjustment
Screen for infotain- (p. 112) and Bonnet opener (p. 350).
ment system and the Sensus
display of menus Infotainment Parking brake (p. 288).
supplement.

Instruments and controls, right-hand

drive car - overview
The overview shows where the car's displays
and controls are located.
03
}}
61
||
Overview, right-hand drive cars
03
62
Function See Function See Function See

Screen for infotain- (p. 112) and Control panel (p. 176), Control panel for (p. 112) and
ment system and the Sensus (p. 181), infotainment system the Sensus
display of menus Infotainment (p. 101) and and menu naviga- Infotainment
supplement. (p. 103). tion supplement.
Ignition switch (p. 79). Seat adjustment* (p. 82). Hazard warning (p. 95).
flashers
START/STOP (p. 259). Headlamp control, (p. 87), 03
ENGINE button opener for fuel filler (p. 295) and Related information
flap and tailgate (p. 177). • Outside temperature gauge (p. 73)
Manual gear chang- (p. 267).
ing in an automatic Parking brake (p. 288). • Trip meter (p. 73)
gearbox* • Clock (p. 74)
Bonnet opener (p. 350).
Cruise control* (p. 195) and
(p. 197). Steering wheel (p. 85).
adjustment
Combined instru- (p. 64).
ment panel Menus and mes- (p. 110),
sages, direction (p. 112),
Horn, airbags (p. 85) and indicators, main/ (p. 96),
(p. 29). dipped beam, trip (p. 90) and
Menu navigation, (p. 112) and computer (p. 123).
audio control, the Sensus Gear selector (p. 265) or
phone control* Infotainment (p. 267).
supplement.
Controls for active (p. 187).
Wipers and washing (p. 99). chassis (Four-C)*
Door handle – Control panel for cli- (p. 132).
mate control

Combined instrument panel Analogue combined instrument panel Gauges and indicators
The combined instrument panel's information - overview
display shows information on some of the The combined instrument panel's information
car's functions, as well as messages. display shows information on some of the
car's functions, as well as messages.
• Analogue combined instrument panel -
overview (p. 64) Information display
• Digital combined instrument panel - over-
view (p. 65)
03
• Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 69)
• Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols (p. 71)
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking1, the yellow indi-
cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank
is illuminated. See also Trip computer -
supplementary information (p. 123) and
Filling up with fuel (p. 295).
Information display, analogue instrument panel.
Eco meter The meter provides an indica-
The combined instrument panel's information tion of how economically the car is being
display shows information on some of the driven. The higher the reading on the
car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip scale, the more economical it is.
computer, as well as messages. The informa-
tion is shown with symbols and text. There Speedometer
are further descriptions under the functions
that use the display.
1
When the display's message "Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "----", the marking becomes red.
64
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine Functionality check Digital combined instrument panel -
speed in thousands of revolutions per All indicator and warning symbols, apart from overview
minute (rpm). symbols in the centre of the information dis- The combined instrument panel's information
Gear shift indicator2/Gear position indica- play, illuminate in key position II or when the display shows information on some of the
tor3 See also Gear shift indicator* engine is started. When the engine has car's functions, as well as messages.
(p. 266), Automatic gearbox -- started, all the symbols should go out except
the parking brake symbol, which only goes Information display
Geartronic* (p. 267) or Automatic gear-
box -- Powershift* (p. 270). out when the brake is disengaged.
If the engine does not start or if the function- 03
Indicator and warning symbols ality check is carried out in key position II
then all symbols go out within a few seconds
except the symbol for faults in the car's emis-
sions system and the symbol for low oil pres-
sure.
Related information
• Combined instrument panel (p. 64)
• Combined instrument panel - meaning of
Information display, digital instrument panel*.
• Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols (p. 71) The combined instrument panel's information
display shows information on some of the
Indicator and warning symbols, analogue instru- car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip
ment panel. computer, as well as messages. The informa-
Indicator symbols tion is shown with symbols and text. There
are further descriptions under the functions
Indicator and warning symbols
that use the display.
Warning symbols4
2 Manual gearbox.
3 Automatic gearbox.
4 Certain engine variants do not have systems to warn of oil pressure loss. In cars with these variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warning for low oil level is via display text. For
more information, see Engine oil - general (p. 352).
}}

||
Gauges and indicators Geartronic* (p. 267) or Automatic gear-
Alternative themes can be selected for the box -- Powershift* (p. 270).
digital combined instrument panel. Possible
themes are "Elegance", "Eco" and
"Performance".
A theme can only be selected when the
engine is running.
To select the theme, press the left-hand stalk
03
switch's OK button and select the Themes
menu option by turning the thumbwheel on
the lever. Press the OK button. Turn the
thumbwheel to select the theme and confirm Gauges and indicators, theme "Elegance".
the selection by pressing the OK button. Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
On certain model variants, the appearance of only one white marking5, the yellow indi- Gauges and indicators, theme "Eco".
the centre console's screen follows the theme cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
selected for the combined instrument panel. is illuminated. See also Trip computer - only one white marking5, the yellow indi-
The contrast mode and colour mode for the supplementary information (p. 123) and cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank
instrument can also be set using the left-hand Filling up with fuel (p. 295). is illuminated. See also Trip computer -
stalk switch. Temperature gauge for engine coolant supplementary information (p. 123) and
For more information on menu navigation, Speedometer
see Menu navigation - combined instrument Eco guide. See also Eco guide & Power
panel (p. 110). Tachometer. The meter indicates engine guide* (p. 68).
speed in thousands of revolutions per Speedometer
The choice of theme and setting of contrast minute (rpm).
mode and colour mode can be stored for
each remote control key in the car key mem- Gear shift indicator6/Gear position indica-
ory*, see Remote control key - personalisa- tor7 See also Gear shift indicator*
tion* (p. 162). (p. 266), Automatic gearbox --
5
6 Manual gearbox.

Tachometer. The meter indicates engine Speedometer Indicator and warning symbols
speed in thousands of revolutions per
minute (rpm). Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per
Gear shift indicator6/Gear position indica- minute (rpm).
tor7. See also Gear shift indicator*
Power guide. See also Eco guide &
(p. 266), Automatic gearbox --
Power guide* (p. 68).
box -- Powershift* (p. 270). Gear shift indicator6/Gear position indica-
tor7. See also Gear shift indicator* 03
(p. 266), Automatic gearbox --
box -- Powershift* (p. 270).
Indicator and warning symbols, digital instrument

panel.
Indicator symbols
Indicator and warning symbols
Warning symbols8
Gauges and indicators, theme "Performance".

Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking5, the yellow indi-
cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank
is illuminated. See also Trip computer -
supplementary information (p. 123) and
Temperature gauge for engine coolant
6 Manual gearbox.
5
8 Certain engine variants do not have systems to warn of oil pressure loss. In cars with these variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warning for low oil level is via display text. For
more information, see Engine oil - general (p. 352).
}}

||
Functionality check Eco guide & Power guide* Instantaneous value
All indicator and warning symbols, apart from Eco guide and Power guide are two com- The instantaneous value is shown here - the
symbols in the centre of the information dis- bined instrument panel (p. 64) instruments higher the reading on the scale, the better.
play, illuminate in key position II or when the which help the driver to drive the car with The instantaneous value is calculated based
engine is started. When the engine has optimum driving economy. on speed, engine speed, engine power uti-
started, all the symbols should go out except
The car also stores statistics of journeys lised plus use of the foot brake.
the parking brake symbol, which only goes
out when the brake is disengaged. made, which can be viewed in the form of a Optimum speed (50-80 km/h) and low engine
block diagram; see Trip computer - trip statis- speeds are encouraged. The pointers fall dur-
03 If the engine does not start or if the function- tics* (p. 124). ing acceleration and braking.
ality check is carried out in key position II
then all symbols go out within a few seconds Eco guide Very low instantaneous values illuminate the
except the symbol for faults in the car's emis- This instrument provides an indication of how red zone on the meter (with a short delay),
sions system and the symbol for low oil pres- economically the car is being driven. which means poor driving economy and
sure. hence should be avoided.
To view this function, select the theme "Eco";
see Digital combined instrument panel - over- Average value
Related information
view (p. 65). The average value slowly follows the instanta-
neous value and describes how the car has
• Combined instrument panel - meaning of been driven most recently. The higher the
indicator symbols (p. 69) pointers on the scale, the better the economy
• Combined instrument cluster - meaning achieved by the driver.
of warning symbols (p. 71)
Power guide
This instrument shows the relationship
between how much power (Power) is being
taken from the engine and how much power
is available.
To view this function, select the theme
"Performance"; see Digital combined instru-
ment panel - overview (p. 65).
Instantaneous value
Average value

Combined instrument panel - Symbol Specification

meaning of indicator symbols
The indicator symbols alert the driver that a Information, read display text
function is activated, that the system is oper-
ating, or that an error or failure has occurred. Main beam On
Indicator symbols
Left-hand direction indicator
Symbol Specification
03
ABL fault Right-hand direction indicator
Emissions system Eco- function on, see ECO*

Available engine power (p. 284)
ABS fault Start/Stop, the engine auto-
Engine power utilised
stopped; see Start/Stop* -
Available engine power Rear fog lamp on function and operation (p. 276)
The smaller, upper pointer shows the availa-
Tyre pressure system , see
ble engine power9. The higher the reading on Stability system, see Electronic Tyre pressure monitoring*
the scale, the more power is available in the stability control (ESC) - general (p. 325)
current gear. (p. 187)
Engine power utilised
Stability system, sport mode, ABL fault
The larger, lower pointer shows the engine
see Electronic stability control The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in
power utilised9. The higher the reading on the
(ESC) - operation (p. 188) the ABL function (Active Bending Lights).
scale, the more power is being taken from the
engine. Engine preheater (diesel) Emissions system
If the symbol illuminates after the engine has
A large gap between the two pointers indi- been started then it may be due to a fault in
cates a large power reserve. Low level in fuel tank the car's emissions system. Drive to a work-
shop for checking. Volvo recommends that
you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo
workshop.
9 Power is dependent on engine speed.

}}

||
ABS fault car. The symbol illuminates when the sport Left/right-hand direction indicator
If this symbol illuminates then the system is mode is activated. Both direction indicator symbols flash when
not working. The car's regular brake system Engine preheater (diesel) the hazard warning flashers are used.
continues to work, but without the ABS func- This symbol illuminates during engine pre- Eco function on
tion. heating. Preheating takes place mostly due to This symbol illuminates when the Eco func-
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off low temperature. tion is activated.
the engine. Low level in fuel tank Start/Stop
2. Restart the engine. When the symbol illuminates the level in the The symbol shines when the engine is auto-
03 fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible. stopped.
3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to
a workshop to have the ABS system Information, read display text Tyre pressure system
checked. Volvo recommends that you When one of the car's systems does not The symbol illuminates in the event of low
seek assistance from an authorised Volvo behave as intended, this information symbol tyre pressure, or if a fault arises in the tyre
workshop. illuminates and a text appears on the informa- pressure system.
tion display. The message text is cleared with
Rear fog lamp on the OK button, see Menu navigation - com-
This symbol illuminates when the rear fog bined instrument panel (p. 110), or it disap-
lamp is switched on. pears automatically after a time (time
Stability system depending on which function is indicated).
A flashing symbol indicates that the stability The information symbol can also illuminate in
system is operating. If the symbol illuminates conjunction with other symbols.
with constant glow then there is a fault in the
system. NOTE
Stability system, sport mode When a service message is shown, the
Sport mode allows for a more active driving symbol and message are cleared using the
experience. The system then detects whether OK button, or disappear automatically
the accelerator pedal, steering wheel move- after a time.
ments and cornering are more active than in
normal driving and then allows controlled Main beam On
skidding of the rear section up to a certain The symbol illuminates when main beam is on
level before it intervenes and stabilises the and with main beam flash.
70
Reminder – doors not closed Combined instrument cluster - Low oil pressure
If one of the doors is not closed properly then meaning of warning symbols If this symbol illuminates during driving then
the information or warning symbol illuminates The warning symbols alert the driver that an the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the
together with an explanatory image in the important function is activated, or that a seri- engine immediately and check the engine oil
information display. Stop the car in a safe ous error or a serious failure has occurred. level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illumi-
place as soon as possible and close the door nates and the oil level is normal, contact a
that is open. Warning symbols workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek
Symbol Specification assistance from an authorised Volvo work-
If the car is driven at a speed lower
shop.
than approx. 7 km/h then the informa- 03
tion symbol illuminates. Low oil pressureA Parking brake applied
This symbol illuminates with a constant glow
If the car is driven at a speed higher
Parking brake applied, digital when the parking brake is applied. The sym-
than approx. 7 km/h then the warning
instrument panel bol flashes during application, and then
symbol illuminates.
changes over to a constant glow.
If the bonnet10 is not closed properly then the Parking brake applied, ana-
logue instrument panel A flashing symbol in any other situation
warning symbol illuminates together with an
means that a fault has arisen. Read the mes-
explanatory image in the information display. Airbags – SRS sage on the information display.
Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possi-
ble and close the bonnet. For more information, see Parking brake
Seatbelt reminder (p. 288).
If the tailgate is not closed properly then the
information symbol illuminates together with Airbags – SRS
an explanatory image in the information dis- Alternator not charging If this symbol remains illuminated or illumi-
play. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as nates while driving, it means a fault has been
possible and close the tailgate. Fault in brake system detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or
IC systems. Drive immediately to a workshop
Related information to have the system checked. Volvo recom-
Warning
• Combined instrument panel (p. 64) mends that you seek assistance from an
• Combined instrument cluster - meaning authorised Volvo workshop.
A Certain engine variants do not have systems to warn of oil
of warning symbols (p. 71) pressure loss. In cars with these variants the symbol for Seatbelt reminder
low oil pressure is not used. Warning for low oil level is via
• Digital combined instrument panel - over- display text. For more information, see Engine oil - general This symbol flashes if someone in a front seat
view (p. 65) (p. 352). has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in
a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.
10 Only cars with alarm*.
}}

||
Alternator not charging WARNING 2. Read the information on the information
This symbol illuminates during driving if a display. Implement the action in accord-
fault has occurred in the electrical system. If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in ance with the message in the display.
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur- Clear the message using the OK button.
Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you ther before topping up the brake fluid.
seek assistance from an authorised Volvo Reminder – doors not closed
workshop. The loss of brake fluid must be investiga-
ted by a workshop. Volvo recommends If one of the doors is not closed properly then
Fault in brake system that you contact an authorised Volvo the information or warning symbol illuminates
If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level workshop. together with an explanatory image in the
03 may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place information display. Stop the car in a safe
and check the level in the brake fluid reser- place as soon as possible and close the door
voir; see Brake and clutch fluid - level
WARNING that is open.
(p. 358). If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at If the car is driven at a speed lower
the same time, there is a risk that the rear
If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at than approx. 7 km/h then the informa-
end will skid during heavy braking.
the same time, there may be a fault in the tion symbol illuminates.
brake force distribution system. If the car is driven at a speed higher
Warning
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off than approx. 7 km/h then the warning
The red warning symbol illuminates when a
the engine. symbol illuminates.
fault has been indicated which could affect
2. Restart the engine. the safety and/or driveability of the car. An If the bonnet11 is not closed properly then the
explanatory text is shown on the information warning symbol illuminates together with an
• If both symbols extinguish, continue
display at the same time. The symbol remains explanatory image in the information display.
driving.
visible until the fault has been rectified but the Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possi-
• If the symbols remain illuminated, text message can be cleared with the OK ble and close the bonnet.
check the level in the brake fluid reser- button; see Menu navigation - combined
voir; see Brake and clutch fluid - level If the tailgate is not closed properly then the
instrument panel (p. 110). The warning sym-
(p. 358). If the brake fluid level is nor- information symbol illuminates together with
bol can also illuminate in conjunction with
mal but the symbols are still illumi- an explanatory image in the information dis-
other symbols.
nated, the car can be driven, with great play. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as
care, to a workshop to have the brake Action: possible and close the tailgate.
system checked. Volvo recommends
1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car
that you seek assistance from an
further.
11 Only cars with alarm*.

Related information Outside temperature gauge Trip meter

• Combined instrument panel (p. 64) The display for the outside temperature gauge The trip meter display appears in the com-
• Combined instrument panel - meaning of appears in the combined instrument panel. bined instrument panel.
• Digital combined instrument panel - over-
view (p. 65)
03
Display for outside temperature gauge, Trip meter, digital instrument.

digital instrument panel Display for trip meter12
Display for outside temperature gauge, The two trip meters T1 and T2 are used for
analogue instrument panel measuring short distances. The distance is
When the temperature lies between +2 °C to shown in the display.
-5 °C a snowflake symbol illuminates in the
Turn the left stalk switch thumbwheel to show
display. This warns of icy roads. If the car has
the required meter.
been stationary, the gauge may display a
reading that is too high. A long press (until the change occurs) on the
left-hand stalk switch's RESET button resets
Related information the trip meter shown. For more information,
• Combined instrument panel (p. 64) see Trip computer - supplementary informa-
tion (p. 123).
Related information
12 Display appearance may differ depending on instrument variant.
73
Clock Combined instrument panel - licenses The offer is valid for a period of at least three
The clock display appears in the combined A license is an agreement for the right to (3) years from the date of the distribution of
instrument panel. operate a certain activity or the right to use this product by VCC / or for as long as VCC
someone else's entitlement according to the offers spare parts or customer support.
terms and conditions in the agreement. The Portions of this product uses software
following text is Volvo's agreement with the copyrighted © 2007 The FreeType Project
manufacturer/developer. (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
Combined Instrument Panel Software Portions of this product uses software with
03 Copyright © 1994–2013 Lua.org, PUC-Rio
Open Source Software Notice
(http://www.lua.org/)
This product uses certain free / open source
and other software originating from third
parties, that is subject to the GNU Lesser
General Public License version 2 (LGPLv2),
The FreeType Project License ("FreeType
License") and other different and/or additional
Clock, digital instrument panel. copy right licenses, disclaimers and notices.
Display for showing the time13 The links to access the exact terms of
This product includes software under
LGPLv2, and the other open source software
following licenses:
Set the clock licenses, disclaimers, acknowledgements and
The clock can be adjusted in the menu sys- notices are provided to you below. Please LGPL v2.1: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-
tem MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 112). refer to the exact terms of the relevant licenses/lgpl-2.1.html
License, regarding your rights under said
Related information licenses. Volvo Car Corporation (VCC) offers
• GNU FriBidi
• Combined instrument panel (p. 64) to provide the source code of said free/open • DevIL
source software to you for a charge covering The FreeType Project License: http://
the cost of performing such distribution, such git.savannah.gnu.org/cgit/freetype/
as the cost of media, shipping and handling, freetype2.git/tree/docs/FTL.TXT
upon written request. Please contact your
• FreeType 2
nearest Volvo Dealer.
13 The time is shown in the centre of an analogue instrument panel.
74
MIT License: http: http://opensource.org/ Symbols in the display Symbol Specification See
licenses/mit-license.html There are a variety of different symbols in the
• Lua display in the car. The symbols are divided Parking brake (p. 71)
into warning, indicator and information sym- applied, alterna-
bols. tive symbol
Shown below are the most common symbols Airbags – SRS (p. 28),
with their meanings and a reference to where (p. 71)
in the manual further information can be
Seatbelt (p. 25), 03
found.
reminder (p. 71)
- Red warning symbol, illuminates
when a fault has been indicated which could Alternator not (p. 71)
affect the safety and/or driveability of the car. charging
An explanatory text is shown in the informa- Fault in brake (p. 71),
tion display in the combined instrument panel system (p. 286)
at the same time.
Warning, safety (p. 28),
- Information symbol, illuminates in mode (p. 39),
combination with text in the information dis- (p. 71),
play in the combined instrument panel, when (p. 270)
a deviation in any of the car's systems has
occurred. The information symbol can also
Control symbols in the combined
illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.
instrument panel
Warning symbols in the combined Symbol Specification See
instrument panel
ABL fault* (p. 69),
Symbol Specification See (p. 93)
Low oil pressure (p. 71) Emissions sys- (p. 69)
tem
Parking brake (p. 71),
applied (p. 288) ABS fault (p. 69),
(p. 286)
}}

||
Symbol Specification See Symbol Specification See Symbol Specification See
Rear fog lamp on (p. 69), ECO function* on (p. 69), Windscreen sen- (p. 91),
(p. 94) (p. 284) sor*, Camera sen- (p. 221),
sor*, Laser sen- (p. 230),
Stability system, (p. 69), Tyre pressure (p. 69), sor* (p. 234),
ESC (Electronic (p. 274), system* (p. 325) (p. 238)
Stability Control), (p. 190),
Hill descent con- (p. 307) Information symbols in the combined Auto Brake*, Dis- (p. 214),
03 trol, Trailer sta- tance Warning* (p. 221),
instrument panel
bility assist (Distance Alert), (p. 230)
Symbol Specification See
City SafetyTM,
Stability system, (p. 69), Collision warning
sport mode (p. 190) Cruise control* (p. 195)
system*
Engine preheater (p. 69) Adaptive cruise (p. 210) ABL system* (p. 93)
(diesel) control*
Low level in fuel (p. 69), Adaptive cruise (p. 197),
tank (p. 144) control*, time (p. 200) Driver Alert Sys- (p. 233)
interval tem*, Time for a
Information, read (p. 69)
display text break
Adaptive cruise (p. 202),
control*, Distance (p. 212) Driver Alert Sys- (p. 234)
Main beam On (p. 69),
Warning* (Dis- tem*, Time for a
(p. 90)
tance Alert) break
Left-hand direc- (p. 69)
Radar sensor* (p. 210),
tion indicators Parking brake (p. 288)
(p. 214),
Right-hand (p. 69) (p. 230)
direction indica- Rain sensor* (p. 99)
tors – – –
Active high beam, (p. 91)
Start/Stop*, (p. 69), AHB (Active High
engine auto- (p. 282) Beam)*
stopped

Symbol Specification See Symbol Specification See Information symbols in the roof console
display
Start/Stop* (p. 282) Engine block (p. 144)
Symbol Specification See
heater and pas-
senger compart- Seatbelt reminder (p. 27)
ment heater*
Start/Stop* (p. 282) Service required
Airbag, passenger (p. 32)
Activated timer* (p. 144) seat, activated
03
Driver Alert Sys- (p. 234),
tem*, Lane Depar- (p. 238) Airbag, passenger (p. 32)
ture Warning Activated timer* (p. 144) seat, deactivated
(LDW)
Related information
Driver Alert Sys- (p. 236) • Combined instrument panel - meaning of
tem*, Lane Depar- Low battery (p. 144) indicator symbols (p. 69)
ture Warning* • Combined instrument cluster - meaning
Fuel filler flap, (p. 295) of warning symbols (p. 71)
Driver Alert Sys- (p. 238)
right-hand side • Messages - handling (p. 112)
tem*, Lane Depar-
ture Warning* Gear shift indica- (p. 266)
tor
Recorded speed (p. 192)
information*
Gear positions (p. 267)
Engine block and (p. 144)
passenger com-
partment heater* Measuring the oil (p. 353)
level
– – –

Volvo Sensus functions can be activated or deactivated and of the buttons both vary, depending on the
many different settings can be made. equipment selected and the market.
Volvo Sensus is the heart of your personal
Volvo experience. It is Sensus that provides Navigation* - NAV, see separate supple-
With a press on MY CAR all settings related
information, entertainment and functions to ment (Sensus Navigation).
to the driving and control of the car are pre-
simplify your ownership. sented, such as City Safety, locks and alarm, Audio and media - RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*,
automatic fan speed, setting the clock, etc. see separate supplement (Sensus Info-
tainment).
With a press on the respective function
Function settings - MY CAR, see MY
RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, *, NAV* and CAM*
03 CAR (p. 112).
other sources, systems and functions can be
activated, e.g. AM, FM, CD, DVD*, TV*, Internet-connected car - *, see sepa-
Bluetooth®*, navigation* and park assist cam- rate supplement (Sensus Infotainment).
era*. Climate control system (p. 126).
For more information about all functions/
Park assist camera* (p. 243) – CAM*.
systems, see the relevant section in the
When you are sitting in your car you want owner's manual or its supplement.
control, and in today's interconnected world,
this includes information, communication and Overview
entertainment when it is most suitable for
you. Sensus covers all our solutions that ena-
ble connection* to the outside world, at the
same time providing you with intuitive control
over all the car's capabilities.
Volvo Sensus combines and presents many
functions in several of the car's systems on
the centre console's display screen. With
Volvo Sensus the car can be personalised by
means of an intuitive user interface. Settings
can be made in Car settings, Audio and
media, Climate control, etc. Control panel in centre console. The figure is
With the centre console buttons and controls schematic - the number of functions and layout
or the steering wheel's right-hand keypad*

Key positions the remote control key in the ignition Key positions - functions at different
The remote control key can be used to set the switch. levels
vehicle's electrical system in different modes/ 2. Then press the remote control key in the To enable the use of a limited number of
levels so that different functions are available; lock up to its end position. functions with the engine switched off, the
see Key positions - functions at different lev- car's electrical system can be set in 3 differ-
els (p. 79). IMPORTANT ent levels - 0, I and II - with the remote con-
trol key. This owner's manual describes these
Foreign objects in the ignition switch can
impair the function or destroy the lock. levels throughout using the denomination
"key positions". 03
Do not press in the remote control key
incorrectly turned - hold the end with the The following table shows the functions avail-
detachable key blade, see Detachable key able in each key position/level.
blade - detaching/attaching (p. 168).
Remove the remote control key

Push the remote control key, allow it to eject,
then pull it out from the ignition switch.
Ignition switch with remote control key extrac-

ted/inserted.
NOTE
For cars with the Keyless* function the
remote control key does not need to be
inserted into the ignition switch but can be
stored in e.g. a pocket. For more informa-
tion on Keyless functions, see Keyless
drive* (p. 171).
Insert the remote control key

1. Hold the end of the remote control key
with the detachable key blade and insert
}}

||
Level Functions Level Functions • Key position I - With the remote control
key fully inserted into the ignition switch14
0 • Odometer, clock and tem- II • The headlamps come on. - Briefly press START/STOP ENGINE.
perature gauge are illumi- • Warning/indicator lamps illu- • Key position II - With the remote control
nated. minate for 5 seconds. key fully inserted into the ignition switch14
• Electrically operated seats • Several other systems are - Give a long15 press on START/STOP
can be adjusted. activated. However, electric ENGINE.
• The audio system can be heating in seat cushions and • Back to key position 0 - To return to key
03 used for a limited time - see the rear window can only be position 0 from position II and I - Briefly
the Sensus Infotainment sup- activated after starting the press on START/STOP ENGINE.
plement. engine.
This key position consumes a
Audio system
I • Panorama roof, power win- For information on audio system functions
lot of current from the starter
dows, 12 V socket in the pas- battery and should therefore be with remote control key removed, see the
senger compartment, naviga- avoided! Sensus Infotainment supplement.
tion, phone, ventilation fan
and windscreen wipers can Starting and stopping the engine
be used. Selecting key position/level For information about starting/stopping the
• Key position 0 - Unlock the car - This engine, see Starting the engine (p. 259).
means that the car's electrical system is
at level 0. Towing
For important information about the remote
NOTE control key during towing, see Towing
(p. 309).
To reach level I or II without starting the
engine - do not depress the brake/clutch Related information
pedal when these key positions are due to
be selected. • Key positions (p. 79)
14 Not required for cars with the Keyless* function.

15 Approx. 2 seconds.

Seats, front WARNING 4. Push the seat forward so that the head
The car's front seats have different setting restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.
Adjust the position of the driver's seat
options for optimum seating comfort. before setting off, never while driving. Raising takes place in reverse order.
Make sure that the seat is in locked posi-
tion in order to avoid personal injury in the WARNING
event of sudden braking or an accident.
Grasp the backrest and make sure that it
is properly locked after being folded up in
Lowering the passenger seat order to avoid personal injury in the event
backrest*16 of sudden braking or an accident. 03
Related information
• Seats, front - electrically operated*
(p. 82)
• Seats, rear (p. 83)
Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.
Forward/backward: lift the handle to

adjust the distance to the steering wheel
and pedals. Check that the seat is locked
after changing position.
Raise/lower* front edge of seat cushion, The passenger seat's backrest can be folded
pump up/down. forward to make room for long loads.
Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel. Move the seat as far back/down as possi-
Change the lumbar support*, press the ble.
button. Adjust the backrest to an upright position.
Control panel for power seat*, see Seats,
Lift the catches on the rear of the back-
front - electrically operated* (p. 82).
rest and fold it forward.
16 Only applies to comfort seats.

Seats, front - electrically operated* object. If this should happen, set the car's Store setting
The car's front seats have different setting electrical system in key position I or 0 and Memory button
options for optimum seating comfort. The wait a short time before adjusting the seat
again. Memory button
power seat can be moved forward/backward
and up/down. The front edge of the seat Only one movement (forward/back/up/down/ Memory button
cushion can be raised/lowered. The backrest inward/outward) can be made at a time.
angle and lumbar support* can be changed. Button for storing settings
Preparations
Power seat The seat can be adjusted for a certain time 1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
03
after unlocking the door with the remote con- 2. Press and hold button M while pressing
trol key without the key in the ignition switch. button 1, 2 or 3 simultaneously. Hold the
Seat adjustment is normally made in key buttons depressed until the acoustic sig-
position I and can always be made when the nal is heard and text is shown in the com-
engine is running. bined instrument panel.
Seat with memory function* The seat must be adjusted again before a
new memory can be set.
The setting for lumbar support is not stored.
Using a stored setting

Press one of the memory buttons 1-3 until the
seat and the door mirrors stop. If the button
Front edge of seat cushion up/down
is released, the movement of the seat and
Raise/lower seat door mirrors will be interrupted.
Seat, forward/backward Key memory* in remote control key

All remote control keys can be used by differ-
Backrest rake ent drivers to store the settings for the driv-
er's seat and door mirrors17, see Remote
Lumbar support* is adjusted inward and
The memory function stores settings for the control key - personalisation* (p. 162).
outward
seat and the door mirrors.
The power seats have overload protection
which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an
17 Only if the car is equipped with power seat with memory and retractable power rearview and door mirrors. The setting for lumbar support is not stored.

Emergency stop Seats, rear Manual lowering of the outer head

If the seat accidentally begins to move, press The rear seat backrest and the outer seat restraints, rear seat
one of the setting buttons for the seat or head restraints can be folded. The centre seat
memory buttons in order to stop the seat. head restraint can be adjusted to suit the
Restarting to reach the seat position stored in height of the passenger.
the key memory is performed by pressing the
Head restraint, centre seat, rear
unlock button on the remote control key. The
driver's door must then be open.
03
WARNING
Risk of crushing! Make sure that children
do not play with the controls. Check that
there are no objects in front of, behind or
under the seat during adjustment. Ensure
that none of the rear seat passengers is in Pull the locking handle closest to the head
danger of becoming trapped. restraint to fold the head restraint forward.
The head restraint is moved back manually
Heated seats until a "click" can be heard.
For heated seats, see Heated front seats*
(p. 133) and Heated rear seat* (p. 133). Adjust the head restraint according to pas-
senger height so that the whole of the back of WARNING
Related information the head is covered if possible. Slide it up as The head restraints must be in locked
• Seats, front (p. 81) required. position after being raised.
• Seats, rear (p. 83) To lower the head restraint again, the button
(located in the centre between the backrest Lowering the rear seat backrest
and head restraint, see illustration) must be
pressed in while the head restraint is pressed IMPORTANT
down carefully.
There must be no objects on the rear seat
when the backrest is to be folded down.
The seat belts must not be connected
either. Otherwise there is a risk of damag-
ing the rear seat upholstery.
}}

||
The triple-section backrest can be folded in WARNING
different ways.
Check that the backrests and head
restraints in the rear seat are locked prop-
NOTE erly after being folded up.
The front seats may need to be pushed
forwards, and/or the backrests adjusted Electrical lowering of the rear seat's
upwards, in order that the rear backrests
can be fully folded forward. outer head restraints*
03
• The left-hand section can be folded sepa- If the centre backrest is being lowered -
rately. release and adjust the head restraint for
• The centre section can be folded sepa- the centre backrest, see the earlier sec-
rately. tion "Head restraint, centre seat, rear".
• The right-hand section can only be folded The outer head restraints are lowered
together with the centre section. automatically when the outer backrests
• If the entire backrest is to be folded then are lowered. Pull up the backrest's lock-
the different sections should be folded ing handle while folding the backrest
separately. forward at the same time. A red indicator
on the lock catch shows that the
backrest is no longer locked in place. 1. The remote control key must be in key
Raising takes place in reverse order. position II.
2. Press the button to lower the rear outer
NOTE head restraints to improve rearward visi-
bility.
When the backrest has been raised, the
red indicator should no longer be showing.
If it is still showing then the backrest is not WARNING
locked in place.
Do not lower the outer head restraints if
there are any passengers using of the
outer seats.

Move the head restraint back manually until a Steering wheel 3. Push back the lever to fix the steering
click is heard. The steering wheel can be adjusted in differ- wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press
ent positions and has controls for horn and the steering wheel lightly at the same time
WARNING cruise control, as well as menu, audio and as you push the lever back.
The head restraints must be in locked phone control.
position after being raised. WARNING
Adjusting
Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before
Related information driving away.
03
• Seats, front (p. 81)
• Seats, front - electrically operated* (p. 82) With speed related power steering* the level
of steering force can be adjusted, see Adjust-
able steering force* (p. 251).
Keypads* and paddles*
Adjusting the steering wheel.

Lever - releasing the steering wheel
Possible steering wheel positions

The steering wheel can be adjusted for both
height and depth:
1. Pull the lever towards you to release the
Keypads and paddles in the steering wheel.
steering wheel.
Cruise control* (p. 195)
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
that suits you. Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 197)
}}

||
Paddle for manual gear changing in an Heating* of the steering wheel approx. 10 °C. Activate/deactivate the func-
automatic gearbox, see Automatic gear- The steering wheel can be heated with elec- tion in the menu system MY CAR (p. 112).
box -- Geartronic* (p. 267) tric heating.
Menu, audio and phone control, see sup-
plement, Sensus Infotainment Function
Horn
03
Button position may vary depending on equip-

ment selected and market.
Horn. Repeatedly press the button to switch
Press the centre of the steering wheel to sig- between the following functions:
nal.
Function Indicator
Related information
• Heating* of the steering wheel (p. 86) Switched off Button lamp extinguished
Heating Button lamp illuminated
Automatic steering wheel heating

With activated automatic start of steering
wheel heating, the heating of the steering
wheel starts when the engine is started. Auto-
matic start takes place when the car is cold
and the ambient temperature is below

Light switches Knob positions Posi- Specification

The headlamp control activates and adjusts tion
the external lighting. It is also used to adjust NOTE
display and instrument lighting and mood Daytime running lights, posi-
The same lamps are used for daytime run-
lighting (p. 96). tion/parking lamps rear and
ning lights and position/parking lamps
front. The brightness is higher when the side marker lamps in daylight
Overview, light switches lamps are used as daytime running lights. when the car's electrical sys-
tem is in key position II or the
engine is running.
03
Posi- Specification
Dipped beam and position/
tion parking lamps/side marker
Daytime running lightsA when lamps in weak daylight or dark-
the car's electrical system is in ness, or when the rear fog lamp
key position II or the engine is or windscreen wipers with con-
running. tinuous wiping are activated.
Main beam flash can be used. The tunnel detection (p. 90)*
function is activated.
Daytime running lights, posi-
The Active main beam (p. 91)*
Overview, light switches. tion/parking lamps rear and
function can be used.
Thumbwheel for adjusting display and side marker lamps when the
car's electrical system is in key Main beam can be activated
instrument lighting as well as ambient
position II or the engine is run- when dipped beam is switched
lighting*
ning. on.
Button for rear fog lamp
Position/parking lamps/side Main beam flash can be used.
Knob for daytime running lights and park- marker lamps when the car is
ing lamps Dipped beam and position/
parked.
parking lamps/side marker
Thumbwheel18 for headlamp levelling Main beam flash can be used. lamps.
Main beam can be activated.
18 Not available for cars equipped with active Xenon headlamps*.

}}

||
Posi- Specification Position/parking lamps
tion Position/parking lamps are switched on with
the headlamp control's knob.
Main beam flash can be used.
A Fitted in or under the front bumper.
Volvo recommends that mode is used

when the car is being driven, as long as traffic
03 situations or weather conditions are unfavour-
able for the Active main beam* function.
Instrument lighting
Different display and instrument lighting is Thumbwheel positions for different load cases.
switched on depending on key position; see
Only driver
Key positions - functions at different levels
(p. 79). Driver and passenger in the front passen-
The display lighting is automatically subdued ger seat Knob for headlamp control in the position for
in darkness - the sensitivity is set with the position/parking lamps.
Occupants in all seats
thumbwheel. Turn the knob to the position for (num-
Occupants in all seats and maximum load ber plate lighting is switched on at the same
The intensity of the instrument lighting is in the cargo area
adjusted with the thumbwheel. time).
The driver and maximum load in the
Headlamp levelling If the car's electrical system is in key position
cargo area
The load in the car changes the vertical align- II or the engine is running then the daytime
Cars with active Xenon headlamps* have running lights switch on instead of the front
ment of the headlamp beam, which could
automatic headlamp levelling and are there- position/parking lamps.
dazzle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by
fore not equipped with the thumbwheel.
adjusting the height of the beam. Lower the When it is dark outside and the tailgate is
beam if the car is heavily laden. Related information opened the rear position/parking lamps illumi-
1. Leave the engine running, or have the • Position/parking lamps (p. 88) nate to alert traffic behind. This takes place
car's electrical system in key position I. • Daytime running lights (p. 89) irrespective of what position the knob is in or
what key position the car's electrical system
2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/ • Main/dipped beam (p. 90)
is in.
lower beam alignment.

Related information Daytime running lights WARNING

• Light switches (p. 87) With the knob for headlamp control in This system help to save energy - it cannot
position, and the car's electrical system in key determine in all situations when daylight is
position II or the engine running, the daytime too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist
running lights are activated automatically in and rain.
daylight. The driver is always responsible for ensur-
ing that the car is driven with the correct
Daytime running lights during the day. beam pattern for the traffic situation and in
DRL accordance with applicable traffic regula- 03
tions.
Knob for headlamp control in AUTO position.

With the knob for headlamp control in
position the daytime running lights (Daytime
Running Lights - DRL) are activated automati-
cally when the car is driven in daylight. A light
sensor on the top of the instrument panel
changes from daytime running lights to
dipped beam at twilight or when daylight
becomes too weak. Switching to dipped
beam also takes place when the windscreen
wipers or rear fog lamps are activated.
89
Tunnel detection* Main/dipped beam Dipped beam

Tunnel detection changes the lighting from With the knob for headlamp control in posi- With the knob in position, dipped beam
daytime running lights to dipped beam when tion and the car's electrical system in is activated automatically at twilight or when
the car is driven into a tunnel. Approx. 20 sec- key position II or the engine running, the daylight becomes too weak. Dipped beam is
onds after the car has left the tunnel, the light- dipped beam is activated automatically in also activated automatically if the windscreen
ing returns to daytime running lights. poor light conditions. wipers or rear fog lamps are activated.
The tunnel detection function is available in With the knob for headlamp control in posi- With the knob in position dipped beam
cars with rain sensor*. The sensor detects the tion dipped beam is always switched on is always switched on when the engine is run-
03 entrance to a tunnel and resets the lighting ning or when key position II is active.
when the engine is running or when key posi-
from daytime running lights to dipped beam. tion II is active.
Approx. 20 seconds after the car has left the Main beam flash
tunnel, the lighting returns to daytime running Move the stalk switch gently towards the
lights. If the car is driven into another tunnel steering wheel to the position for main beam
within this time period then dipped beam is flash. Main beam comes on until the stalk
kept switched on. This avoids repeated switch is released.
changes to the car's lighting.
Main beam
Note that the headlamp control's knob must Main beam can be activated when the knob
remain in position for tunnel detection is in position 19 or . Activate/deac-
to work. tivate main beam by moving the stalk switch
towards the steering wheel to the end posi-
Related information tion and then releasing.
• Main/dipped beam (p. 90)
When main beam has been activated the
• Light switches (p. 87) Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control. symbol illuminates in the combined
Position for main beam flash instrument panel.
Position for main beam Auxiliary lamps*
If the car has auxiliary lamps, the driver can
use the MY CAR menu system to choose
whether they should be deactivated or
19 When dipped beam is switched on.

switched on/off simultaneously with the main Active main beam* beam about a second after the camera sen-
beam20, see MY CAR (p. 112). Active main beam function is available with sor no longer detects the headlamp beams
on/off functionality, or adaptive functionality, from oncoming traffic the rear lights of vehi-
Related information depending on headlamp variant. The function cles in front.
• Active Xenon headlamps* (p. 93) detects the headlamp beams from oncoming If the active main beam has adaptive func-
• Active main beam* (p. 91) traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front, tionality then, unlike what happens during
• Light switches (p. 87) and switches the lighting from main beam to conventional dimming, the light beam contin-
dipped beam. Active main beam with adap- ues to illuminate with main beam on both
• Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern
(p. 99) tive functionality only dims the part of the light sides of oncoming traffic or vehicles ahead - 03
beam that points directly to the vehicle. The only the part of the light beam that points
• Tunnel detection* (p. 90) lighting returns to main beam when the directly to the vehicle is dimmed.
incoming light has stopped.
Active main beam - AHB

Active main beam (Active High Beam - AHB)
is a function which uses a camera sensor at
the top edge of the windscreen to detect the
headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the
rear lights of vehicles in front, and then
switches from main beam to dipped beam.
The function can also take streetlights into
account.
Car with halogen headlamps
The lighting returns to main beam about a Adaptive functionality: Dipped beam directly
second after the camera sensor no longer toward oncoming vehicles, but continued main
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming beam on both sides of the vehicle.
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front. The lighting returns to full main beam about a
Car with active Xenon headlamps second after the camera sensor no longer
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming
If the active main beam has the on/off func- traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.
tionality then the lighting returns to main
20 Auxiliary lamps must be connected to the electrical system by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
}}

||
Activating/deactivating When AHB is activated the symbol illu- If the message Active main beam
AHB can be activated when the headlamp minates in the instrument's information dis- Temporary unavailable Switch manually is
control's knob is in position (provided play. shown in the combined instrument panel's
that the function has not been deactivated in information display then you have to switch
When main beam is switched on the manually between main and dipped beam.
the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR
symbol also illuminates in the combined However, the knob for headlamp control can
(p. 112)).
instrument panel. This also applies for active still remain in position . The same
Xenon headlamps if the main beam is partially applies if the message Windscreen sensors
dimmed, i.e. as soon as the light beam shines
03 with slightly more than dipped beam. blocked See manual and the symbol
are shown. The symbol goes out when
Car with digital combined instrument panel these messages are shown.
When AHB is activated the symbol AHB may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in
turns white in the instrument's information situations with dense fog or heavy rain. When
display. AHB becomes available again, or the wind-
When main beam is activated, the symbol screen sensors are no longer blocked, the
turns blue. This also applies for active Xenon message extinguishes and the symbol
headlamps if the main beam is partially illuminates.
dimmed, i.e. as soon as the light beam shines
Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control in
AUTO position. with slightly more than dipped beam. WARNING
The function can start while driving in the Manual operation AHB is an aid for using the optimum beam
dark when the car's speed is 20 km/h or pattern when conditions are favourable.
higher. NOTE The driver always bears responsibility for
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the manually switching between main and
Activate/deactivate AHB by moving the left- dipped beam when traffic situations or
hand stalk switch towards the steering wheel camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist
and dirt. weather conditions so require.
to the end position and then releasing. Deac-
tivation when main beam is on means that the Do not stick or attach anything to the
lights are reset directly to dipped beam. windscreen in front of the camera sensor IMPORTANT
as this may reduce effectiveness or cause
Car with analogue combined instrument one or more of the systems dependent on Examples of when manual switching
panel the camera to stop working. between main and dipped beam may be
required:
92
• In heavy rain or dense fog Active Xenon headlamps* minates in the combined instrument panel at
• In freezing rain Active Xenon headlamps are designed to pro- the same time as the information display
vide maximum illumination in bends and junc- shows an explanatory text and a further illu-
• In snow flurries or slush
minated symbol.
tions and so provide increased safety.
• In moonlight
• When driving in poorly lit built-up Active Xenon headlamps ABL Symbol Message Specification
areas
• When the traffic ahead has weak light- Headlamp The system is
ing system disengaged. Visit
03
malfunc- a workshop if
• If there are pedestrians on or beside
tion Serv- the message
the road
ice remains. Volvo
• If there are highly reflective objects required recommends
such as signs in the vicinity of the road that you contact
• When the lighting from oncoming traf- an authorised
fic is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier Volvo workshop.
• When there is traffic on connecting
roads The function is only active in twilight or dark-
• On the brow of a hill or in a hollow Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) ness and only when the car is moving.
and activated (right) respectively.
• In sharp bends. The function21 can be deactivated/activated
If the car is equipped with active Xenon head- in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR
lamps (Active Bending Lights – ABL) the light (p. 112).
For more information on the limitations of the from the headlamps follows the steering
camera sensor, see Collision warning system* wheel movement in order to provide maxi- For headlamp pattern adjustment, see Head-
- camera sensor limitations (p. 228). mum lighting in bends and junctions and so lamps - adjusting headlamp pattern (p. 99).
Related information provide increased safety.
• Main/dipped beam (p. 90) The function is activated automatically when
• Light switches (p. 87) the car is started (provided that it has not
been deactivated in the menu system
MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 112)). In the event
of a fault in the function the symbol illu-
21 Activated on delivery from the factory.

}}

||
Cornering lights* Rear fog lamp NOTE
Active Xenon headlamps with the Active main When visibility is reduced by fog the rear fog
beam function of the adaptive type (Active Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps
lamp can be used so that other road users vary from country to country.
main beam with adaptive functionality) are shall notice vehicles in front at an early stage.
equipped with cornering lights that temporar-
ily illuminate the area diagonally in front of the Related information
car in the direction the steering wheel is • Light switches (p. 87)
turned in a sharp bend, or in the direction the
direction indicators are being used.
03
The function is activated when main beam or
dipped beam is used and the car's speed is
lower than approx. 30 km/h.
In addition, both cornering lights are switched
on as a supplement to the reversing lamp
during reversing.
Related information Button for rear fog lamp.

• Main/dipped beam (p. 90)
The rear fog lamp can only be switched on
• Active main beam* (p. 91)
when key position II is active or the engine is
• Light switches (p. 87) running and the headlamp control's knob is in
position or .
Press the button for On/Off. The rear fog
lamp's indicator symbol in the com-
bined instrument panel and the light in the
button both illuminate when the rear fog lamp
is switched on.
The rear fog lamp is switched off automati-
cally when the engine is switched off or when
the headlamp control's knob is turned to
position or .

Brake lights Hazard warning flashers vated automatically when the car is driven off
The brake light automatically comes on during The hazard warning flashers warn other road again or the button is depressed.
braking. users by means of all of the car's direction
Related information
indicator lamps flashing simultaneously when
The brake light is switched on when the brake this function is activated.
• direction indicators (p. 96)
pedal is depressed. In addition, it is switched • Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
on when one of driving support systems When the hazard warning flashers are acti- automatic hazard warning flashers
Adaptive cruise control (p. 197), City Safety vated both direction indicator symbols flash in (p. 287)
(p. 215) or Collision warning system (p. 222) the combined instrument panel.
brakes the car. 03
Related information
• Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers
(p. 287)
Button for hazard warning flashers.

Press the button to activate the hazard warn-
ing flashers. Both direction indicator symbols
in the combined instrument panel flash when
the hazard warning flashers are used.
The hazard warning flashers are activated
automatically when the car has been braked
so suddenly that the emergency brake lights
have been activated at a speed below
10 km/h. The hazard warning flashers remain
on when the car has stopped and are deacti-
95
direction indicators The stalk switch remains in its position and is Interior lighting
The car's direction indicators are operated moved back manually, or automatically by the The passenger compartment lighting is acti-
with the left-hand stalk switch. The direction steering wheel movement. vated/deactivated with the buttons in the con-
indicator lamps flash three times or continu- trols above the front seats and the rear seat.
Direction indicator symbols
ously, depending on how far up or down the
For direction indicator symbols, see Com-
stalk switch is moved.
bined instrument panel - meaning of indicator
symbols (p. 69).
03 Related information
• Hazard warning flashers (p. 95)
G021149
Controls in roof console for the front reading
lamps and passenger compartment lighting.
Direction indicators. Reading lamp, left-hand side
Short flash sequence Reading lamp, right-hand side
Move the stalk switch up or down to the
first position and release. The direction Interior lighting
indicator lamps flash three times. The All lighting in the passenger compartment can
function can be activated/deactivated in be switched on and off manually within
the menu system MY CAR, see MY 30 minutes from when:
CAR (p. 112).
• the engine has been switched off and the
Continuous flash sequence car's electrical system is in key position 0
Move the stalk switch up or down to the • the car has been unlocked but the engine
outer position. has not been started.
96
Front roof lighting The lamps are switched on or off by pressing Neutral position
The front reading lamps are switched on or each respective button. When the button is in neutral position the
off by pressing the relevant button in the roof passenger compartment lighting is switched
console. Courtesy lighting on and off automatically in accordance with
Courtesy lighting (and passenger compart- the following.
Rear roof lighting ment lighting) is switched on and off respec-
tively when a side door is opened or closed. The passenger compartment lighting is
switched on and remains on for 30 seconds
Glovebox lighting if:
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off 03
• the car is unlocked with the remote con-
respectively when the lid is opened or closed. trol key or key blade, see Remote control
Vanity mirror lighting key - functions (p. 164) or Detachable
key blade - unlocking doors (p. 169)
The lighting for the vanity mirror (p. 152) is
switched on and off respectively when the • the engine has been switched off and the
cover is opened or closed. car's electrical system is in key position
0.
G021150
Lighting in the cargo area Passenger compartment lighting is switched

The lighting in the cargo area is switched on off when:
Rear roof lighting. and off respectively when the tailgate is
opened or closed. • the engine is started
• the car is locked.
Automatic lighting
The passenger compartment lighting comes
The switch for passenger compartment light-
on and remains on for two minutes if one of
ing has three positions for the lighting in the
the doors is open.
passenger compartment:
If any lighting is switched on manually and
• Off – right-hand side pressed in, auto-
the car is locked then it will be switched off
matic lighting deactivated.
automatically after two minutes.
• Neutral position – automatic lighting
activated. Mood lights*
• On – left-hand side pressed in, passenger When the normal passenger compartment
compartment lighting switched on. lighting is switched off and the engine is run-
Rear roof lighting in cars with panorama roof. ning, a number of LEDs illuminate, including
one in the ceiling lighting, in order to provide
a low-light and enhance the mood while driv-
}}

ing. The light also makes it easier to see Home safe light duration Approach lighting
objects in storage compartments etc. during Home safe lighting consists of dipped beam, Approach lighting consists of parking lamps,
the darker hours of the day. This lighting goes parking lamps, lamps in the door mirrors, lamps in the door mirrors, number plate light-
out for a little while after the normal passen- number plate lighting, interior roof lighting as ing, interior roof lighting as well as courtesy
ger compartment lighting when the car is well as courtesy lighting. lighting.
locked. The brightness is controlled using the
thumbwheel on the headlamp control (p. 87). Some of the exterior lighting can be kept Approach lighting is switched on with the
switched on to work as home safe lighting remote control key, see Remote control key -
after the car has been locked. functions (p. 164), and is used to switch on
03 the car's lighting at a distance.
1. Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch. When the function is activated with the
remote control, the parking lamps, door mir-
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward
ror lamps, number plate lighting, interior roof
the steering wheel to the end position and
lamps and courtesy lighting are switched on.
release it. The function can be activated
in the same way as with main beam flash; The length of time for which the approach
see Main/dipped beam (p. 90). lighting should be kept on can be set in the
menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 112).
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
When the function is activated, dipped beam, Related information
parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number • Home safe light duration (p. 98)
plate lighting, interior roof lamps and courtesy
lighting are switched on.
The length of time for which the home safe
lighting should be kept on can be set in the
menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 112).
Related information
• Approach lighting (p. 98)
98
Headlamps - adjusting headlamp Wipers and washing Intermittent wiping

pattern Wipers and washers clean the windscreen Set the number of sweeps per time
If the car is equipped with active Xenon head- and rear window. The headlamps are cleaned unit with the thumbwheel when
lamps and has the Active High Beam function with high-pressure washing. intermittent wiping is selected.
then the headlamp pattern must be reset
Windscreen wipers22 Continuous wiping
when changing from right to left-hand traffic,
The wipers sweep at normal speed.
and vice versa.
Active Xenon headlamps* The wipers sweep at high speed. 03

No adjustment of the headlamp pattern is
necessary for cars without the Active High
Beam* function. The headlamp pattern is
designed in such a way that oncoming traffic
IMPORTANT
is not dazzled. Before activating the wipers during winter
ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen
Headlamp pattern adjustment is required for in, and that any snow or ice on the wind-
cars with Active High Beam. The car must be screen is scraped away.
stationary with the engine running when the
headlamp pattern is shifted between right and
left-hand traffic. Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers. IMPORTANT
Rain sensor, On/Off Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
The headlamp pattern is changed in the menu
system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 112). are cleaning the windscreen. The wind-
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency screen must be wet when the windscreen
Halogen headlamps wipers are operating.
No adjustment of the headlamp pattern is Windscreen wipers off
Move the stalk switch to position 0
necessary. The headlamp pattern is designed Service position wiper blade
in such a way that oncoming traffic is not to switch off the windscreen wipers.
For cleaning the windscreen/wiper blades
dazzled. and replacement of wiper blades, see Wiper
Single sweep
Raise the stalk switch and release to blades (p. 366) and Car wash (p. 388).
make one sweep. Rain sensor*
The rain sensor automatically starts the wind-
screen wipers based on how much water it
22 For replacing the wiper blades and service position wiper blades, see Wiper blades (p. 366). For filling washer fluid, see Washer fluid - filling (p. 368).
}}

||
detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of the ignition switch or five minutes after the Heated washer nozzles*
the rain sensor can be adjusted using the engine has been switched off. The washer nozzles are heated automatically
thumbwheel. in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid
When the rain sensor is activated a lamp in IMPORTANT freezing solid.
the button is illuminated and the rain sensor The windscreen wipers could start and be High-pressure headlamp washing*
symbol is shown in the combined damaged in an automatic car wash. High-pressure headlamp washing consumes
instrument panel. Switch off the rain sensor while the car is
in motion or when the remote control key a large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid,
is in position I or II. The symbol in the the headlamps are washed automatically at
03 Activating and setting the sensitivity
combined instrument panel and the lamp every fifth windscreen wash cycle.
When activating the rain sensor, the car must
in the button go out.
be running or the remote control key in posi- Reduced washing
tion I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains
switch must be in position 0 or in the position Washing the headlamps and windows in the reservoir and the message that you
for a single sweep. should fill the washer fluid is shown in the
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the but- combined instrument panel, then the supply
ton . The windscreen wipers make one of washer fluid to the headlamps is switched
off. This is in order to prioritise cleaning the
sweep.
windscreen and the visibility through it.
Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to
make an extra sweep.
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sen-
sitivity and downward for lower sensitivity.
(An extra sweep is made when the thumb-
wheel is turned upward.)
Deactivate Washing function.

Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the
Washing the windscreen
button or move the stalk switch down Move the stalk switch toward the steering
to another wiper program. wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated washers.
when the remote control key is removed from The windscreen wipers will make several
more sweeps and the headlamps are washed
once the stalk switch has been released.

Wiping and washing the rear window Wiper – reversing Power windows
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen All power windows can be operated using the
wipers are on initiates intermittent rear win- control panel for the driver's door - the con-
dow wiping23. The function stops when trol panels for the other doors operate their
reverse gear is disengaged. respective power window.
If the rear window wiper is already on at con-
tinuous speed, no change is made.
NOTE 03
On cars with rain sensors, the rear wiper is

activated during reversing if the sensor is
activated and it is raining.
Rear window wiper – intermittent wiping
Related information
Rear window wiper – continuous speed • Washer fluid - filling (p. 368)
Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrow • Washer fluid - quality and volume
in the illustration above) to initiate rear win- (p. 410)
Driver's door control panel.
dow washing and wiping.
Switch for electric child safety locks* and
disengaging rear power window buttons;
NOTE see Child safety locks - electrical activa-
The rear window wiper is equipped with tion* (p. 181).
overheating protection which means that Rear window controls
the motor is switched off if it overheats.
The rear window wiper works again after a Front window controls
cooling period (30 seconds or longer,
depending on the heat in the motor and
the outside temperature).
23 This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
}}

||
WARNING Operating movement. It is possible to force the pinch
protection when closing has been interrupted,
Check that no rear seat passengers are e.g. with ice, by continuously holding the but-
trapped when the windows are closed ton up until the window is closed. The pinch
from the driver's door.
protection is reactivated after a brief pause.
WARNING NOTE
Check that children or other passengers One way to reduce the pulsating wind
03 are not trapped if the windows are closed, noise when the rear windows are open is
even when the remote control key is used. to also open the front windows slightly.
WARNING Operating without auto

Move one of the controls up/down gently.
If there are children in the car - remember Operating the power windows.
The power windows move up/down as long
to always switch off the power supply to Operating without auto
the power windows by selecting key posi- as the control is held in position.
tion 0 and then take the remote control key Operating with auto Operating with auto
with you when leaving the car. For infor- Move one of the controls up/down to the end
mation on key positions - see Key posi- All power windows can be operated using the position and release it. The window runs
tions - functions at different levels (p. 79). control panel for the driver's door - the con- automatically to its end position.
trol panels for the other doors can only each
operate their respective power window. Only Operating with the remote control key
one control panel can be operated at a time. and central locking
To remotely operate the power windows from
In order for the power windows to be used,
the outside with the remote control key or
the key position must be at least I - see Key
from inside with central locking, see Remote
positions - functions at different levels (p. 79).
control key (p. 161) and Locking/unlocking -
The power windows can be operated for a
from the inside (p. 176).
few minutes after the engine has been
switched off and after the remote control key
has been removed - although not after a door
has been opened.
Closing of the windows is stopped and the
window is opened if anything prevents its
102
Resetting Door mirrors WARNING

If the battery is disconnected then the func- The door mirror positions are adjusted with
tion for automatic opening must be reset so Both mirrors are the wide-angle type to
the joystick in the driver's door controls. provide optimal vision. Objects may
that it can work correctly. appear further away than they actually are.
1. Gently raise the front section of the but-
ton to raise the window to its end position
Storing settings24
and hold it there for one second.
The settings for the rearview and door mirrors
2. Release the button briefly. and the positions of the driver's seat can be
03
stored for each remote control key in the car
3. Raise the front section of the button again
key memory*, see Remote control key - per-
for one second.
sonalisation* (p. 162).
WARNING Angling the door mirror when parking24
A reset must take place for pinch protec- The door mirror can be angled down for the
tion to work. driver to view the side of the road when park-
Door mirror controls. ing for example.
– Engage reverse gear and press the L or R
Adjusting
button.
1. Press the L button for the left-hand door
mirror or the R button for the right-hand When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
door mirror. The light in the button illumi- automatically returns to its original position
nates. after approx. 10 seconds, or earlier by press-
ing the button labelled L or R respectively.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
centre. Automatic angling of the door mirror
3. Press the L or R button again. The light when parking24
should no longer be illuminated. When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror
is automatically angled down so that the
driver can see the side of the road when
parking for example. When reverse gear is
disengaged the mirror automatically returns
to its original position after a short time.
24 Only in combination with power seat with memory, see Seats, front - electrically operated* (p. 82).
}}

||
The function can be activated/deactivated in Retractable power door mirrors* Windows and rearview and door
the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driv- mirrors - heating
(p. 112). ing in narrow spaces: The defroster is used to quickly remove mist-
1. Depress the L and R buttons simultane- ing and ice from the windscreen, rear window
Automatic retraction when locking24
ously (key position must be at least I). and door mirrors.
When the car is locked/unlocked with the
remote control key the door mirrors are auto- 2. Release them after approximately Heated windscreen*, rear window and
matically retracted/extended. 1 second. The mirrors automatically stop door mirrors
The function can be activated/deactivated in in the fully retracted position.
03
the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L
(p. 112). and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors
automatically stop in the fully extended posi-
Resetting to neutral tion.
Mirrors that have been moved out of position
by an external force must be reset electrically Home safe and approach lighting
to the neutral position for electric retracting/ The lamp on the door mirrors illuminates
extending to work correctly: when approach lighting (p. 98) or home safe
1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R but- lighting (p. 98) is selected.
tons.
Related information
2. Fold them out again with the L and R but- • Rearview mirror - interior (p. 105)
tons. Heating, windscreen
• Windows and rearview and door mirrors -
3. Repeat the above procedure as neces- heating (p. 104) Heating, rear window and door mirrors
sary.
The function is used to remove ice and mist-
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position. ing from the windscreen, rear window and
door mirrors.
Automatic dimming*
For the door mirrors to be fitted with this One press of the respective button starts the
function requires that the interior rearview heating. The light in the button indicates that
mirror also has automatic dimming, see Rear- the function is active. Switch off the heating
view mirror - interior (p. 105). as soon as the ice/misting is cleared in order
not to load the battery unnecessarily. How-
24 Only in combination with power seat with memory, see Seats, front - electrically operated* (p. 82).

ever, the function is switched off automati- Rearview mirror - interior for manual dimming is not available on mir-
cally after a certain time. The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed rors with automatic dimming.
See also Demisting and defrosting the wind- with a control in the mirror's lower edge. The rearview mirror contains two sensors -
screen (p. 136). Alternatively, the rearview mirror dims auto- one forward facing and one rearward facing -
matically. that work together to identify and eliminate
The door mirrors and rear window are demis-
dazzling light. The forward facing sensor
ted/defrosted automatically if the car is
detects ambient light, while the rearward fac-
started in an outside temperature lower than
ing sensor detects the light from vehicle
+7 °C. Automatic defrosting can be selected
headlights behind. 03
in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR
(p. 112).
NOTE
If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking
permits, transponders, sun visors or
objects in the seats or in the cargo area in
such a way that light is prevented from
reaching the sensors, then the dimming
function of the interior rearview and door
mirrors is reduced.
Control for dimming
Only rearview mirror with automatic dimming
Manual dimming can be equipped with compass (p. 106).
Bright light from behind could be reflected in
the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use Related information
dimming with the dimming control when • Door mirrors (p. 103)
lights from behind are distracting:
1. Use dimming by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment.
2. Return to normal position by moving the
control towards the windscreen.
Automatic dimming*
Bright light from behind is automatically
dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control

Compass* side of the mirror using a paper clip for exam-

The rearview mirror contains an integrated ple.
display that shows the compass direction in
Calibration
which the front of the car is pointing.
The compass may need calibrating to show
Operation the correct compass direction.
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The compass should be calibrated if the car
03 is moved across several magnetic zones.
Proceed as follows to perform calibration:
G030295
1. Stop the car in a large open area free
from steel structures and high-voltage Magnetic zones.
power lines.
4. Press the button repeatedly until the
2. Start the car and switch off all electrical required magnetic zone (1–15) is shown.
equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.) See the map of magnetic zones for the
and ensure that all doors are closed. compass.
Rearview mirror with compass. 5. Wait until the display returns to showing
NOTE the character C, or hold the button on the
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview
Calibration may fail or not start at all if underside of the rearview mirror
mirror has an integrated display that shows
electrical equipment is not switched off. depressed for approx. 6 seconds until the
the compass direction in which the front of
character C is shown.
the car is pointing. Eight different directions
are shown with English abbreviations: N 3. Hold the button on the underside of the 6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no
(north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south rearview mirror depressed (use a paper more than 10 km/h until a compass direc-
east), S (south), SW (south west), W (west) clip or similar) for approx. 3 seconds. The tion is shown in the display, indicating
and NW (north west). number of the current magnetic zone is that calibration is complete. Then drive a
shown. further 2 circles to fine-tune calibration.
The compass is activated automatically when
the car is started or when key position II is
active, see Key positions - functions at differ-
ent levels (p. 79). To deactivate/activate the
compass - press in the button on the under-

7. Cars with heated windscreen*: If the Panorama roof* - general WARNING

character C is shown in the display when The panorama roof is divided into two sec-
the heated windscreen is activated, per- Children, other passengers or objects may
tions. Only the front section can be opened - be trapped by the panorama roof's moving
form the calibration in accordance with horizontally or vertically at the rear edge (ven- parts.
point 6 above with the heated windscreen tilation position).
activated, see Demisting and defrosting • Always operate the panorama roof
the windscreen (p. 136). The panorama roof has a sun blind made of with caution.
perforated fabric and located under the glass • Do not allow children to play with the
8. Repeat the above procedure as neces- roof to provide extra protection from factors controls.
sary. such as strong sunlight. 03
• Remember to always switch off the
power supply to the panorama roof by
selecting key position 0 and then take
the remote control key/PCC* with you
when leaving the car. For information
on key positions - see Key positions -
functions at different levels (p. 79).
Wind deflector
The panorama roof and curtain are operated

with a control located in the roof. The control
is activated when the key is in position I or II,
see Key positions - functions at different lev-
els (p. 79).
The panorama roof has a wind deflector that

is folded up when the panorama roof is in the
open position.

Panorama roof* - operation control forward to the automatic closing posi-

The blind/roof is opened to maximum during tion instead.
automatic operation. Rapid opening/closing
In ventilation position the front section of the The panorama roof and curtain can be
roof is raised at the rear. opened/closed simultaneously:
• To open - press the control rearward to
WARNING the automatic operation position twice
Children, other passengers or objects may and release.
03
be trapped by the panorama roof's moving • To close - press the control forward to
parts. the automatic operation position twice
• Always operate the panorama roof and release.
with caution. Opening, automatic Manual operation
• Do not allow children to play with the 1. To open the curtain - press the control
controls. Opening, manual
rearward to the point of resistance for
• Remember to always switch off the Closing, manual manual opening. The curtain moves
power supply to the panorama roof by towards maximum opening as long as the
selecting key position 0 and then take Closing, automatic button is depressed.
the remote control key/PCC* with you
when leaving the car. For information The panorama roof and curtain can be oper- 2. To angle the panorama roof - press the
on key positions - see Key positions - ated in key position I or II. control rearward again to the point of
functions at different levels (p. 79). resistance for manual opening
Automatic operation
1. To open the curtain all the way - press 3. To open the panorama roof - press the
the control rearward to the automatic control rearward to the point of resistance
opening position and release. for manual opening a third time. The pan-
orama roof moves towards maximum
2. To then open the panorama roof all the opening as long as the button is kept
way - press the control rearward again to depressed.
the automatic opening position and
release. Close the roof/curtain by repeating the pre-
ceding procedure in reverse order - press the
Close the roof/curtain by repeating the pre- control forward to the manual closing position
ceding procedure in reverse order - press the instead.

NOTE Closing using the remote control key or is then opened automatically to approx. 50
central locking button mm from the blocked position (or to full venti-
For manual opening, the curtain must be lation position). The pinch protection is also
fully open before the panorama roof can active when the glass cover or sun blind is
be opened. For the reverse procedure, the
panorama roof must be fully closed before opened.
the curtain can be closed. There is the option to force the pinch protec-
tion when closing has been interrupted e.g. in
Ventilation position the event of ice forming around the glass
cover, by continually holding the control 03
pressed forward or depressed until the glass
cover is closed.
One long press on the lock button, see

Remote control key - functions (p. 164) and
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 176),
closes the panorama roof and all the win-
dows. The door mirrors are retracted* and the
doors and tailgate are locked. To interrupt
Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge. closing, press the lock button again.
Open by pressing the rear edge of the
control upward. WARNING
Close by pulling the rear edge of the con- If the panorama roof is closed with the
trol down. remote control key, check that no one
When the ventilation position is selected the risks being trapped.
front section is raised at its rear edge. If the
curtain is fully closed when ventilation posi- Pinch protection
tion is selected - then it opens automatically The panorama roof has pinch protection that
approx. 50 mm. is triggered if the glass cover or the sun blind
is blocked by an object during closing. In the
event of blocking, the glass cover or sun blind

Menu navigation - combined Menu overview - combined

instrument panel instrument panel
The left-hand stalk controls the menus Which menus are shown in the combined
(p. 110) shown on the information display in instrument panel's information display
the combined instrument panel (p. 64). Which depends on the key position (p. 79).
menus are shown depends on the key posi-
tion (p. 79). Some of the following menu options require
the function and hardware to be installed in
the car.
03
Analogue combined instrument panel
Digital speed
Display (digital combined instrument panel) and Parking heater*
controls for menu navigation.
Additional heater*
OK – access to message list and mes-
sage confirmation. TC options
Thumbwheel – browse between menu Service status
options.
Oil level25
RESET – reset the active function. Used
in certain cases to select/activate a func- Messages (##)26
Display (analogue combined instrument panel)
and controls for menu navigation. tion, see the explanation under each
respective function. Digital combined instrument panel
If there is a message (p. 111) then it must be Settings*
acknowledged with OK in order that the Themes
menus shall be shown.
Contrast mode/Colour mode
Related information Service status
• Messages - handling (p. 112)
Messages26
Oil level25
25 Certain engines.
26 The number of messages is indicated in brackets.

Parking heater* Messages Message Specification

Trip computer reset When a warning, information or indicator
symbol illuminates, a corresponding message Time for reg- Time for regular service -
appears on the information display. ular mainte- contact a workshopB. The
Related information
nance timing is determined by
• Analogue combined instrument panel -
the number of kilometres
overview (p. 64) Message Specification
driven, number of months
• Digital combined instrument panel - over- Stop safelyA Stop and switch off the since the last service,
view (p. 65) engine. Serious risk of engine running time and 03
• Menu navigation - combined instrument damage - consult a work- oil grade.
panel (p. 110) shopB.
Maintenance If the service intervals are
Stop engineA Stop and switch off the overdue not followed then the
engine. Serious risk of warranty does not cover
damage - consult a work- any damaged parts -
shopB. contact a workshopB.
Service Contact a workshopB to Transmission Contact a workshopB to
urgentA check the car immedi- Oil change check the car as soon as
ately. needed possible.
Service Contact a workshopB to Transmission The gearbox cannot han-
requiredA check the car as soon as Reduced dle full capacity. Drive
possible. performance carefully until the mes-
sage clearsC.
See manualA Read the owner's man-
ual. If shown repeatedly -
contact a workshopB.
Book time Time to book regular
for mainte- service - contact a work- Transmission Drive more smoothly or
nance shopB. hot Reduce stop the car in a safe
speed manner. Disengage the
gear and run the engine
at idling speed until the
message clearsC.
}}

||
Message Specification Messages - handling MY CAR
Use the left-hand stalk switch to acknowledge MY CAR is a menu source that handles many
Transmission Critical fault. Stop the car and browse among messages (p. 111) that of the car's functions, e.g. City Safety™, locks
hot Stop immediately in a safe are shown in the information display of the and alarm, automatic fan speed, setting the
safely Wait manner and contact a combined instrument panel. clock, etc.
for cooling workshopB.
When a warning, information or indicator Certain functions are standard, others are
Temporarily A function has been tem- symbol illuminates, a corresponding message optional - the range also varies depending on
offA porarily switched off and appears in the display at the same time. An the market.
03 is reset automatically error message is stored in a memory list until
while driving or after star- the fault has been rectified. Operation
ting again. Navigation in the menus is carried out using
Press OK on the left-hand stalk switch to buttons in the centre console or with the
Low battery The audio system is acknowledge a message. Scroll through mes- steering wheel's right-hand keypad*.
charge switched off to save sages with the thumbwheel (p. 110).
Power save energy. Charge the bat-
mode tery. NOTE
A Part of message, shown together with information on If a warning message appears while you
where the problem has arisen. are using the trip computer, the message
B An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. must be read (press OK) before the previ-
C For more information regarding the automatic gearbox, see
Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p. 267). ous activity can be resumed.
Related information
Related information
• Messages - handling (p. 112)
• Menu overview - combined instrument
• Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 110)
panel (p. 110)

vary, depending on the equipment selected and Menu options and search paths
the market. For a description of the menu options and
MY CAR - opens the menu system MY search paths in MY CAR, see the Sensus
CAR. Infotainment supplement.
OK/MENU - press the button in the cen-
tre console or the thumbwheel on the
steering wheel to select/tick in the high-
lighted menu option or store the selected
function in the memory. 03
TUNE - turn the knob in the centre con-
sole or the thumbwheel on the steering
wheel to scroll up/down through the
menu options.
EXIT
EXIT functions
Depending on the function the cursor is on
when EXIT is depressed briefly, and on which
menu level, one of the following may occur:
• phone call is rejected
• current function is interrupted
• input characters are deleted
• most recent selections are undone
• leads up in the menu system.
A long press on EXIT leads to the normal
view for MY CAR or if you are in the normal
Control panel in centre console and steering
wheel keypad. The figure is schematic - the num- view, to the highest menu level (main source
ber of functions and layout of the buttons both menu).
113
Trip computer Group menus

The car's trip computer can record, calculate The trip computer has two different group
and show information while driving. menus:
Trip computer content and appearance varies • Functions

depending on whether the combined instru- • Heading in combined instrument panel
ment panel is analogue or digital: The trip computer's functions or headings
• Trip computer - analogue combined are each listed in an infinite loop.
03 instrument panel (p. 115)
Related information
• Trip computer - digital combined instru- • Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 124)
ment panel (p. 119)
• Trip computer - supplementary informa-
Checking and settings can be made immedi- tion (p. 123)
ately after the combined instrument panel is
automatically illuminated in connection with
unlocking. If none of the trip computer's con-
trols are actuated within approx. 30 seconds
after the driver's door has been opened then
the instrument extinguishes, after which
either key position II (p. 79) or engine starting
is required in order to operate the trip com-
puter.
NOTE
If a warning message appears when the
trip computer is used then the message
must first be acknowledged before the trip
computer can be reactivated.
• Acknowledge the message by briefly
pressing the indicator stalk OK button.

Trip computer - analogue combined Functions

instrument panel Proceed as follows to open and check/adjust
functions:
The trip computer's menu is in a variable
1. To ensure that no control is in the middle
loop. One of the alternatives is that the trip
of a sequence - "Reset" them first with
computer's display extinguishes - this also
two presses on RESET.
marks the start/end of the loop.
2. Press OK - the loop with all functions
opens.
3. Browse through the functions with the 03
thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK.
4. Finish by pressing twice on RESET after
completed checking/adjustment.
The different functions of the trip computer
are listed in the following table:
Information display and controls.

OK - Opens the loop with the trip com-
puter's functions + Activates the selected
option.
Thumbwheel - Opens the loop with the
trip computer's headings + Scrolls
through the options.
RESET - Undoes, zeroes or backs out of
a function after making a selection.
}}
115
||
Functions Information
Digital speed Shows the car's speed digitally in the centre of the combined instrument panel:
• km/h • Open with OK, select with the thumbwheel, confirm with OK and back out with ENTER.
• mph
• No display
Parking heater* For a description of programming the timer, see Engine block heater and passenger compart-
03 ment heater* - timer (p. 142).
• DIRECT START
• - Timer 1 - leads to the menu for select-
ing time.
• - Timer 2 - leads to the menu for select-
ing time.
Additional heater* For more information, see Additional heater* (p. 146).
• Auto On
• Off
TC options Here you can select/activate the options that you want to be available as selectable headings in
the trip computer. The symbols for the items already selected are WHITE with a "tick" - others are
• Distance to empty tank
GREY and have no "tick":
• Fuel consumption
1. Open the function with OK, scroll through the symbols for the options with the thumbwheel
• Average speed and select/stop on the desired symbol.
• Trip meter T1 and total dist. 2. Confirm with OK - the symbol changes colour from GREY to WHITE and is marked with a
• Trip meter T2 and total dist. "tick".
3. Continue to select the function symbols with the thumbwheel or finish with RESET.
Service status Shows the number of months and mileage to next service.

Oil levelA For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 353).
Messages (##) For more information, see Messages - handling (p. 112).
A Certain engines.
Headings 1. To ensure that no control is in the middle 3. Stop on desired heading.

of a sequence - "Reset" them first with 03
One of the headings in the following table can
be selected for constant display in the com- two presses on RESET.
bined instrument panel. Proceed as follows to 2. Turn the thumbwheel - selectable head-
determine which: ings for the trip computer are shown in a
loop.
Trip computer heading in combined instrument Information

panel
Trip meter T1 and total dist. • Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.
Trip meter T2 and total dist. • Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.
Distance to empty For more information - see the section "Range - distance to empty tank" (p. 123).
Fuel consumption Current consumption.
Average speed • Long press on RESET resets Average speed.
No trip computer information. This option shows a blank display - it also marks the beginning/end of the loop.
The combined instrument panel's trip com- • Turn the thumbwheel - stop on the Resetting - Trip meter and Average
puter can be changed to another option at desired heading. speed
any time during the journey. Proceed as fol- With the current trip computer heading - T1
lows: and total dist.,T2 and total dist. or
}}
117
||
Average speed - shown in the combined
instrument panel:
• Give a long press on RESET - selected
heading is zeroed.
Each heading must be zeroed individually.
Related information
• Trip computer (p. 114)
03 • Trip computer - supplementary informa-
tion (p. 123)
• Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 124)

Trip computer - digital combined Functions

instrument panel Proceed as follows to open and check/adjust
functions:
The trip computer's menu is in a variable
loop. One of the alternatives is that the trip
computer's three displays extinguish - this
also marks the start/end of the loop.
2. Press OK - loop with all functions opens.
3. Browse through the functions with the
thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK. 03
4. Finish by pressing twice on RESET after

completed checking/adjustment.
The different functions of the trip computer
are listed in the following table:
Information displays and stalk switch controls.

OK - Opens the loop with the trip com-
puter's functions + Activates the selected
option.
Thumbwheel - Opens the loop with the
trip computer's headings + Scrolls
through the options.
RESET - Undoes, zeroes or backs out of
a function after making a selection.
}}
119
||
Trip computer reset Note that this function does not reset both trip meters T1 and T2 - see table under next section
"Headings" and section "Resetting - Average speed/consumption" for information on the proc-
• Average
ess.
• Average speed
Messages For more information, see Messages - handling (p. 112).
03 Themes The appearance of the combined instrument panel (p. 64) is selected here.
Settings* Select Auto On or Off.

For more information, see Additional heater* (p. 146).
Contrast mode/Colour mode Adjusting the combined instrument panel's brightness and colour intensity.
Parking heater* For a description of programming the timer, see Engine block heater and passenger compart-
ment heater* - timer (p. 142).
• Direct start
• - Symbol Timer 1 - leads to the menu for
selecting time.
• - Symbol Timer 2 - leads to the menu for
selecting time.
Service status Shows the number of months and mileage to next service.
Oil levelA For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 353).
A Certain engines.

Headings One of the heading combinations in the fol-

lowing table can be selected for constant dis-
play in the combined instrument panel. Pro-
ceed as follows to determine which:
2. Turn the thumbwheel - selectable head-
ing combinations are shown in a loop. 03
3. Stop on desired heading combination.
Three trip computer headings can be displayed

simultaneously - one in each "window".
Heading combinations Information
Average Trip meter T1 + Meter reading Average speed • Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.
Instantaneous Trip meter T2 + Meter reading Distance to empty • Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.
tank
Instantaneous Meter reading kmh<>mph kmh<>mph - see section "Digital speed display" (p. 123).
No trip computer information. This option extinguishes all three trip computer displays - it also marks
the beginning/end of the loop.
The combined instrument panel's heading Resetting - Trip meter • Give a long press on RESET - selected
combination for the trip computer can be Turn with the thumbwheel to the heading trip meter is zeroed.
changed to another option at any time during combination containing the trip meter to be
the journey. Proceed as follows: reset:
• Turn the thumbwheel - stop on the
desired heading.
}}
121
||
Resetting - Average speed/
consumption
1. Select function Trip computer
reset and activate with OK.
2. Select one of the following options with
the thumbwheel and activate with OK:
• l/100 km
03 • km/h
• Reset both
3. Finish with RESET.
Related information
• Trip computer - supplementary informa-
tion (p. 123)

Trip computer - supplementary Range - distance to empty tank Change unit

information The trip computer shows the approximate You can change unit (km/miles) for distance
Supplementary information covering several distance that can be driven with the fuel and speed in the menu system MY CAR, see
functions follows below. quantity remaining in the tank. MY CAR (p. 112).
No guaranteed range remains when the head-
Average NOTE
ing Distance to empty shows "----".
Average fuel consumption is calculated from
the last resetting. • In which case, refuel as soon as possible. In addition to in the trip computer, these
units are also changed in Volvo's naviga-
The calculation is based on the average fuel tion system*. 03
NOTE
consumption over the last 30 km and the
There may be a slight deviation if a fuel- remaining driveable fuel quantity.
driven heater* has been used. Related information
NOTE
Average speed There may be a slight deviation if the driv-
The average speed is calculated for the driving style has been changed.
ing distance driven since the last reset to
zero.
An economic driving style generally results in
Instantaneous a longer driving distance. For more informa-
The information for current fuel consumption tion on how fuel consumption can be influ-
is updated continuously - approximately once enced, see Volvo Car Corporation 's Environ-
per second. When the car is driven at low mental Philosophy (p. 21).
speed the consumption is shown per time
unit - at a higher speed it is shown related to Digital speed display27
mileage. The speed is shown in the opposite unit
(kmh/mph) in relation to the main instrument.
Different units (km/miles) can be selected for If it is calibrated in mph then the trip com-
the display - see section "Change unit" puter shows the corresponding speed in
(p. 123). km/h and vice versa.
27 Only with combined instrument panel "Digital".

Trip computer - trip statistics* Operation

Information is stored about completed trips Different settings can be made in the menu
containing average fuel consumption and system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 112) -
average speed, which can be viewed in the there, find Trip statistics.
centre console's screen as a bar chart. With the "Reset when vehicle has been off
Function for minimum 4h" option highlighted, all sta-
tistics are deleted automatically once driving
is complete and the car has been stopped for
03 4 hours. Trip statistics start again from zero
the next time the engine is started.
• Reset when vehicle has been off for
minimum 4h - highlight the box by
selecting ENTER and go back out of the
menu by selecting EXIT.
If a new driving cycle is started before
4 hours have elapsed then the current period
must first be deleted manually using the
"Start new trip" option.
Trip statistics28
• Start new trip - ENTER is used to delete
Each bar symbolises 1 km or 10 km driven all previous statistics, go back out of the
distance, depending on the scale selected - menu by selecting EXIT.
the bar at the far right shows the value for the See also information on Eco guide (p. 68).
current kilometre or 10 km.
Using the TUNE control, the scale for the
Related information
bars can be changed between 1 km and • Trip computer - supplementary informa-
tion (p. 123)
10 km - the cursor on the far right changes
position between up and down in relation to
the scale selected.
28 The figure is schematic - layout may vary depending on car model or updated software.

CLIMATE CONTROL
04 Climate control
General information on climate may then be a temporary increase in tem- • Air distribution in the passenger compart-
control perature in the passenger compartment. ment (p. 130)
The car is equipped with electronic climate • Remove misting on the insides of the win- • Air quality (p. 127)
control (p. 132). The climate control system dows primarily by using the defroster
cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air function (p. 136). To reduce the risk of
in the passenger compartment. misting, keep the windows clean and use
window cleaner.
NOTE
Cars with Start/Stop*
Air conditioning (AC) (p. 135) can be With an auto-stopped (p. 275) engine certain
switched off, but to ensure the best possi- equipment may have its function temporarily
ble climate comfort in the passenger com- reduced, e.g. climate control fan speed
partment, and to prevent the windows
(p. 134).
from misting, it should always be switched
04 on.
Cars with ECO*
Certain equipment may have its function tem-
To bear in mind porarily reduced or deactivated when the
• To ensure that the air conditioning works ECO (p. 284) function is activated, e.g. the air
optimally, the side windows, and panor- conditioning (p. 135).
ama roof* should be closed.
• Global opening (p. 176) opens/closes all NOTE
side windows simultaneously and can be
When the ECO function is activated, sev-
used for example to quickly air the car
eral parameters in the climate control sys-
during hot weather. tem's settings are changed, and several
• Remove ice and snow from the climate electricity consumer functions are
control system air intake (the grille reduced. Certain settings can be reset
between the bonnet and the windscreen). manually, but full functionality is only
restored by deactivating the ECO function.
• In warm weather, condensation from the
air conditioning may drip under the car.
This is normal. Related information
• When the engine requires full power, e.g. • Actual temperature (p. 127)
for full acceleration, the air conditioning • Menu settings - climate control (p. 129)
can be temporarily switched off. There • Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 132)

04 Climate control
Actual temperature Sensors - climate control Air quality

The temperature you select in the passenger The climate control system has a number of The interior in a passenger compartment is
compartment corresponds to the physical sensors to help control the temperature designed to be pleasant and comfortable,
experience with reference to factors such as (p. 127) in the car. even for people with contact allergies and for
ambient temperature, air speed, humidity and asthma sufferers.
solar radiation etc. in and around the car at • The sun sensor is located on the top side
the time. of the dashboard. • Passenger compartment filter (p. 128)
• The temperature sensor for the passen- • Material in the passenger compartment
The system includes a sun sensor (p. 127) ger compartment is located below the cli- (p. 129)
which detects on which side the sun is shin- mate control panel.
ing into the passenger compartment. This
• Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)
• The outside temperature sensor is (p. 128)*
means that the temperature can differ located in the door mirror.
between the right and left-hand air vents • Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)
despite the controls being set for the same • The humidity sensor* is located by the (p. 129)* 04
interior rearview mirror.
temperature on both sides. Related information
Related information NOTE • General information on climate control
(p. 126)
• General information on climate control Do not cover or block the sensors with
(p. 126) clothing or other objects.
• Temperature control in the passenger
compartment (p. 135)
Related information
• General information on climate control
(p. 126)

04 Climate control
Air quality - passenger compartment Air quality - Clean Zone Interior NOTE
filter Package (CZIP)*
To keep the CZIP standard in cars with
All air entering the car's passenger compart- CZIP comprises a series of modifications that CZIP the IAQS filter must be changed after
ment is cleaned with a filter. keep the passenger compartment even 15 000 km or once per year depending on
clearer from allergy and asthma-inducing sub- whichever occurs first. However, up to
The filter must be replaced at regular inter- stances. 75 000 km over 5 years. In cars without
vals. Follow the Volvo Service Programme for CZIP and where the customer does not
the recommended replacement intervals. If The following is included: want to keep the CZIP standard the IAQS
the car is used in a severely contaminated filter must be changed at a regular service.
environment, it may be necessary to replace
• An enhanced fan function that means that
the fan starts when the car is opened with
the filter more often. the remote control key. The fan fills the For more information on CZIP, see the bro-
passenger compartment with fresh air. chure included with the purchase of the car.
NOTE The function starts when required and is
04 disengaged automatically after a time or Related information
There are different types of passenger
compartment filter. Make sure that the cor- when one of the passenger compartment • General information on climate control
rect filter is fitted. doors is opened. The amount of time the (p. 126)
fan runs is reduced gradually due to • Air quality (p. 127)
reduced need up until the car is 4 years
Related information old.
• Air quality (p. 127)
• The air quality system IAQS (p. 129) is a
fully automatic system that cleans the air
in the passenger compartment from con-
taminants such as particles, hydrocar-
bons, nitrous oxides and ground-level
ozone.

04 Climate control
Air quality - IAQS* Air quality - material Menu settings - climate control
The air quality system IAQS separates gases Tested materials have been developed in It is possible to activate/deactivate or change
and particles to reduce the levels of odours order to minimise the quantity of dust in the the default settings for six of the climate con-
and pollution in the passenger compartment. passenger compartment and to contribute to trol system's functions via the centre console.
making the passenger compartment easier to
If the outside air is contaminated then the air keep clean. • Fan level during automatic climate control
intake is closed and the air is recirculated. (p. 134).
The carpets in both the passenger compart- • Recirculation timer (p. 137).
It is possible to activate/deactivate the func-
ment and the cargo area are removable and
tion in the menu system MY CAR. For a
easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning
• Automatic start of rear window defroster
description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 104).
agents and car care products recommended
(p. 112). • Interior air quality system* (p. 129).
by Volvo to clean the interior (p. 391).
• Automatic start of seat heating driver
NOTE Related information (p. 133). 04
The air quality sensor must always be ena- • Air quality (p. 127)
• Automatic start of steering wheel heating
bled to ensure the best air in the passen- (p. 86).
ger compartment.
More information is available in the descrip-
In a cold climate recirculation is limited so tion of the menu system (p. 112).
as to prevent misting.
The climate control system's functions can be
In the event of misting, the air quality sen-
sor should be disengaged, and the reset in the menu system MY CAR to the
defroster functions for the windscreen and default settings. For a description of the
side windows, as well as the rear window, menu system, see MY CAR (p. 112).
should be used.
Related information
Related information • General information on climate control
(p. 126)
(p. 126)
• Air quality (p. 127)
• Air quality - Clean Zone Interior Package
(CZIP)* (p. 128)

04 Climate control
Air distribution in the passenger Air vents in the dashboard Air vents in the door pillars
compartment
The incoming air is divided between a number
of different vents in the passenger compart-
ment.
04
Open Closed
Closed Open
Lateral airflow Lateral airflow
Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO Vertical airflow Vertical airflow

mode.
Aim the outer vents at the side windows to Aim the vents at the windows to remove mist-
If necessary it can be controlled manually; remove misting. ing in cold weather.
see the air distribution table (p. 138).
Aim the vents into the passenger compart-
ment to maintain a comfortable climate in the
rear seat in hot weather.
NOTE
Remember that small children may be sen-
sitive to air flows and draughts.
130
04 Climate control
Air distribution
The selected air distribution is shown in the cen-

tre console display screen. 04
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Related information
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - ventilation floor (p. 126)
• Auto-regulation (p. 134)
The figure consists of three buttons. When
pressing the buttons the corresponding figure • Air distribution - recirculation (p. 137)
is illuminated in the screen (see following fig-
ure) and an arrow in front of each part of the
figure shows the air distribution that is
selected. For more information, see the air
distribution table (p. 138).
131
04 Climate control
Electronic climate control - ECC compartment and can be set separately for The auto function is used to automatically
ECC (Electronic Climate Control) maintains the driver's side and passenger side. control temperature, air conditioning, fan
the temperature selected in the passenger speed, recirculation and air distribution.
04
Temperature control (p. 135), left-hand Rear window and door mirror defrosters Related information
side (p. 104) • General information on climate control
Electrically heated front seat (p. 133), left Electrically heated front seat (p. 133), (p. 126)
side right side
Heated windscreen* and max. defroster Temperature control (p. 135), right-hand
(p. 136) side
Fan (p. 134) Recirculation (p. 137)
Air distribution (p. 130) - ventilation floor ECO* (p. 284)
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel AUTO - Automatic climate control
(p. 134)
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
AC - Air conditioning on/off (p. 135)

04 Climate control
Heated front seats* • Lowest heat level - one orange field illu- Heated rear seat*
The front seat heating has three positions for minates in the screen. The heating for the rear seat's1 outer posi-
increasing the comfort for driver and passen- • Switch off the heat - no field illuminates. tions has three positions for increasing the
ger when it is cold. comfort for passengers when it is cold.
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase
in temperature due to a lack of sensation
or who otherwise have problems operating
the controls for the heated seats. Other-
wise they may suffer burn injuries.
Automatic start of driver's seat heating 04

With the automatic start of the driver's seat
heating activated, the driver's seat will have
the highest heat level when the engine is
started.
Current heat level is shown in the centre console Current heat level is shown in the pushbutton's
display screen. Automatic start takes place when the car is lamps.
cold and the ambient temperature is lower Press the button repeatedly in order to acti-
than approx. +10 °C. vate the function:
It is possible to activate/deactivate the func- • Highest heat level - three lamps illumi-
tion in the menu system MY CAR. For a nate.
description of the menu system, see MY CAR
(p. 112).
• Lower heat level - two lamps illuminate.
• Lowest heat level - one lamp illuminates.
Press the button repeatedly in order to acti- Related information
vate the function: • Switch off the heat - no lamp illuminates.
• Highest heat level - three orange fields (p. 126)
illuminate in the centre console's screen • Heated rear seat* (p. 133)
(see figure above).
• Lower heat level - two orange fields illu-
minate in the screen.
}}

04 Climate control
||
WARNING Fan Auto-regulation
The fan should always be activated in order to The auto function automatically regulates
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase avoid misting on the windows. temperature (p. 135), air conditioning
in temperature due to a lack of sensation (p. 135), fan speed (p. 134), recirculation
or who otherwise have problems operating NOTE (p. 137) and air distribution (p. 130).
the controls for the heated seats. Other- If the fan is fully switched off then the air
wise they may suffer burn injuries. If you select one or more
conditioning is not engaged - which can manual functions, the other
cause a risk of misting on the windows.
functions continue to be
Related information controlled automatically. All
• General information on climate control Fan knob manual settings are disen-
(p. 126) Turn the knob to increase or gaged when AUTO is
• Heated front seats* (p. 133) decrease fan speed. If AUTO pressed. The display screen
04 is selected, then the fan shows AUTO CLIMATE.
speed is regulated automati-
Fan speed in automatic mode can be set in
cally (p. 134) - the fan speed
the menu system MY CAR. For a description
previously set is disengaged.
of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 112).
Related information Related information
(p. 126) (p. 126)
• Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 132)
1 Heated rear seat is not specified with the option for integrated two-stage booster seat (p. 49).

04 Climate control
Temperature control in the passenger Related information Air conditioning

compartment • General information on climate control The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies
When the car is started, the most recent tem- (p. 126) incoming air as required.
perature setting is resumed. • Actual temperature (p. 127)
When the lamp in the AC
• Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 132) button illuminates, the air
NOTE
conditioning is controlled by
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by the system's automatic func-
selecting a higher or lower temperature tion.
than the actual desired temperature.
When the lamp in the AC
button is switched off the air conditioning is
disconnected. Other functions are still con-
trolled automatically. When the max.
04
defroster function (p. 136) is activated, the air
conditioning is switched on automatically so
that the air is dehumidified at the maximum
setting.
Current temperature for each side is shown in

the centre console's display screen.
The temperature can be
adjusted with the knob -
separately for the driver's
side and the passenger side.
135
04 Climate control
Demisting and defrosting the For cars without heated windscreen: NOTE
windscreen • Air flows to the windows - symbol (2) illu- Electrically heated windscreen is not avail-
Heated windscreen* and max. defroster are minates in the screen. able when the engine is auto-stopped
used to quickly remove misting and ice from (p. 275).
• Switch off the function - no symbol illumi-
the windscreen and side windows. nates.
For cars with heated windscreen: The following also takes place in order to pro-
vide maximum dehumidification in the pas-
• Start the heating for the windscreen2
- senger compartment:
symbol (1) illuminates in the screen.
• Start the heating for the windscreen2 and
• the air conditioning is automatically
engaged
air flow to the windows - symbols (1) and
(2) illuminate in the screen. • recirculation and the air quality system
are automatically disengaged.
04 • Switch off the function - no symbol illumi-
nates.
NOTE
NOTE The noise level increases as the fan is
operating at max.
Heated windscreen and IR window (p. 19)
The selected setting is shown in the centre con- may have an impact on the performance of
sole's screen. transponders and other communication When the defroster is switched off the climate
Heated windscreen* equipment. control returns to the previous settings.
Max. defroster Related information

NOTE • General information on climate control
The light in the defroster but-
A triangular area at the end of each side of (p. 126)
ton illuminates when the
the windscreen is not electrically heated,
function is active. where de-icing may take longer.
Press the button repeatedly
in order to activate the func-
tion.
2
If the character C is shown in the rearview mirror when the heated windscreen is activated then the compass (p. 106)* must be recalibrated.

04 Climate control
Air distribution - recirculation Related information

Select recirculation to shut out bad air, • General information on climate control
exhaust gases etc. from the passenger com- (p. 126)
partment, i.e. no outside air is taken into the • Air distribution in the passenger compart-
car when this function is activated. ment (p. 130)
When recirculation is • Air distribution - table (p. 138)

engaged the orange lamp in
the button illuminates.
IMPORTANT 04
If the air in the car is recirculated for too

long then there is a risk of misting on the
insides of the windows.
Timer
With the timer function activated the system
will exit manually activated recirculation mode
according to a time that depends on the out-
side temperature. This reduces the risk of ice,
misting and bad air.
It is possible to activate/deactivate the func-
tion in the menu system MY CAR. For a
description of the menu system, see MY CAR
(p. 112).
NOTE
When max. defroster is selected, recircula-
tion is always deactivated.
137
04 Climate control
Air distribution - table

Three buttons are used to select the distribu-
tion (p. 130) of the air.
Air distribution Use

Air to windows. Some air flows from the air vents. The air is not to remove ice and misting quickly.
recirculated. Air conditioning is always engaged.
Air to windscreen, via defroster vent, and side windows. Some air to prevent misting and icing in a cold and humid climate,
04
flows from the air vents. (not at too low fan speed to enable this).
Airflow to windows and from dashboard air vents. to ensure good comfort in warm, dry weather.
Airflow to the head and chest from dashboard air vents. to ensure efficient cooling in warm weather.
138
04 Climate control
Air distribution Use

Air to the floor and windows. Some air flows from the dashboard to ensure comfortable conditions and good demisting in
air vents. cold or humid weather.
Air to floor and from dashboard air vents. in sunny weather with cool outside temperatures.
04
Air to floor. Some air flows to the dashboard air vents and win- to direct heat or cold to the floor.
dows.
Airflow to windows, from dashboard air vents and to the floor. to provide cooling along the floor in hot, dry weather or
warming upwards in cold weather.
Related information
(p. 126)
• Air distribution - recirculation (p. 137)
139
04 Climate control
Engine and passenger compartment Refuelling appears on the information display. Acknowl-
heater* edge the message by pressing the indicator
Preconditioning prepares the car's heater, stalk (p. 110) OK button once.
engine and passenger compartment before
departure so that both wear and energy IMPORTANT
needs during the journey are reduced. Repeated use of the heater combined with
The heater can be started directly (p. 141) or short journeys leads to the battery dis-
with a timer (p. 142). charging and consequential starting prob-
lems.
The heater cannot start if the outside tem- The car should be driven for the same time
perature exceeds 15 °C. At –5 °C or lower the as the heater is used to ensure that the
maximum running time of the heater is 50 car's battery is recharged adequately to
minutes. replace the energy consumed by the
04 Warning label on fuel filler flap. heater when it is used on a regular basis.
The heater is used for a maximum of 50
WARNING minutes each time.
WARNING
Do not use the fuel-driven heater indoors.
Exhaust gases are secreted. Fuel which spills out could be ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven auxiliary heater Related information
before starting to refuel. • Engine block heater and passenger com-
NOTE partment heater* - messages (p. 144)
Check in the combined instrument panel
When the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is that the heater is switched off. The heat • Additional heater* (p. 146)
active there may be smoke from the right- symbol is shown when it is operating.
hand wheel housing, which is perfectly
normal.
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of
the car should point downhill to ensure that
there is a supply of fuel to the fuel-driven
heater.
Battery and fuel

If the battery has insufficient charge or the
fuel level is too low, the heater will be
switched off automatically and a message

04 Climate control
Engine block heater and passenger Direct start via the remote control key* If the button for information is depressed
compartment heater* - direct start when the heater is active then the indicator
The engine block heater and passenger com- lamp will show the status for this - at the
partment heater can be started directly. same time the car's lock status (p. 166) is
shown. While the status is being investigated
Direct start can be performed via: the indicator lamp emits a pair of short
• information display flashes followed by a constant glow if the
heater is active.
• remote control key*
• mobile*. Status is also shown in the trip computer dur-
ing heating.
Upon direct start of the engine block and
passenger compartment heater (p. 140), it will Direct start via a mobile*
run for 50 minutes. Activation and information about the selected
Indicator lamp on remote control key with PCC*. 04
Heating of the passenger compartment will settings that can be managed from a mobile
begin as soon as the engine coolant has The engine block heater and passenger com- phone will be available via the Volvo On Call*
reached the correct temperature. partment heater can be activated via the mobile app.
remote control key:
Related information
NOTE – Hold the button for approach lighting • Engine block heater and passenger com-
The car can be started and driven while depressed for 2 seconds. partment heater* - timer (p. 142)
the heater is running. • Engine block heater and passenger com-
Hazard warning flashers provide informa-
tion in accordance with the following: partment heater* - immediate stop
Direct start via the information display (p. 142)
1. Press OK to access the menu. • 5 short flashes followed by a constant
• Engine block heater and passenger com-
glow for approx. 3 seconds - the signal
partment heater* - messages (p. 144)
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking has reached the car and the heater has
heater and select with OK. been activated.
3. Scroll forward in the next menu to Direct • 5 short flashes - the signal has
start in order to activate the heater and reached the car but the heater has not
select with OK. been activated.
4. Exit the menu with RESET.

• Hazard warning flashers remain
switched off - the signal has not
reached the car.

04 Climate control
Engine block heater and passenger Engine block heater and passenger 6. Briefly press OK to move to the flashing
compartment heater* - immediate compartment heater* - timer minutes setting.
stop The timer of the engine block and passenger 7. Select the required minute using the
The engine block heater and passenger com- compartment heater (p. 140) is connected to thumbwheel.
partment heater can be deactivated directly the car's clock.
8. Press OK4 to confirm the setting.
via the information display.
Two different times can be selected using the
9. Go back in the menu structure using
1. Press OK to access the menu. timer. Here, time refers to the time when the
RESET.
car is heated and ready. The car's electronic
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking 10. Select the other time (continue from step
system calculates when heating should be
heater and select with OK. 2) or exit the menu with RESET.
started based on the outside temperature.
3. Scroll forward in the next menu to Stop in
order to deactivate the heater and select Starting
NOTE
04 with OK. 1. Press OK to access the menu.
All timer programming will be cleared if the
4. Exit the menu with RESET. car's clock is reset. 2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking
heater and select with OK.
Related information 3. Select one of the two timers using the
• Engine block heater and passenger com- Adjusting3
1. Press OK to access the menu. thumbwheel and activate with OK.
partment heater* - direct start (p. 141)
• Engine block heater and passenger com- 2. Use the thumbwheel (p. 110) to scroll to
partment heater* - timer (p. 142) one of the timers Parking heater and Switching off
• Engine block heater and passenger com- select with OK. A timer-started heater can be switched off
partment heater* - messages (p. 144) 3. Select one of the two timers using the manually before the set time has elapsed.
thumbwheel and confirm with OK. Proceed as follows:
4. Briefly press OK to move to the lit hours 1. Press OK to access the menu.
setting.
5. Select the required hour using the thumb-
wheel.
3 Setting the timer is only possible with the engine switched off.
4 Press OK again to activate the timer.

04 Climate control
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking

heater and select with OK.
> If a timer is set but not activated then a
clock icon is shown beside the set
time.
3. Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
4. Deactivate the timer as follows:
• long press on OK or
• short press on OK to continue in the
menu. Then select to stop the timer
and confirm with OK. 04
A timer-started heater can be switched off
directly (p. 142).
Related information
• Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* - messages (p. 144)

04 Climate control
Engine block heater and passenger When one of the timers has been activated, Symbol for activated timer in digital
compartment heater* - messages the symbol for activated timer illuminates in combined instrument panel.
Symbols and display messages regarding the the display at the same time as the set time is
engine block and passenger compartment shown next to the symbol.
heater (p. 140) differ depending on whether The table shows symbols and display texts
Symbol for activated timer in ana-
the combined instrument panel (p. 64) is ana- that appear.
logue combined instrument panel.
logue or digital.
When the heater has been activated

the heat symbol illuminates in the
information display.
04 Symbol Message Specification

The heater is switched on and running.
Fuel operated heater stopped The heater has been stopped by the car's electronics in order to facilitate starting the engine.
Battery saving mode

04 Climate control
Symbol Message Specification

Fuel operated heater stopped Starting the heater is not possible due to fuel level being too low - this is in order to facilitate
Low fuel level starting the engine as well as approx. 50 km driving.
Fuel operated heater Service Heater not working. Contact a workshop for repair. Volvo recommends that you contact an
required authorised Volvo workshop.
A display text clears automatically after a time

or after one press on the indicator stalk 04
(p. 110) OK button.
145
04 Climate control
Additional heater* Fuel-driven additional heater* 2. Press OK to access the menu.

In cold climate zones5
an additional heater The car is equipped with either an electric 3. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional
may be required to obtain the correct operat- (p. 147) or a fuel-driven additional heater heater7 or Settings8 and select with OK.
ing temperature in the engine and to obtain (p. 146).
sufficient heating in the passenger compart- 4. Select one of the options ON or OFF
ment. The heater starts automatically when extra using the thumbwheel and confirm with
heat is required when the engine is running. OK.
A fuel-driven additional heater (p. 146) is fit- The heater is switched off automatically when 5. Exit the menu with RESET.
ted in cars with diesel engines. the correct temperature is reached or when
In a semi-cold5 climate zone diesel-driven the engine is switched off. NOTE
cars have an electric additional heater
The menu options are only visible in key
(p. 147) instead of a fuel-driven version. NOTE position I - any adjustments must therefore
04 Cars with certain petrol engines6 have an When the additional heater is active there be made before starting the engine.
electric additional heater integrated into the may be smoke from the right-hand wheel
car's climate control system. housing, which is perfectly normal.
Passenger compartment heater*
If the additional heater is supplemented with
Related information Auto mode or shutdown a timer function then it can be used as a pas-
• Engine and passenger compartment The additional heater's automatic start senger compartment heater (p. 140).
heater* (p. 140) sequence can be switched off if required.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the fuel-driven
additional heater should be switched off
for short distances.
1. Before starting the engine: Select key

position I (p. 79).
5 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the geographical areas concerned.
6 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the engines concerned.
7 Analogue combined instrument panel.
8 Digital combined instrument panel.

04 Climate control
Electric additional heater*

The car is equipped with either a fuel-driven
(p. 146) or an electric additional heater
(p. 146).
The heater cannot be controlled manually, but

is instead activated automatically after the
engine has been started in outside tempera-
tures below 14 °C and is switched off after
the set passenger compartment temperature
has been reached.
Related information
• Engine and passenger compartment 04
heater* (p. 140)

LOADING AND STORAGE
05 Loading and storage
Storage spaces
Overview of storage spaces in the passenger
compartment.
05
}}
149
||
Storage compartment in door panel
Storage pocket* on front edge of front

seat cushions
Ticket clip
Glovebox (p. 151)
Storage compartment, cup holder

(p. 151)
Cup holder* in armrest, rear seat
Storage pocket
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile
phones, cameras, remote controls for
05 accessories, etc. in the glove compartment
or other compartments. Otherwise they
may injure people in the car in the event of
sudden braking or a collision.

Tunnel console Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and Glovebox

The tunnel console is located between the ashtray* The glovebox is located on the passenger
front seats. A detachable ashtray is fitted in the cup side.
holder under the armrest. The cigarette lighter
is fitted in the 12 V socket (p. 152) for the
front seat.
The ashtray in the tunnel console (p. 151) is

detached by lifting the tray straight up.
Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.
The button pops out when the lighter is hot.
Pull out the lighter and light a cigarette on the
heated coils.
Related information
• Storage spaces (p. 149)
Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) and The owner's manual and maps can be kept in
USB*/AUX input under the armrest. here for example. There are also holders for 05
Includes cup holder for driver and pas- pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox
senger. If ashtray and cigarette lighter can be locked* (p. 177) using the key blade
(p. 151) are specified, then there is a cig- (p. 168).
arette lighter in the 12 V socket (p. 152)
for the front seat, and a detachable ash- Related information
tray in the cup holder. • Storage spaces (p. 149)
Avoid storing coins, keys or similar metal
objects in the cup holder as such objects
could accidentally trigger the alarm (p. 182)*.
Related information
• Storage spaces (p. 149)

Inlay mats* Vanity mirror Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets

Inlay mats collect e.g. rubbish and slush. The vanity mirror is located on the rear of the The electrical sockets (12 V) are located next
Volvo supplies specially manufactured inlay sun visor. to the cup holder1 and rear of the tunnel con-
mats. sole.
WARNING
Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and
check before setting off that the mat by
the driver's seat is firmly affixed and
secured in the pins so that it does not get
caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
Related information
• Cleaning the interior (p. 391)
Vanity mirror with lighting.

05 The lamp for the vanity mirror, on the driver's 12 V socket in tunnel console, front seat.
side* and passenger side respectively, is
switched on automatically when the cover is
raised.
Related information
• Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting
(p. 365)
G021440
12 V socket in tunnel console, rear seat.
1 If ashtray and cigarette lighter are specified then there is no cup holder and adjacent 12 V socket.

The electrical socket can be used for various IMPORTANT Loading

accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. display Payload depends on the car's kerb weight.
screens, music players and mobile phones. Max. socket is 10 A (120 W) if one socket
For the socket to supply current, the remote is used at a time. If both sockets in the Payload depends on the car's kerb weight.
tunnel console are used simultaneously,
control key must be in at least key position I The total of the weight of the passengers and
7.5 A (90 W) per socket is applicable.
(p. 79). all accessories reduces the car's payload by
If the compressor for emergency puncture a corresponding weight.
repair is connected to one of the two sock-
WARNING ets, no other current consumer must be For more detailed information on weights, see
Always leave the plug in the socket when connected to the other one. Weights (p. 399).
the socket is not in use. The tailgate is opened via a button
NOTE on the lighting panel or the remote
NOTE control key, see Locking/unlocking -
The compressor for emergency puncture
tailgate (p. 177).
Optional equipment and accessories - e.g. repair (p. 332) has been tested and
display screens, music players and mobile approved by Volvo.
phones - which are connected to one of WARNING
the passenger compartment's 12V electri- Related information The car’s driving properties change
cal sockets, could be activated by the cli- depending on the weight and positioning
mate control system, even when the • Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and 05
ashtray* (p. 151) of the load.
remote control key has been removed or
when the car is locked, for example, when • 12 V electrical socket - cargo area*
the parking heater is activated at a preset (p. 156) To bear in mind when loading
time. • Position the load firmly against the rear
For this reason remove the plugs from the seat's backrest.
electrical sockets for optional equipment Note that objects must not prevent the func-
or accessories when not in use because tion of the WHIPS system for the front seats if
the battery could be drained in the event of any of the rear seat's backrests is folded
such an occurrence!
down, seeWHIPS - seating position (p. 37).
• Centre the load.
• Heavy objects should be placed as low
as possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on
lowered backrests.
}}

||
• Cover sharp edges with something soft to Related information Loading - long load
avoid damaging the upholstery. • Load retaining eyelets (p. 155) To simplify loading (p. 153) in the cargo area,
• Secure all loads to the load retaining eye- • Safety net* (p. 156) the rear seat backrest can be folded down.
lets with straps or web lashings. The passenger seat2 backrest can also be
• Loading - long load (p. 154)
folded for an extra long load*.
WARNING • Roof load (p. 155)
Lowering the rear seat backrest
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a To simplify loading in the cargo area, the rear
frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h,
carry the impact of an item weighing seat backrest can be folded down, see Seats,
1000 kg. rear (p. 83).
WARNING
The protection provided by the inflatable
curtain in the headlining may be compro-
mised or eliminated by high loads.
• Never load cargo above the backrest.
05
WARNING
Always secure the load. During heavy
braking the load may otherwise shift, caus-
ing injury to the car's occupants.
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
something soft.
Switch off the engine and apply the park-
ing brake when loading/unloading long
items. Otherwise you may accidentally
knock the gear lever or gear selector with
the load into a drive position - and the car
could then move off.
2 Only applies to comfort seats.

Roof load Load retaining eyelets Loading - bag holder*

The load carriers recommended for roof loads The folding load retaining eyelets are used to The bag holder keeps carrier bags in place
are the ones developed by Volvo. This is in fasten straps in order to anchor items in the and prevents them from overturning and
order to avoid damage to the car and in order cargo area. spreading their contents across the cargo
to achieve the maximum possible safety dur- area.
ing a journey.
Carefully follow the installation instructions

supplied with the carriers.
• Check periodically that the load carriers
and load are properly secured. Lash the
load securely with retaining straps.
• Distribute the load evenly over the load
carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the
bottom.
• The size of the area exposed to the wind,
G017745
and therefore fuel consumption, increase
with the size of the load. 05
WARNING Bag holder under folding hatch in the floor.
• Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,
1. Fold up the holder, which is part of the
heavy braking and hard cornering. Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which
protrude may cause injury under violent floor hatch.
WARNING braking. 2. Fasten the bags with strap and secure
The car's centre of gravity and driving cha- Always secure large and heavy objects the carrying handle in the hooks.
racteristics are altered by roof loads. with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
Related information
For information about the maximum per- • Loading (p. 153)
mitted load on the roof, including load car- Related information
riers and any space box, see Weights • Loading (p. 153)
(p. 399).
Related information
• Loading (p. 153)

12 V electrical socket - cargo area* NOTE Safety net*

The electrical socket can be used for various A safety net prevents loads from being thrown
The compressor for temporary emergency
accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. display puncture repair has been tested and forward in the passenger compartment in the
screens, music players and mobile phones. approved by Volvo. For information on the event of sudden braking.
use of Volvo's recommended temporary
emergency puncture repair (TMK), see The safety net is fitted into four mounting
Emergency puncture repair* (p. 332). points.
Related information
• Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets (p. 152)
05 Lower the cover to access the electrical

socket.
Safety net
• The socket also provides voltage when
the remote control key is not in the igni- A safety net prevents loads or pets from
tion switch. being thrown forward in the passenger com-
partment in the event of sudden braking. For
IMPORTANT safety reasons, the safety net must always be
correctly fastened and secured.
Max. power takeoff is 10 A (120 W).
The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and
can be secured two different locations in the
NOTE car:
Remember that using the electrical socket • Rear fitting - behind the rear seat back-
with the engine switched off involves the rest.
risk of discharging the car's battery.
• Front fitting - Behind the front seat back-
rests.

WARNING 3. Hook the net's other retaining hook into 4. Rear fitting: With the net fitted in the rear
the roof mounting on the opposite side - roof mountings, hook the safety net's
Loads in the luggage compartment must the telescopic spring-loaded retaining snap hooks into the front floor eyes in the
be anchored well, and also using a cor- hooks facilitate alignment. cargo area.
rectly fitted safety net.
Take care to press forward the net's
retaining hooks for each respective roof
Attaching
mounting's front end position.
NOTE
The easiest way to fit the safety net is via
one of the rear doors.
WARNING
It is necessary to ensure that the upper
securing points of the safety net are fitted
correctly and that the snap hooks are Front fitting.
hooked in properly. 05
Damaged nets must not be used. Front fitting: With the net fitted in the front
roof mountings, hook the safety net's
Rear fitting. snap hooks into the eyes on the rear of
1. Fold out the safety net.
the seat slide rails - it is easier if the back-
2. Hook one of the net's retaining hooks into rests are straightened and the seats are
the front or rear roof mounting with the moved forward slightly.
net's storage pockets facing backwards.
Pay attention to make sure that you do
not press the seat/backrest hard against
the net when the seat/backrest is moved
back again - only adjust until the seat/
backrest makes contact with the net.
}}
157
||
IMPORTANT Safety net* combined with cargo Safety grille
cover A safety grille prevents loads or pets from
If the seat/backrest is pressed hard back-
wards against the safety net then the net A safety net prevents loads from being thrown being thrown forward in the passenger com-
and/or its roof mountings could be dam- forward in the passenger compartment in the partment in the event of sudden braking.
aged. event of sudden braking.
The safety net can also be raised from the

rear seat when the cargo cover is extended.
Removal and storage
The safety net can be easily removed and Follow the procedure described in the section
folded up. "Using the safety net" (p. 156). The straps for
folding up are located by the arrows.
1. Press in the snap hooks' spring-loaded
flaps and remove the snap hooks from Related information
the eyes. • Safety net* (p. 156)
G031978
2. Loosen the net's retaining hooks from the
roof mountings. • Load retaining eyelets (p. 155)
05 3. Fold up the net.

Folding up
The folded safety net can be stored under the Take hold of the bottom of the safety grille
cargo compartment floor. and pull back/up.
Related information
IMPORTANT
• Safety grille (p. 158) The protective grille cannot be folded up
or down when a cargo cover is fitted.
Fitting/removal
The safety grille is normally permanently
installed in the car because it can easily be
folded up in the roof and so be out of the way
if a longer cargo area is required. However, if

desired, the safety grille can be dismantled Cargo cover Press both sides in. A "click" should be
and removed from the car. audible and the red marking should dis-
appear.
For information about the tools required and
methods for fitting/removal, see the installa- > Check that both end pieces are
tion instructions3 that were included with the locked.
initial purchase.
Removing the cargo cover
For safety reasons, the safety grille must 1. Press in one end piece button and lift it
always be correctly fastened and secured out.
when being refitted.
2. Carefully angle the cover up/out and the
Related information other end piece loosens automatically.
• Safety net* (p. 156)
G031977
Lowering the cargo cover's rear sealing
• Loading (p. 153) disc
• Load retaining eyelets (p. 155) Pull the cargo cover over the load and hook it In its rolled-in position, the cargo cover's rear
into the recesses at the cargo area's rear sealing disc protrudes horizontally into the
posts. cargo area when it is fitted.
– Pull the sealing disc back gently, free 05
IMPORTANT from its support shelves, and lower.
The protective grille cannot be folded up Related information
or down when the cargo cover is fitted.
• Loading - long load (p. 154)
Attaching the cargo cover
Move one end piece of the cover into the
recess on the side panel.
Move the other end piece into the corres-
ponding recess.
3 Installation instructions no. 30715972.

LOCKS AND ALARM
06 Locks and alarm
Remote control key All remote control keys have a detachable key Remote control key - losing
Amongst other things, the remote control key blade (p. 168) made of metal. The visible If you lose a remote control key then a new
is used for locking/unlocking and starting the section is available in two versions so that it one can be ordered at a workshop - an
engine. is possible to distinguish between the remote authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
control keys.
There are two variants of remote control key - The remaining remote control keys must be
More remote control keys can be ordered -
Remote control key in basic version and taken to the Volvo workshop. The code of the
but not variants other than the one supplied
Remote control key with PCC (Personal Car missing remote control key must be erased
with the car. Up to six keys can be pro-
Communicator)*. from the system as a theft prevention meas-
grammed and used for one single car.
ure.
BasicA with The car is supplied with two remote control
Functionality The current number of keys registered to the
keys
PCCB car can be checked in the menu system MY
CAR. For a description of the menu system,
Locking/unlocking WARNING see MY CAR (p. 112).
and detachable key x x
If there are children in the car:
blade Related information
Remember to switch off the supply to the • Remote control key - functions (p. 164)
Keyless locking/ power windows and sunroof by removing
x the remote control key if the driver leaves
unlocking
the car.
Keyless engine star-
x
ting
Related information
Information button • Remote control key - functions (p. 164) 06
x
and indicator lamps
A 5-button key
B 6-button key
Remote control key with PCC has extended

functionality compared with the remote con-
trol key in the basic version - e.g. support for
Keyless Drive (p. 171) and certain unique
functions (p. 166).

06 Locks and alarm
Remote control key - personalisation* Proceed as follows in order to store the set- WARNING
The key memory in the remote control key tings and use the key memory in the remote
control key: Risk of crushing! Make sure that children
(p. 161) means that certain settings in the car do not play with the controls. Check that
can be individually adapted for different peo- 1. Unlock the car with the remote control there are no objects in front of, behind or
ple. key in whose memory the setting2 shall under the seat during adjustment. Ensure
be stored. that none of the rear seat passengers is in
The key memory function is available in com- danger of becoming trapped.
bination with power* driver's seat. 2. Make the desired settings for e.g. the
seat and the door mirrors.
Settings for door mirrors (p. 103), driver's Changing settings
3. The settings are stored in the current
seat, steering force (p. 251) and the com- If several people each with a remote control
remote control key's memory.
bined instrument panel's theme, contrast and key approach the car, then the settings for
colour mode (p. 65) can be stored in the The next time the car is unlocked with the e.g. seat and door mirrors are implemented
memory, depending on the car's equipment same remote control key, the positions that for the person whose remote control key
level. are stored in the key memory will be set auto- unlocks the driver's door.
matically - providing that they have been
The function1 can be activated/deactivated in changed since the last time the current If the driver's door has been opened by
the menu system MY CAR. For a description remote control key was used. person A with remote control key A, but
of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 112). person B with remote control key B shall
Emergency stop drive, then the settings can be changed as
When the function is activated, the settings If the seat accidentally begins to move, press
are automatically linked to the key memory. follows:
one of the setting buttons for the seat or
This means that a change in a setting will memory buttons in order to stop the seat. • Standing by the driver's door, or sitting
automatically be saved to the specific remote behind the steering wheel, person B
06 Restarting to reach the seat position stored in
control key's memory. presses the button for unlocking on
the key memory is performed by pressing the his/her remote control key, see Remote
Storing settings unlock button on the remote control key. The control key - functions (p. 164).
Make sure that the key memory function is driver's door must then be open.
• Select one of three possible memories for
activated in the menu system MY CAR. seat adjustment with seat button 1-3, see
1 Called Car key memory in MY CAR.

2 This setting does not affect settings that have been stored in the power seat's memory function.

06 Locks and alarm
Seats, front - electrically operated* Locking/unlocking - indicator Immobiliser

(p. 82). When the car is locked or unlocked using the The electronic immobiliser is a theft protec-
• Adjust seat and door mirrors manually, remote control key (p. 161) the direction indi- tion system that prevents an unauthorised
see Seats, front - electrically operated* cators confirm that locking/unlocking was person from starting the car.
(p. 82) and Door mirrors (p. 103). correctly performed.
Each remote control key (p. 161) has a unique
Reactivation of settings • Locking - one flash and the door mirrors code. The car can only be started with the
When the car is locked or after 30 minutes if are folded3 in. correct remote control key with the correct
the car is left unlocked, the key memory will • Unlocking - two flashes and the door mir- code.
be deactivated and a standard driver profile rors are folded3 out. The following error messages in the com-
will be set. To reactivate the key memory for
After locking the indication is only given if all bined instrument panel's information display
the current remote control key, the following
locks are activated once the doors have been are related to the electronic immobiliser:
is required.
closed.
For cars without Keyless Drive
The settings that are stored in the key mem- Selecting the function
ory are activated if the car is unlocked by Different options for indicating locking/
pressing the remote control key's unlock but- unlocking with light can be set in the car's
ton. menu system MY CAR. For a description of
the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 112).
For cars with Keyless Drive
The key memory is activated if: Related information
1. The car is unlocked either by pressing the • Keyless drive* (p. 171)
remote control key's unlock button or via 06
• Alarm indicator (p. 183)
keyless unlocking.
2. If the car is unlocked, a key scan is made
when the driver's door is opened. If a
unique remote control key is found, its
stored settings will be activated. If the car
is locked, see the previous point.
Related information
• Remote control key with PCC* - unique
functions (p. 166)
3 Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.

}}

06 Locks and alarm
||
Mes- Specification Remote-controlled immobiliser with Remote control key - functions
sage tracking system* The remote control key in basic version has
Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking functions such as locking and unlocking the
Insert car Error when reading the system4 makes it possible to track and locate doors.
key remote control key during the car, and to remotely activate the immobi-
starting - Remove the key liser to switch off the engine. Functions
from the ignition switch, press
it in again and make a new Contact your nearest Volvo dealer for more
start attempt. information and assistance with activating the
system.
Car key Error reading the remote con-
not found trol key during starting - Try Related information
to start again. • Remote control key (p. 161)
If the error persists: Insert the • Immobiliser (p. 163)
remote control key into the
ignition switch and try to start
again.
Immobi- Error in immobiliser system Remote control key in basic version.

liser Try during starting. If the error
Locking
to start persists: Contact a workshop
again - an authorised Volvo work- Unlocking
06 shop is recommended.
Approach light duration
For starting the car, see Starting the engine Tailgate
(p. 259).
Panic function
Related information
• Remote-controlled immobiliser with
tracking system* (p. 164)
4 Only certain markets and in combination with Volvo On Call*.

06 Locks and alarm
Press and hold to open all windows simulta- Related information

neously. For more information, see Global • Remote control key (p. 161)
opening (p. 176). • Remote control key with PCC* - unique
The function can be changed from unlocking functions (p. 166)
all doors simultaneously, to unlocking the • Locking/unlocking - from the outside
driver's door only with one press of the but- (p. 175)
ton and, after a further press of the button -
within ten seconds - unlocking the remaining
doors.
The function can be changed in the menu
system MY CAR. For a description of the
Remote control key with PCC*( Personal Car menu system, see MY CAR (p. 112).
Communicator).
Approach light duration – Used to
Information switch on the car's lighting at a distance. For
more information, see Approach lighting
Function buttons (p. 98).
Locking – Locks the doors and tailgate
Tailgate - Unlocks and disarms the
while the alarm is activated.
alarm for the tailgate only. For more informa-
Press and hold to close all the windows and tion, see Locking/unlocking - tailgate
sunroof* simultaneously. For more informa- (p. 177). On cars with Power operated tail-
tion, see Global opening (p. 176). gate (p. 178)* the tailgate is opened after the 06
button is kept depressed.
WARNING
Panic function – Used to attract atten-
If the sunroof and windows are closed tion in an emergency.
using the remote control key, check that
nobody's hands are trapped. Press and hold the button for at least 3 sec-
onds or press it twice within 3 seconds to
activate the direction indicators and the horn.
Unlocking – Unlocks the doors and tail-
gate while the alarm is deactivated. The function can be turned off with the same
button once it has been active for at least
5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches
off automatically after approx. 3 minutes.

06 Locks and alarm
Remote control key - range Related information Remote control key with PCC* -
Remote control key functions (in its basic ver- • Remote control key (p. 161) unique functions
sion) have a range of approx. 20 metres from • Remote control key - functions (p. 164) A remote control key with PCC has enhanced
the car. functionality compared with a remote control
key in basic version (p. 161) in the form of an
If the car does not verify a button being information button and indicator lamps.
pressed - move closer and try again.
NOTE
The remote control key functions may be
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions, etc.
The car can always be locked/unlocked
with the key blade (p. 169).
If the remote control key is removed from the

car when the engine is running or key position
I or II (p. 79) is active, and if all doors are
closed, then a warning message is shown in
the information display in the combined Remote control key with PCC.
instrument panel and an audio reminder sig- Information button
nal sounds at the same time.
06 Indicator lamps
The message is extinguished and the audible
reminder signal stops when the remote con- Using the information button enables access
trol key is brought back to the car after to certain information from the car via the
either/or: indicator lamps.
• The remote control key has been inserted

in the ignition switch.
• Speed exceeds 30 km/h.
• The OK button has been pressed.

06 Locks and alarm
Using the information button Remote control key with PCC* - range
– Press the information button . The range of a remote control key with PCC
> All indicator lamps flash for approxi- (Personal Car Communicator) for locking,
mately 7 seconds and the light travels unlocking the doors and tailgate is approx. 20
around on the remote control key. This metres from the car - the other functions are
indicates that information from the car up to approx. 100 metres.
is being scanned. If the car does not verify a button being
If any of the other buttons are pressed pressed - move closer and try again.
during this time then the reading is
interrupted. NOTE
The information button function may be
NOTE Green continuous light – the car is disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
locked. buildings, topographical conditions, etc.
If none of the indicator lamps illumi-
nates with repeated use of the information Yellow continuous light – the car is
button and in different locations (as well as unlocked. Outside the remote control key's range
after 7 seconds and after the light has If the remote control key is too far away from
travelled around on the PCC), contact a Red continuous light – the alarm has
been triggered since the car was locked. the car for the information to be read then the
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended. status the car was last left in is shown, with-
Red light flashing alternately in both indi- out the light in the indicator lamps travelling
cator lamps – The alarm was triggered around on the remote control key.
Indicator lamps display information in accord- less than 5 minutes ago.
If several remote control keys are used for the 06
ance with the following illustration:
Related information car then it is only the one last used for lock-
• Remote control key with PCC* - range ing/unlocking that shows the correct status.
(p. 167)
NOTE
If no indicator lamps illuminate when
the information button is used within range
then this may be because the last commu-
nication between the remote control key
and the car was disrupted by surrounding
radio waves, buildings, topographical con-
ditions, etc.
}}

06 Locks and alarm
||
Related information Detachable key blade Detachable key blade - detaching/
• Keyless Drive* - remote control key range A remote control key contains a detachable attaching
(p. 171) key blade of metal with which some functions Detaching/attaching the detachable key blade
• Remote control key - range (p. 166) can be activated and some operations carried (p. 168) is carried out as follows:
out.
Removing the key blade
The key blade's unique code is provided by
authorised Volvo workshops, which are rec-
ommended when ordering new key blades.
Key blade functions

Using the remote control key's detachable
key blade:
• the driver's door can be opened manually
if central locking cannot be activated with
the remote control key, see Detachable
key blade - unlocking doors (p. 169).
• the rear doors' mechanical child safety
locks can be activated/deactivated Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
(p. 181).
• access to the glovebox is blocked. At the same time pull the key blade
straight out backwards.
06 • the airbag for front passenger seat
(PACOS*) can be activated/deactivated Attaching the key blade
(p. 32). Carefully refit the key blade into its location in
Related information the remote control key (p. 161).
• Remote control key - functions (p. 164) 1. Hold the remote control key with the slot
• Remote control key (p. 161) pointed up and lower the key blade into
its slot.
2. Lightly press the key blade. You should
hear a "click" when the key blade is
locked in.

06 Locks and alarm
Related information Detachable key blade - unlocking Remote control key - replacing the
• Detachable key blade - unlocking doors doors battery
(p. 169) The detachable key blade (p. 168) can be The battery5 for the remote control key may
• Child safety locks - manual activation used if central locking cannot be activated need to be replaced.
(p. 181) with the remote control key (p. 161), e.g. if the
key's battery has run out. The battery for the remote control key should
• Passenger airbag - activating/deactivat-
be replaced if:
ing* (p. 32)
If central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key - e.g. if the batteries are
• the information symbol in the combined
instrument panel illuminates and the dis-
discharged - then the driver's door can be
play shows Car key battery low See
opened as follows: manual
1. Unlock the driver's door with the key and/or
blade in the door handle's lock cylinder.
For illustration and more information, see • the locks repeatedly do not react to sig-
Keyless drive* - unlocking with the key nals from the remote control key within
blade (p. 173). 20 metres from the car.
NOTE
When the door has been unlocked using
the key blade and is opened, the alarm is
triggered.
06
2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting the
remote control key in the ignition switch.
For cars with the Keyless system, see Key-
less drive* - unlocking with the key blade
(p. 173).
Related information
• Remote control key (p. 161)
• Remote control key - replacing the bat-
tery (p. 169)
}}

06 Locks and alarm
||
NOTE Battery type
Use batteries with the designation
Turn the remote control key over with the CR2430, 3V - one in the remote control key,
buttons facing up, this is to avoid the bat-
teries falling out when it is opened. two in the remote control key with PCC.
NOTE
IMPORTANT
Volvo recommends that the batteries to be
Avoid touching new batteries and their used in the remote control key/PCC fulfil
contact surfaces with your fingers as this UN Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III,
may impair their function. sub-section 38.3. Batteries fitted in the
factory or replaced by an authorised Volvo
workshop fulfil the above criteria.
Battery replacement
Closely study how the battery/batteries
are secured on the inside of the cover, Assembly
with regard to their (+) and (–) sides. 1. Press the remote control key together.
2. Hold the remote control key with the slot
Remote control key (one battery)
pointed up and lower the key blade into
1. Carefully prize out the battery.
its slot.
2. Install a new one with the (+) side down.
Opening 3. Lightly press the key blade. You should
Remote control key with PCC* (two hear a "click" when the key blade is
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the
06 batteries) locked in.
side.
1. Carefully prize out the batteries.
At the same time pull the key blade 2. First install one new one with the (+)side IMPORTANT
straight out backwards. up. Make sure that exhausted batteries are
Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the 3. Position the white plastic tab in between disposed of in a manner which is kind to
and finally install a second new battery the environment.
hole behind the spring-loaded catch and
gently prize the remote control key up. with the (+) side down.
Related information
• Remote control key (p. 161)
• Remote control key - functions (p. 164)
5 Remote control key with PCC has two batteries.

06 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive* Keyless Drive* - remote control key are closed, then a warning message is shown
Cars equipped with Keyless Drive have a star- range in the information display in the combined
ting and locking system that can be operated In order to unlock the doors or tailgate auto- instrument panel and an audio reminder sig-
keylessly. matically without pressing a button on the nal sounds at the same time.
remote control key7, a remote control key When the remote control key has been
With the keyless starting and locking system
must be within approx. 1.5 metres from the returned to the car, the warning message
the car can be started, locked and unlocked
car's door handle or tailgate. goes off and the audible reminder ceases
without the remote control key (p. 161)6
once either/or:
inserted in the ignition switch. It is enough to The person who wishes to lock or unlock a
have the remote control key with you in a door must have the remote control key with • a door has been opened and closed
pocket. The system makes it easier and more him or her. It is not possible to lock or unlock • the remote control key has been inserted
convenient to e.g. open the car when your a door if the remote control key is on the in the ignition switch
hands are full. opposite side of the car. • The OK button has been pressed.
Both of the remote control keys included with
the car have Keyless functionality. It is possi- Related information
ble to order more remote control keys. • Keyless drive* (p. 171)
The car's electrical system can be set to

• Keyless Drive* - antenna location (p. 174)
three different levels - key position 0, I and II
(p. 79) - with the remote control key.
Related information
• Keyless Drive* - remote control key range 06
(p. 171)
• Keyless drive* - secure handling of the
remote control key (p. 172)
• Keyless drive* - interference to remote The red rings in the above figure indicate the
control key function (p. 172) range covered by the system's antennas.
If all remote control keys are removed from
the car when the engine is running or key
position I or II (p. 79) is active, and if all doors
6 Only applies to Remote Control Key with PCC.

7 Applies to remote control key with PCC (Personal Car Communicator).

06 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive* - secure handling of Keyless drive* - interference to Keyless drive* - locking
the remote control key remote control key function Cars equipped with Keyless drive have a but-
It is important to handle the car's remote con- Electromagnetic fields and screening can ton on the outer door handles for locking/
trol keys with great care. interfere with the remote control key's Keyless unlocking.
functions (p. 171).
If one of the remote control keys8 has been
left in the car then the Keyless functionality is NOTE
deactivated in case the car is e.g. locked with
the other remote control key that belongs to Do not place/store the PCC near a mobile
phone or metal object - no closer than
the car. This prevents unauthorised entry. 10-15 cm.
The next time the car is unlocked with the
other remote control key the forgotten remote If interference is experienced nonetheless,
control key is reactivated again. use the remote control key and the key blade
like a remote control key in basic version, see
IMPORTANT Remote control key - functions (p. 164).
Avoid leaving the remote control key with
Related information
PCC behind in the car. If someone breaks Cars with the keyless system have a button on
into your car and takes the remote control • Remote control key - replacing the bat- the outside door handles.
key, it will e.g. be possible to start the car tery (p. 169)
Lock the doors and the tailgate by pressing
by pressing the remote control key in the • Keyless drive* - secure handling of the
the lock button on one of the door handles on
ignition switch and then pressing the remote control key (p. 172)
START/STOP ENGINE button. the outside.
06 • Keyless Drive* - remote control key range
(p. 171) All doors and the tailgate must be closed
Related information before the car can be locked - otherwise the
• Keyless drive* (p. 171) car is not locked.
NOTE
In cars with automatic gearbox selectors,
the gear selector must be set to the P
position; otherwise the car can be neither
locked nor alarmed.
8 Applies to remote control key with PCC (Personal Car Communicator).

06 Locks and alarm
Related information Keyless drive* - unlocking Keyless drive* - unlocking with the
• Keyless drive* (p. 171) Unlocking takes place when a hand grasps a key blade
• Alarm indicator (p. 183) door handle or the tailgate's rubberised pres- If central locking cannot be unlocked with the
sure plate is actuated - open the door or tail- remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are
gate as normal. discharged, then the left-hand driver's door
can be opened using the detachable key
Related information blade.
• Keyless drive* (p. 171)
• Keyless drive* - locking (p. 172)
Hole for key blade - to loosen the cover.

To access the lock cylinder, the door handle's 06
plastic cover must be removed - this is also
done with the key blade:
1. Press the key blade approx. 1 cm straight
up into the hole on the underside of the
door handle/cover - do not prize.
> The plastic cover loosens automati-
cally by means of the torque when the
blade is pushed straight up and into
the opening.
}}

06 Locks and alarm
||
2. Then insert the key blade in the lock cyl- Keyless Drive* - lock settings Keyless Drive* - antenna location
inder and unlock the door. Lock settings for cars equipped with Keyless Cars equipped with Keyless Drive have a
3. Refit the plastic cover after unlocking. Drive can be adapted by indicating in the number of built-in antennas positioned at dif-
menu system MY CAR which doors are to be ferent locations in the car.
NOTE unlocked.
When the driver's door is unlocked using For a description of the menu system, see
the key blade and is opened, the alarm is MY CAR (p. 112).
triggered. It is switched off by inserting the
PCC in the ignition switch, see Alarm - Related information
remote control key not working (p. 184). • Keyless drive* (p. 171)
Related information
• Detachable key blade - detaching/attach-
ing (p. 168)
• Alarm (p. 182)
Tailgate, by wiper motor
Door handle, left rear
Cargo area, central and furthest in under

06 the floor
Door handle, right rear
Centre console, under the rear section
Centre console, under the front section.

06 Locks and alarm
WARNING Locking/unlocking - from the outside WARNING

Locking/unlocking from the outside is carried
People with pacemaker operations should Be aware of the risk of being locked in the
not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless out using the remote control key (p. 161). The car when it is locked from the outside
system's antennae with their pacemaker. remote control key can lock/unlock all doors using the remote control key - it is then not
This is to prevent interference between the and the tailgate simultaneously. Different possible to open any of the doors from the
pacemaker and the keyless system. sequences for unlocking can be selected, see inside with the door controls. For more
Remote control key - functions (p. 164). information, see Deadlocks* (p. 180).
Related information In order that the lock sequence can be acti-
• Keyless drive* (p. 171) vated, the driver's door must be closed - if Automatic relocking
any of the other doors or the tailgate is open, If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
then it/they is/are locked and the alarm is within two minutes of unlocking, all are
activated only when it/they are closed. For locked again automatically. This function
cars equipped with keyless locking system* reduces the risk that the car is left unlocked
all doors and the tailgate must be closed. unintentionally. (For cars with alarm, see
Alarm (p. 182).)
NOTE Related information
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote • Locking/unlocking - from the inside
control key in the car. (p. 176)
If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the
remote control key, the battery may be dis- 06
charged - lock or unlock the driver's door
with the detachable key blade, see Detacha-
ble key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 168).
NOTE
Remember that the alarm is triggered
when the door is opened after being
unlocked with the key blade - the alarm is
switched off when the remote control key
is inserted into the ignition switch.

06 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking - from the inside • Pull the door handle once and release - Global opening
All of the doors and the tailgate are locked or the door is unlocked. Pull the door handle The global opening function opens or closes
unlocked simultaneously using the central again to open the door. all side windows simultaneously and can be
locking button on the driver's door and pas- Locking used for example to quickly air the car during
senger door*. hot weather.
• Press the central locking button after
Central locking the front doors have been closed.
A long press also closes all side windows and
sunroof simultaneously (see also Global
opening (p. 176)).
All doors can also be individually locked man-
ually with their lock buttons - the door in
question must then be closed.
Automatic locking
The doors and tailgate are locked automati-
cally when the car starts to move.
The function can be activated/deactivated in Central locking button
the menu system MY CAR. For a description
Central locking.
of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 112). A long press on the symbol in the central
• Press one side of the button to lock - locking button opens all side windows simul-
06 the other side to unlock. Related information taneously. The same procedure on the
• Locking/unlocking - from the outside symbol closes all side windows simultane-
Press and hold to also open all side windows* (p. 175)
simultaneously. ously.
• Alarm (p. 182)
Unlocking • Remote control key - functions (p. 164) Related information
A door can be unlocked from the inside in • Locking/unlocking - from the inside
two different ways: (p. 176)
• Power windows (p. 101)
• Press the central locking button .
A long press also opens all the side windows*
simultaneously (see also Global opening
(p. 176)).

06 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking - glovebox Locking/unlocking - tailgate IMPORTANT

The glovebox (p. 151) can only be locked/ The tailgate can be opened, locked and
unlocked using the detachable key blade from unlocked in several ways.
• Minimal force is required to release the
rear hatch lock - just gently press the
the remote control key. rubberised panel.
Manual opening
For information on the key blade, see Detach- • Do not place the lift force on the rub-
able key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 168). ber panel when opening the rear hatch
- lift the handle. Using too much force
may damage the electrical contacts on
the rubber panel.
Unlocking with the remote control key
Rubber plate with electrical contact.

The tailgate is held closed by an electrical
lock. To open:
Locking the glovebox:
1. Push down gently on the rubberised
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock 06
pressure plate under the outer handle -
cylinder in accordance with the illustration the lock is released.
above.
2. Lift the outside handle in order to fully
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise. open the tailgate. The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed*
and the tailgate unlocked on its own by using
Pull out the key blade. the remote control key's button.
• Unlock by carrying this out in reverse If the car is equipped with an alarm (p. 182)*
order. then the alarm indicator (p. 183) on the
instrument panel is extinguished to show that
Related information the alarm is not armed for the whole of the
• Remote control key (p. 161) car. The alarm's level and movement sensors
}}

06 Locks and alarm
||
and the sensors for opening the tailgate are Locking with the remote control key Power operated tailgate*
disconnected. – Press the remote control key's button for The car's tailgate can be opened using a but-
The doors remain locked and armed. locking , see Remote control key - ton on the lighting panel, with the rubberised
functions (p. 164). pressure plate under the outside handle or
• The tailgate is unlocked, but remains with the remote control key. Closing takes
closed - press lightly on the rubberised > If the car is equipped with an alarm*
the alarm indicator on the instrument place using the close button at the bottom of
pressure plate under the outer handle and
panel starts to flash, which means that the tailgate.
lift the tailgate.
the alarm is armed.
If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes
then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed. Related information
Unlocking the car from inside • Locking/unlocking - from the inside
(p. 176)
• Locking/unlocking - from the outside
(p. 175)
G031965
Close button
06 NOTE
Consider the roof height when using elec-
Unlocking, tailgate trical operation. Do not use electrical oper-
ation of the tailgate under a low roof
To unlock the tailgate: height, see under the heading "Interrupt
opening/closing of tailgate".
– Press the lighting panel button (1).
> The tailgate is unlocked and can be
opened within 2 minutes (if the car is
locked from the inside).

06 Locks and alarm
NOTE • During opening - power tailgate operation Stop the opening/closing of the tailgate
is deactivated and the tailgate is disen- This can be done four ways (of
• If the system has been operating con- gaged. which three involve this button):
tinuously for a long time, it is switched
off to avoid overload. It can be used
• During closing - the tailgate stops and
• Press the lighting panel button
then opens fully.
again after about 3 minutes. • Press the remote control key button
• If the starter battery has been dis- WARNING • Press the tailgate's button
charged or disconnected when the
tailgate has been open then it must be Observe the risk of trapping when open- • Press the rubberised pressure plate
closed manually in order to reset the ing/closing. Before starting opening/clos- beneath the outside handle.
system. This also applies if the tailgate ing, check that there is nobody near to the - The tailgate's movement is interrupted and
has been open for more than 24 hours. tailgate as trapping may have serious con- it stops.
sequences.
Always operate the tailgate with caution. Manual tailgate operation
Programmable max. opening The system is disengaged if the opening/
Tailgate maximum opening position can be closing sequence is interrupted in accord-
programmed. Can be used for e.g. low roof Opening the tailgate
ance with the preceding section.
height in a garage. Proceed as follows: The tailgate can be opened three
ways (two of which involve this but- • The tailgate can then be operated man-
• Open the tailgate manually, hold it in the
ton): ually.
desired position and give the button on
the tailgate one long press (at least 3 sec- • Long press on the button in the lighting Related information
onds) and then release the tailgate - the panel - hold the button depressed until • Locking/unlocking - tailgate (p. 177)
programming is complete. the tailgate starts to open.
06
• To delete the programming - move the • Long press on the button on the remote
tailgate manually to a higher position and control key - hold the button depressed
give the button on the tailgate one long until the tailgate starts to open.
press (at least 3 seconds) and then • Push down gently on the rubberised
release the tailgate - the programming is pressure plate under the outer handle.
complete.
Closing the tailgate
Pinch protection Close using this button on the tail-
If something with sufficient resistance pre- gate or manually.
vents the tailgate from opening/closing then
the pinch protection is activated. • Press the button – the tailgate closes
automatically.
179
06 Locks and alarm
Deadlocks* Temporary deactivation Related information

Deadlocks means that all lock buttons and • Keyless drive* - unlocking with the key
door handles are mechanically disengaged, blade (p. 173)
which prevents doors being opened from • Remote control key (p. 161)
both inside and outside.
The deadlocks are activated with the remote

control key (p. 161) and are set after an
approx. ten seconds delay after the doors
have been locked.
NOTE
If a door is opened within the delay time
then the sequence is interrupted and the Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
alarm is deactivated. MY CAR
OK MENU
The car can only be unlocked with the remote
control key when the deadlocks function is TUNE knob control
activated. The front left door can also be
unlocked with the detachable key blade EXIT
(p. 168). In addition, it is possible to unlock
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
06 and open the doors and tailgate on cars
doors must be locked from the outside, then
equipped with the Keyless Drive* by touching
the deadlocks function can be temporarily
door handles or the handle on the tailgate.
switched off. This takes place the menu sys-
tem MY CAR. For a description of the menu
WARNING system, see MY CAR (p. 112).
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car
without first deactivating the deadlocks in NOTE
order to avoid the risk of anyone being
locked in. • Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
• If any of the doors are opened from
the inside then the alarm is triggered.

06 Locks and alarm
Child safety locks - manual activation NOTE Child safety locks - electrical
The child safety locks prevent children from activation*
being able to open a rear door from the
• A door's knob control only blocks that
Child safety locks with electrical activation
particular door - not both rear doors
inside. simultaneously. prevent children from opening the rear doors
or windows from the inside.
Activate/deactivate child safety locks • Cars with an electric child safety lock
do not have a manual child lock. Activation
The child safety locks can be activated/deac-
tivated in all key positions (p. 79) higher than
Related information 0. Activation/deactivation can be performed
• Child safety locks - electrical activation* up to 2 minutes after switching off the engine,
(p. 181) provided that no door is opened.
• Locking/unlocking - from the inside To activate the child safety locks:
(p. 176)
• Locking/unlocking - from the outside
(p. 175)
G021077
The child safety locks are located on the trail-

ing edge of the rear doors and are only
accessible when the doors are open.
To activate/deactivate the child safety locks: 06
– Use the remote control key's detachable

key blade (p. 168) to turn the knob.
The door is blocked against opening from Control panel driver's door.
the inside.
1. Start the engine or choose a key position
The door can be opened from both the higher than 0.
outside and the inside.
}}

06 Locks and alarm
||
2. Press the button in the driver's door con- Alarm NOTE
trol panel. The alarm is a device that warns in the event
The movement sensors trigger an alarm in
> The combined instrument panel's of e.g. a break-in in the car. the event of movement in the passenger
information display shows the mes- compartment - air currents are also regis-
sage Rear child lock activated and Activated alarm is triggered if:
tered. For this reason the alarm is trig-
the button's lamp illuminates - the • a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is gered if the car is left with a window or the
locks are active. opened sunroof open or if the passenger compart-
ment heater is used.
When the child safety lock is active then the • a movement is detected in the passenger
rear: compartment (if fitted with a movement To avoid this: Close the window/sunroof
detector*) when leaving the car. If the car's inte-
• windows can only be opened with the grated passenger compartment heater (or
driver's door control panel • the car is raised or towed away (if fitted a portable electric heater) shall be used -
with a tilt detector*) direct the airflow from the air vents so that
• doors cannot be opened from inside.
they are not pointing upwards in the pas-
• the battery's cable is disconnected
The current setting is stored when the engine senger compartment. Alternatively,
is switched off - if the child safety locks are • the siren is disconnected. reduced alarm level can be used, see
activated at engine shutdown, the function If there is a fault in the alarm system then the Reduced alarm level (p. 184).
will remain activated the next time the engine information display in the combined instru-
is started. ment panel shows a message. In which case,
NOTE
contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo
Related information workshop is recommended. One of the alarm sensors is located
• Child safety locks - manual activation beneath the cup holder in the centre con-
(p. 181) sole, this sensor is sensitive to metals.
06
• Locking/unlocking - from the inside Avoid keeping coins, keys or similar metal
(p. 176) objects in the cup holder in the centre con-
sole as these may cause accidental alarm
activation.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or alter compo-
nents in the alarm system yourself. Any
such attempts may affect the terms of the
insurance.

06 Locks and alarm
Arming the alarm Alarm indicator Alarm - automatic re-arming

– Press the remote control key lock button. The alarm indicator shows alarm system Automatic re-arming of the alarm (p. 182) pre-
(p. 182) status. vents the car being left with the alarm dis-
Deactivate the alarm armed unintentionally.
– Press the remote control key unlock but-
ton. If the car is unlocked with the remote control
key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of
Deactivating a triggered alarm the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2
– Press the remote control key unlock but- minutes, then the alarm is automatically re-
ton or insert the remote control key in the armed. The car is relocked at the same time.
ignition switch.
Related information
Related information • Reduced alarm level (p. 184)
• Alarm - automatic re-arming (p. 183)
• Alarm - remote control key not working
(p. 184)
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates
the alarm system's status:
• LED not lit – Alarm not armed
• The LED flashes once every other second
– Alarm is armed
06
• The LED flashes rapidly after disarming
the alarm (and until the remote control
key is inserted in the ignition switch and
key position I is selected) – Alarm has
been triggered.
183
06 Locks and alarm
Alarm - remote control key not Alarm signals Reduced alarm level
working When the alarm (p. 182) is triggered a siren Reduced guard means that the movement
If the alarm (p. 182) cannot be deactivated sounds and all direction indicators flash. and tilt detectors can be temporarily deacti-
with the remote control key, e.g. if the key's vated.
battery (p. 169) is discharged - the car can be • A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is switched off. The siren has its To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm
unlocked, disarmed and the engine started as
own battery and works independently of (p. 182) - e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or
follows:
the car battery. during transport on a car train or car ferry -
1. Open the driver's door with the detacha- • The direction indicators flash for 5 temporarily deactivate the movement and tilt
ble key blade (p. 173). minutes or until the alarm is switched off. detectors.
> The alarm is triggered, the alarm indi- The procedure is the same as with the tem-
cator (p. 183) flashes rapidly and the porary disengaging of deadlocks (p. 180)9.
siren sounds.
Related information
06
2. Insert the remote control key in the igni-

tion switch.
> The alarm is deactivated and the alarm
indicator goes out.
3. Start the engine.
9 Only in combination with alarm.
184
06 Locks and alarm
Type approval - remote control key Country/Area

system
Type approval for the remote control key sys- China
tem can be read in the table.
Lock system, standard

Country/Area
EU, China
Hong Kong
Keyless lock system (Keyless drive)

Related information
Country/Area • Remote control key (p. 161)
EU
06
Korea
185
DRIVER SUPPORT
07 Driver support
Active chassis - Four C* Operation Electronic stability control (ESC) -

Active chassis "Four-C" (Continously general
Controlled Chassis Concept), regulates the Stability system ESC (Electronic Stability
characteristics of the shock absorbers so that Control) helps the driver to avoid skidding and
the car's driving characteristics can be improves the car's traction.
adjusted. There are three settings: Comfort,
Sport and Advanced. The activation of the ESC system
during braking may be noticed as a
Comfort throbbing sound. The car may
This setting means that the car is perceived accelerate slower than expected
as being more comfortable on rough and when the accelerator pedal is depressed.
uneven road surfaces. Shock absorption is
soft and the movement of the body is smooth WARNING
and gentle. Control buttons. The stability system ESC is supplementary
Sport The required chassis setting is selected using assistance - it cannot handle all situations
the centre console buttons. The setting used in all road conditions.
This setting means that the car is perceived
as being more sporty and is recommended when the engine was switched off is re-acti- The driver always bears responsibility that
for more active driving. Steering response is vated when the engine is next started. The the vehicle is driven safely and that appli-
faster than in the Comfort mode. Shock exception is Advanced - it is restarted as cable road traffic rules and regulations are
Sport. followed.
absorption is harder and the body follows the
road in order to reduce rolling during corner-
ing. The ESC system consists of the following
functions:
Advanced
This setting is only recommended on very
• Active Yaw Control
even and smooth road surfaces. • Spin Control
07
The shock absorbers are optimised for maxi- • Traction control system
mum roadholding and rolling in bends is fur- • Engine drag control - EDC
ther minimised. • Corner Traction Control - CTC
• Trailer Stability Assist - TSA
}}

07 Driver support
||
Active Yaw Control Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA1 Electronic stability control (ESC) -
The function checks the driving and brake Trailer stability assist (p. 307) function is to operation
force of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it
stabilise the car. begins to snake. For more information, see Selection of level - Sport mode
Driving with a trailer* (p. 301). The ESC system is always activated - it can-
Spin Control not be deactivated.
The function prevents the driving wheels from
NOTE However, the driver can
spinning against the road surface during
acceleration. The function is deactivated if the driver select the Sport mode,
selects Sport mode. which allows for a more
Traction control system active driving experience.
The function is active at low speed and trans- Related information Sport mode is selected in
fers power from the driving wheel that is spin-
ning to the one that is not.
• Electronic stability control (ESC) - opera- the menu system MY CAR.
tion (p. 188) For a description of the menu system, see
• Electronic stability control (ESC) - sym- MY CAR (p. 112).
Engine drag control - EDC
EDC (Engine Drag Control) prevents involun- bols and messages (p. 190) In Sport mode the system detects whether
tary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or the accelerator pedal, steering wheel move-
engine braking when driving in low gears on ments and cornering are more active than in
slippery road surfaces. normal driving and then allows controlled
skidding with the rear section up to a certain
Involuntary wheel locking while driving can,
level before it intervenes and stabilises the
amongst other things, impair the driver's abil-
car.
ity to steer the car.
If, for example, the driver stops a controlled
Corner Traction Control - CTC skid by releasing the accelerator pedal, then
CTC compensates for understeer and allows the ESC system intervenes and stabilises the
higher than normal acceleration in a bend car.
07 without wheelspin on the inner wheel, e.g. on
an arcing motorway entrance road to quickly With Sport mode, maximum traction is also
reach the prevailing traffic speed. obtained if the car has become stuck, or
when driving on a loose surface - e.g. sand or
deep snow.
1 Trailer Stability Assist is included in the installation of Volvo genuine towbar.

07 Driver support
Sport mode is indicated in the com-

bined instrument panel by means of
this symbol illuminating with a con-
stant glow until the driver deselects
the function or until the engine is switched off
- after the next time the engine is started the
ESC system is back in its normal mode again.
Related information
• Electronic stability control (ESC) - general
(p. 187)
• Electronic stability control (ESC) - sym-
bols and messages (p. 190)
07
189
07 Driver support
Electronic stability control (ESC) -

symbols and messages
Table
ESC Temporarily OFF ESC system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake disc temperature - the function is
reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled.
ESC Service required ESC system disengaged.

• Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.
• Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
"Message" There is a text message in the combined instrument panel (p. 64) - Read it!
and
Constant glow for System check when the engine is started.

2 seconds.
07 Flashing light. ESC system is being activated.
Constant glow. Sport mode is activated.

NOTE: The ESC system is not deactivated in this mode - it is partially reduced.
190
07 Driver support
Related information
• Electronic stability control (ESC) - general
(p. 187)
• Electronic stability control (ESC) - opera-
tion (p. 188)
07
191
07 Driver support
Road Sign Information (RSI)* WARNING Road sign information (RSI)* -

The road sign information function (RSI – operation
RSI does not work in all situations but is
Road Sign Information) helps the driver to designed merely as a supplementary aid. The road sign information function (RSI –
remember which speed-related road signs the Road Sign Information) helps the driver to
car has passed. The driver always bears ultimate responsi- remember which speed-related road signs the
bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely and that applicable road traffic rules car has passed.
and regulations are followed. The function is operated as follows:
Related information
• Road sign information (RSI)* - operation
(p. 192)
• Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations
(p. 194)
Examples of readable speed related signs2.

The RSI function gives information on current
speed, e.g. that a motorway or road is star- Recorded speed information3.
ting/ending and when overtaking is prohibi-
When RSI has recorded a road sign with an
ted.
imposed speed, the combined instrument
If both a sign for motorway/road for motor- panel displays the sign as a symbol.
ised traffic and a sign showing the maximum
Together with the symbol for
07 permitted speed are passed, RSI decides to
the current speed limit, a
show the sign symbol for maximum permitted
sign showing that overtaking
speed.
is prohibited may also be
displayed where appropriate.
2 Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.

07 Driver support
End of restriction or motorway Additional signs

A corresponding road sign is shown in the
combined instrument panel for
approx. 10 seconds in situations where RSI
detects a sign that involves the end of a
speed limit - or other speed-related informa-
tion, e.g. end of a motorway.
Some speeds are applicable only after e.g. a
Examples of such signs are: specific distance or at a certain time of day.
The driver's attention is drawn to the situation
by means of a symbol for an additional sign
under the symbol showing speed.
Display of additional information

Examples of additional signs3.
Sometimes different speed limits are signpos-
End of all restrictions. ted for the same road - an additional sign
then indicates the circumstances under which
the different speeds apply. The road section
may be particularly susceptible to accidents
in rain and/or fog, for example. A symbol for additional sign in the form of an
An additional sign relating to rain is displayed empty frame under the combined instrument
only if the windscreen wipers are in use. panel's speed symbol means that the RSI has
End of motorway. detected an additional sign with supplemen-
The speed applicable on an
tary information for the current speed limit.
Following which, the sign information is hid- exit is indicated in certain
den until the next speed-related sign is markets by means of an Setting in MY CAR
additional sign containing an 07
detected. There are options for RSI in the MY CAR
arrow. menu system; see MY CAR (p. 112).
Speed signs linked to this
type of additional sign are displayed only if
the driver is using the direction indicator.
}}
193
07 Driver support
||
Road sign information On/Off exceeded. The function can be activated/ Road sign information (RSI)* -
deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For limitations
a description of the menu system, see MY The road sign information function (RSI –
CAR (p. 112). Road Sign Information) helps the driver to
remember which speed-related road signs the
Related information
car has passed. The function has the follow-
• Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 192)
ing limitations.
• Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations
(p. 194) The RSI function's camera sensor has limita-
• MY CAR (p. 112) tions just like the human eye - read more
about camera sensor limitations (p. 228)).
The combined instrument panel's speed sym- Signs which indirectly provide information on
bol display can be disabled. The function can a prevailing speed limit, e.g. name signs for
be activated/deactivated in the menu system towns/districts, are not recorded by the RSI
MY CAR. For a description of the menu sys- function.
tem, see MY CAR (p. 112). Here are several examples of what can dis-
rupt the function:
Speed warning
• Faded signs
• Signs positioned on bends
• Rotated or damaged signs
• Concealed or poorly positioned signs
• Signs completely or partly covered with
frost, snow and/or dirt.
07 Related information
• Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 192)
• Road sign information (RSI)* - operation
The driver can opt to receive a warning when (p. 192)
the applicable speed limit is exceeded by
5 km/h or more. This warning is given by the
symbol showing the applicable maximum
speed temporarily flashing when this speed is

07 Driver support
Cruise control* WARNING Cruise control* - managing speed

The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps It is possible to activate, set and change the
The driver must always be observant with
the driver maintain an even speed, resulting in regard to the traffic conditions and inter- stored speed.
a more relaxed driving on motorways and vene when the cruise control is not main-
long, straight roads in regular traffic flows. taining a suitable speed and/or suitable Activating and setting the speed
distance. To enable cruise control:
Overview
The driver always bears ultimate responsi- • Press the steering wheel button for
bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven CRUISE (without speed limiter) or
safely. (with speed limiter).
> The cruise control symbol (6) in the com-
Related information bined instrument panel illuminates -
• Cruise control* - managing speed cruise control is in standby mode.
(p. 195)
To activate cruise control:
• Cruise control* temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 196) • At the required speed - press the steering
wheel button or .
• Cruise control* - resume set speed
(p. 197) > The current speed is stored in memory
and the combined instrument panel's
• Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 197)
Steering wheel keypad and combined instrument marking (5) illuminates at the selected
panel. • Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 197) speed and the symbol (6) changes from
Cruise control - On/Off. GREY to WHITE - the car then follows the
stored speed.
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed. NOTE
Standby mode Cruise Control cannot be enabled at
speeds below 30 km/h. 07
Activate and adjust the speed.
Selected speed (GREY = Standby mode). Changing the stored speed

Cruise control active - WHITE symbol Stored speed is changed with short or long
(GREY = Standby mode). presses on the or button.
To adjust +/- 5 km/h:
}}

07 Driver support
||
• Use short presses - each press gives Cruise control* temporary Automatic standby mode
+/- 5 km/h. deactivation and standby mode Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and
To adjust +/- 1 km/h: The function can be temporarily deactivated set in standby mode if:
and set in standby mode. •
• Hold the button depressed and release wheels lose traction
when the combined instrument panel's • engine speed is too low/high
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
mark is by the desired speed.
To temporarily disengage cruise control and • speed falls below approx. 30 km/h.
Last press made is stored in the memory. set it in standby mode: The driver must then regulate the speed.
If speed is increased using the accelerator • Press the steering wheel button .
pedal prior to pressing the / button, Related information
then it is the car's current speed when the
> The combined instrument panel's • Cruise control* (p. 195)
marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour
button is pressed that is stored. • Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 195)
from WHITE to GREY - cruise control is
A temporary increase in speed with the accel- temporarily disengaged. • Cruise control* - resume set speed
erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not (p. 197)
affect the setting - the car returns to the last Standby mode due to driver intervention • Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 197)
stored speed when the accelerator pedal is Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and
released. automatically set in standby mode if:
• the foot brake is used
NOTE • the clutch pedal is depressed
If any of the Cruise Control buttons are • the gear lever/selector is moved to N
held depressed for several minutes then it position
is blocked and deactivated. To be able to
reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be • the driver maintains speed higher than
stopped and the engine restarted. the stored speed for longer than
1 minute.
07 Related information The driver must then regulate the speed.
• Cruise control* (p. 195) A temporary increase in speed with the accel-
erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
affect the setting - the car returns to the last
stored speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.

07 Driver support
Cruise control* - resume set speed Cruise control* - deactivate Adaptive cruise control - ACC*
The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
the driver to maintain an even speed. How it is deactivated is described here. Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an
Cruise control is switched off with the steer- even speed combined with a pre-selected
After temporary deactivation and standby
ing wheel button (1) or by switching off the time interval to the vehicle ahead.
mode (p. 196) it is possible to resume the set
speed. engine - the set/stored speed is thus cleared The adaptive cruise control provides a more
and cannot then be resumed with the but- relaxing driving experience on long journeys
To reactivate the cruise control from standby
ton. on motorways and long straight main roads in
mode:
smooth traffic flows.
• Press the steering wheel button .
Related information
• Cruise control* (p. 195) The driver sets the desired speed (p. 201)
> The combined instrument panel's and time interval (p. 202) to the car in front.
marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour • Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 195)
When the radar detector detects a slower
from GREY to WHITE - the car then fol- • Cruise control* temporary deactivation vehicle in front of the car, the speed is auto-
lows the last stored speed. and standby mode (p. 196) matically adapted to that. When the road is
• Cruise control* - resume set speed clear again the car returns to the selected
NOTE (p. 197) speed.
A marked speed increase may occur once If the adaptive cruise control is switched off
the speed has been resumed by selecting or set to standby mode (p. 202) and the car
. comes too close to a vehicle in front, then the
driver is warned instead by the Distance
Warning (p. 212) function about the short
Related information
distance.
• Cruise control* (p. 195)
• Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 195)
• Cruise control* temporary deactivation
07
and standby mode (p. 196)
• Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 197)
}}

07 Driver support
||
WARNING Related information Adaptive cruise control* - function
• Adaptive cruise control* - function It consists of a cruise control system and a
The driver must always be observant with (p. 198)
regard to the traffic conditions and inter- coordinated spacing system.
vene when the adaptive cruise control is • Adaptive cruise control* - overview
not maintaining a suitable speed or suita- (p. 200) Function overview
ble distance. • Adaptive cruise control* - managing
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle speed (p. 201)
all traffic, weather and road conditions. • Adaptive cruise control* - set time interval
Read all the sections about the adaptive (p. 202)
cruise control in the owner's manual in • Adaptive cruise control* - temporary
order to learn about its limitations, of deactivation, and standby mode (p. 202)
which the driver should be aware before it
is used. • Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking
another vehicle (p. 203)
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the correct distance and • Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate
speed, even when the adaptive cruise con- (p. 204)
trol is being used. • Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue assis-
tance (p. 204) Function overview4.
Warning lamp - braking by driver required
IMPORTANT • Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise
control functionality (p. 206) Steering wheel keypad (p. 200)
Maintenance of adaptive cruise control
components must only be performed at a • Radar sensor (p. 206)
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop Radar sensor (p. 206)
• Radar sensor - limitations (p. 207)
is recommended.
• Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing
and action (p. 209)
Automatic gearbox
07 Cars with automatic gearbox have enhanced
• Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and
messages (p. 210)
functionality with the adaptive cruise control's
Queue assistance (p. 204) function.
4 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may differ depending on car model.

07 Driver support
WARNING The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the

vehicle ahead in the same lane according to
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision what the driver set for time interval (p. 202). If
avoidance system. The driver must inter- the radar sensor cannot see any vehicle in
vene if the system does not detect a vehi-
cle in front. front then the car will instead maintain the
speed set and stored by the driver. This also
The adaptive cruise control does not brake takes place if the speed of the vehicle in front
for humans or animals, and not for small
exceeds the stored speed.
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcy-
cles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary The adaptive cruise control aims to control
vehicles and objects. the speed in a smooth way. In situations that
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for demand sudden braking the driver must
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at brake himself/herself. This applies with large
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot differences in speed, or if the vehicle in front 1. Collision warning system warning lamp and
of water or slush on the road, in heavy brakes heavily. Due to limitations in the radar warning sound6.
rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding sensor (p. 207) braking may come unexpect- If the car needs to be braked more heavily
roads or on slip roads.
edly or not at all. than the adaptive cruise control capacity and
the driver does not brake, then the warning
The adaptive cruise control can be activated
The distance to the vehicle ahead (p. 202) is lamp and warning sound from the Collision
to follow another vehicle at speeds from
primarily measured by a radar sensor warning system (p. 222) are used in order to
(p. 206). The cruise control function regulates 30 km/h5 up to 200 km/h. If the speed falls
alert the driver that immediate intervention is
the speed with acceleration and braking. It is below 30 km/h or if the engine speed
required.
normal for the brakes to emit a low sound becomes too low, the cruise control is set in
when they are being used by the adaptive standby mode (p. 202) at which automatic
braking ceases - the driver must then take NOTE
cruise control.
over himself/herself to maintain a safe dis- The warning lamp may be difficult to see in
tance to the vehicle ahead. strong sunlight or when wearing sun-
WARNING glasses.
07
The brake pedal moves when the adaptive Warning lamp - braking by driver
cruise control brakes. Do not rest your foot required
beneath the brake pedal - it may then Adaptive cruise control has a braking
become trapped. capacity that is equivalent to approx. 40% of
the car's braking capacity.
5 Queue Assist (p. 204) (in cars with automatic gearbox) can operate in the range of 0-200 km/h.
6 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
}}
199
07 Driver support
||
WARNING Adaptive cruise control* - overview • Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and
messages (p. 210)
The adaptive cruise control only warns of
vehicles which its radar sensor has
detected - hence a warning may not be
given, or it may be given with a certain
delay. Do not wait for a warning without
braking when so required.
Steep roads and/or heavy load

Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control
is primarily intended for use when driving on
level road surfaces. It may have difficulty in
keeping the correct distance from the vehicle
ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes,
with a heavy load or with a trailer - in which Standby mode ceases and the stored
case, be extra attentive and ready to slow speed is resumed.
down. Cruise control - On/Off or Standby mode.
Related information Time interval - Increase/decrease.
• Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 197)
Activate and adjust the speed.
• Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate
(p. 204) (Not used)
• Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking
another vehicle (p. 203) Green marking at stored speed (WHITE =
standby mode).
Time distance
07
ACC is active at the GREEN symbol
(WHITE = standby mode).
Related information
• Adaptive cruise control* - function
(p. 198)

07 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control* - managing At the same time a speed stored speed when the accelerator pedal is
speed range is marked: released.
To enable ACC:
NOTE
• Press the steering wheel button -a
If any of the adaptive cruise control but-
similar WHITE symbol illuminates in the tons are held depressed for several
combined instrument panel (8) which • the higher speed with GREEN marking is minutes then the function is blocked and
shows that the adaptive cruise control is the pre-programmed speed deactivated. To be able to reactivate it, the
in standby mode (p. 202). car must be stopped and the engine
• the lower speed is the speed of the vehi-
To activate ACC: cle in front. restarted.
• At the required speed - press the steering In certain situations it cannot be reactiva-
Changing the stored speed ted - in which case, the combined instru-
wheel button or . Stored speed is changed with short or long ment panel (p. 210) shows Adaptive
> The current speed is stored in the mem- presses on the or button. cruise control unavailable.
ory, the combined instrument panel
shows a "magnifying glass" (6) around To adjust +/- 5 km/h:
Related information
the stored speed for a second or so and • Use short presses - each press gives • Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 197)
its marking changes from WHITE to +/- 5 km/h.
GREEN. • Adaptive cruise control* - overview
To adjust +/- 1 km/h: (p. 200)
When this symbol changes colour
• Hold the button depressed and release • Adaptive cruise control* - function
from WHITE to GREEN, the ACC is when the combined instrument panel's (p. 198)
active and the car maintains the mark is by the desired speed.
stored speed.
Last press made is stored in the memory.
Only when the symbol shows
an image of another vehicle If speed is increased using the accelerator
is the distance to the vehicle pedal prior to pressing the / button, 07
in front controlled by the then it is the car's current speed when the
ACC. button is pressed that is stored.
A temporary increase in speed with the accel-
erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not

07 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control* - set time NOTE Adaptive cruise control* - temporary
interval deactivation, and standby mode
Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations. The adaptive cruise control can be temporar-
Different time intervals to the ily deactivated and set in standby mode.
vehicle in front can be If the adaptive cruise control does not
selected and shown in the appear to react when activated, this may Temporary deactivation/standby mode
combined instrument panel be because the time distance to the vehi- To temporarily disengage the adaptive cruise
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the cle in front is preventing an increase in
speed. control and set it in standby mode:
more lines the longer the
time interval. One line corre- The higher the speed the longer the calcu- • Press the steering wheel button
sponds to approximately 1 second to the lated distance in metres for a given time This symbol and the stored speed's
vehicle in front, 5 lines approximately interval. marking then change colour from
3 seconds. GREEN to WHITE.
Read more how speed is handled (p. 201).
To set/change the time distance: Standby mode due to driver intervention
• Increase or decrease with the steering Related information The adaptive cruise control is temporarily dis-
wheel buttons / . • Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 197) engaged and set automatically in standby
• Adaptive cruise control* - overview mode if:
At low speed, when the distances are short,
the adaptive cruise control increases the time (p. 200) • the foot brake is used
interval slightly. • Adaptive cruise control* - function • the clutch pedal is depressed for longer
(p. 198) than 1 minute7
The adaptive cruise control allows the time
interval to vary noticeably in certain situations • Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate
• the gear selector is moved to N position
in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle (p. 204) (automatic gearbox)
in front smoothly and comfortably. • the driver maintains speed higher than
Note that a short time interval only allows the the stored speed for longer than
07 driver a short time to react and take action if 1 minute.
any unforeseen traffic problem should arise. The driver must then regulate the speed.
The same symbol is also shown when Dis- A temporary increase in speed with the accel-
tance Warning (p. 212) function is activated. erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
7 Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.

07 Driver support
stored speed when the accelerator pedal is wheel button - the speed is then set to the Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking
released. last stored speed. another vehicle
Automatic standby mode When the car is following another vehicle and
The adaptive cruise control is dependent on
NOTE
the driver indicates an impending overtaking
other systems, e.g. Stability system ESC A pronounced increase in speed may manoeuvre with the direction indicator9, the
(p. 187). If any of these systems stops work- occur after the cruise control has been adaptive cruise control helps to briefly accel-
ing, the adaptive cruise control is deactivated reactivated with the button. erate the car towards the vehicle in front.
automatically.
This function is active at speeds
In the event of automatic deactivation a signal Related information above 70 km/h.
will sound and the message Adaptive cruise • Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 197)
control cancelled is shown in the combined • Adaptive cruise control* - overview WARNING
instrument panel. The driver must then inter- (p. 200)
vene and adapt the speed and distance to Be aware that this function can be acti-
• Cruise control* (p. 195) vated in more situations other than during
the vehicle ahead.
overtaking, e.g. when a direction indicator
An automatic deactivation can be due to: is used to indicate a change of lane or exit
to another road - the car will then acceler-
• the driver opens the door ate briefly.
• the driver takes off his seatbelt
• engine speed is too low/high Related information
• speed has fallen below 30 km/h8 • Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 197)
• wheels lose traction • Adaptive cruise control* - overview
(p. 200)
• brake temperature is high
• the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet • Adaptive cruise control* - function
snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked). (p. 198)
07
Resume set speed
Adaptive cruise control in standby mode is
reactivated with one press on the steering
8 Does not apply to a car with Queue Assist - it can go all the way down to 0 km/h.
9 On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.

07 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue With an automatic gearbox, the adaptive
assistance cruise control can follow another vehicle
With a short press on the steering wheel but- Queue assistance also provides the adaptive within the range 0-200 km/h.
ton the adaptive cruise control is set in cruise control with enhanced functionality at
standby mode (p. 202). It is switched off with speeds below 30 km/h. NOTE
an additional short press - the set/stored
In cars with automatic gearbox the adaptive A vehicle in front must be within a reason-
speed is thus cleared and cannot then be able distance in order to enable activation
resumed with the button. cruise control is supplemented with the of the adaptive cruise control at a speed
queue assistance function (also referred to as lower than 30 km/h.
Related information "Queue Assist").
• Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 197) Queue assistance has the following functions: For shorter stops in connection with inching
• Extended speed range - also below in slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is
(p. 198) automatically resumed if the stops do not
30 km/h and when stationary
• Change of target
exceed about 3 seconds - if it takes longer
messages (p. 210) before the car in front starts moving again
• Automatic braking ceases when station- then the Adaptive cruise control is set in
ary standby mode with automatic braking. The
• Automatic activation parking brake. driver must then reactivate it in one of the fol-
Note that the lowest programmable speed for lowing ways:
the adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h - even • Press the steering wheel button .
though it is capable of following another vehi-
cle down to a standstill, a speed lower than or
30 km/h cannot be selected/stored. • Depress the accelerator pedal.
Extended speed range > The adaptive cruise control will then
resume following the vehicle in front.
07
NOTE
In order to activate the adaptive cruise
control, the driver's door must be closed
and the driver must be wearing the seat-
belt.

07 Driver support
NOTE WARNING Queue assistance releases the foot brake and

sets the adaptive cruise control in standby
Queue Assist can hold the car stationary When the adaptive cruise control is follow- mode in the following situations:
for a maximum of 4 minutes - then the ing another vehicle at speeds in excess of
parking brake is applied and the adaptive 30 km/h and the target is changed from a • the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
cruise control is disengaged. moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, the pedal
adaptive cruise control will ignore the sta-
• The parking brake must be released tionary vehicle and instead select the
• the parking brake is applied
before the adaptive cruise control can stored speed. • the gear selector is moved to P, N or R
be reactivated. position
• The driver must intervene him/herself
and brake. • the driver sets the adaptive cruise control
Change of target in standby mode.
Automatic standby mode with change Automatic activation parking brake
of target In certain situations queue assistance applies
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged the parking brake in order to keep the car
and set in standby mode: remaining stationary.
• when the speed is below 5 km/h and the This takes place if:
adaptive cruise control is uncertain
whether the target object is a stationary
• the driver opens the door or takes off
his/her seatbelt
vehicle or some other object, e.g. a speed
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then bump. • ESC is changed from Normal to Sport
there may be stationary traffic in front. mode
• when the speed is below 5 km/h and the
When the adaptive cruise control is following vehicle in front turns off so the adaptive • Queue assistance has held the car sta-
another vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h and cruise control no longer has a vehicle to tionary for more than 4 minutes
changes target from a moving to a stationary follow. • the engine is switched off
vehicle, the adaptive cruise control will slow • the brakes have overheated.
Termination of automatic braking at a 07
down for the stationary vehicle.
standstill Related information
In certain situations, queue assistance stops • Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 197)
automatic braking at a standstill. This means
that the brakes are released and the car may • Adaptive cruise control* - overview
(p. 200)
start to roll - the driver must therefore inter-
vene and brake the car himself/herself in • Adaptive cruise control* - function
order to maintain its position. (p. 198)

07 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control* - switch Changing back from CC to ACC Radar sensor
cruise control functionality Switch off cruise control with 1-2 presses on The function of the radar sensor is to detect
the button in accordance with the deacti- cars or larger vehicles in the same direction,
Changing from ACC to CC vation instructions (p. 204). The next time the in the same lane.
A symbol for active cruise control is shown in system is switched on it is the Adaptive
the combined instrument panel: cruise control that is activated. The radar sensor is used by the following
functions:
CC ACC Related information • Distance Warning*
Cruise Control Adaptive Cruise • Adaptive cruise control*
Control
• Adaptive cruise control* - overview
(p. 200) • Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Pedestrian Detection*
(p. 198)
IMPORTANT
Cruise control Adaptive cruise control
In the event of visible damage to the car's
grille, or if you suspect that the radar sen-
With one press of the button the adaptive sor may be damaged:
part (spacing system) in the cruise control is
deactivated, at which point the car just fol-
• Contact a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
lows the set/stored speed.
The function may completely or partially
• Give a long press on the steering wheel disappear - or malfunction - if the grille,
button - the combined instrument the radar sensor or its bracket is damaged
or has loosened.
panel's symbol changes from to .
> By these means the standard cruise con-
trol (p. 195) CC (Cruise Modification of the radar sensor could result
07 Control) is activated. in it being illegal to use.
WARNING Related information

• Radar sensor - limitations (p. 207)
The car no longer brakes automatically
after switching from ACC to CC - it merely • Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 197)
follows the set speed. • Collision warning system* (p. 222)
• Distance Warning* (p. 212)

07 Driver support
Radar sensor - limitations WARNING

A radar sensor (p. 206) has certain limitations
The driver must always be observant with
- due to its limited field of vision for example. regard to the traffic conditions and inter-
vene when the adaptive cruise control is
The capacity of the adaptive cruise control to
not maintaining a suitable speed or suita-
detect a vehicle in front is significantly ble distance.
reduced if:
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle
• the speed of vehicles in front is signifi- all traffic, weather and road conditions.
cantly different from your own speed
Read all the sections about the adaptive
• its radar sensor becomes blocked - e.g. cruise control in the owner's manual in
in heavy rain or slush, or if other objects order to learn about its limitations, of
have collected in front of the radar sen- which the driver should be aware before it
sor. is used.
The driver always bears responsibility for
NOTE maintaining the correct distance and
speed, even when the adaptive cruise con-
Keep the area in front of the radar sensor trol is being used.
clean - see subheading "Maintenance"
(p. 226).
WARNING
Field of vision Accessories or other objects such as auxil-
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. ACC field of vision. iary lamps must not be fitted in front of the
In some situations another vehicle is not Sometimes the radar sensor is late at grille.
detected, or the detection is made later than detecting vehicles at close distances -
expected. e.g. a vehicle that drives in between the
car and vehicles in front.
07
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or
vehicles not driving in the centre of the
lane can remain undetected.
In bends the radar sensor may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle
from view.
}}
207
07 Driver support
||
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
avoidance system. The driver must inter-
vene if the system does not detect a vehi-
cle in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake
for humans or animals, and not for small
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcy-
cles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary
vehicles and objects.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot
of water or slush on the road, in heavy
rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding
roads or on slip roads.
Related information
• Collision warning system* (p. 222)
07

07 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing sensor (p. 206) cannot detect other vehicles sion Warning with Auto Brake (p. 222) are
and action in front of the car. working.
This message indicates that neither of the The following table presents examples of
If the combined instrument panel shows the
functions for Distance Alert (p. 212) or Colli- possible causes for a message being shown
message Radar blocked See manual then it
along with the appropriate action:
means that the adaptive cruise control's radar
Cause Action
The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.
Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals. No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy road
radar signals. surface.
The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains. Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no longer
blocked.
Related information
(p. 200)
(p. 198)
messages (p. 210)
07

07 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols are some examples - follow the recommenda-
and messages tion given if appropriate:
Sometimes the adaptive cruise control may
display a symbol and/or text message. Here

The symbol is GREEN The car maintains the stored speed.
The symbol is WHITE Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode.
Standard cruise control is selected manually.
Set ESC to Normal to The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated until the Stability system (ESC) (p. 187) has been set
enable Cruise in Normal mode.
Adaptive cruise control The adaptive cruise control has been deactivated - the driver has to regulate the speed himself.
cancelled
Adaptive cruise control The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated.

unavailable This could be due to:
• brake temperature is high
• the radar sensor is blocked by e.g. wet snow or rain.
Radar blocked See man- The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disengaged.
07 ual
• The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy
rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
The driver can then choose to switch to (p. 206) normal Cruise control (CC) - a text message provides
information on appropriate alternatives.
Read about radar sensor limitations (p. 207).

07 Driver support

Adaptive cruise control The adaptive cruise control is disengaged.
Service required
• Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Press brake to hold vehi- The car is stationary and the cruise control will release the foot brake to allow the parking brake to
cle + acoustic alarm take over and hold the car, but a fault in the parking brake means the car will shortly begin to roll.
(Only with Queue Assist) • The driver must brake himself/herself. The message remains and the alarm sounds until the driver
depresses the brake pedal or uses the accelerator pedal.
Below 30 km/h Lead Shown in the event of attempts to activate the adaptive cruise control at speeds below 30 km/h with-
vehicle required out a vehicle in front within the activation distance.
(Only with Queue Assist)
Related information
(p. 200)
(p. 198)
07

07 Driver support
Distance Warning* NOTE tion is operated in the car's menu system MY

The Distance Warning function (Distance CAR (p. 112) - there, search for and locate
Distance warning is deactivated during the the function Distance Alert.
Alert) warns the driver if the time interval to time the adaptive cruise control is active.
the vehicle ahead becomes too short.
Set time interval
Distance Warning is active at speeds above WARNING
30 km/h and only reacts to vehicles driving in
front of the car, in the same direction. No dis- Distance warning only reacts if the dis-
tance information is provided for oncoming, tance to the vehicle ahead is shorter than
the preset value - the speed of the driver's
slow or stationary vehicles. vehicle is not affected.
Operation
Controls and symbol for time interval.

Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Time interval - On.

Different time intervals to the
Orange-coloured warning lamp10. vehicle in front can be
selected and shown in the
An orange-coloured warning lamp in the
combined instrument panel
windscreen illuminates with a constant glow if
Press the button in the centre console to as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
07 the distance to the vehicle in front is shorter
switch the function on or off. The function is more lines the longer the
than the set time interval.
switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the time interval. One line corre-
button. sponds to approximately 1 second to the
Some combinations of the selected equip- vehicle in front, 5 lines approximately
ment leave no vacant space for a button in 3 seconds.
the centre console - in which case the func-

07 Driver support
The same symbol is also shown when Adap- Distance Warning* - limitations
tive cruise control (p. 198) is activated.
This function, which uses the same radar
NOTE sensor as Adaptive cruise control (p. 197) and
Collision warning with auto brake (p. 222),
The higher the speed the longer the calcu- has certain limitations.
lated distance in metres for a given time
interval.
NOTE
The set time interval is also used by the
function adaptive cruise control (p. 198). Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia-
tions in light intensity, as well as wearing
Only use the time intervals permitted by sunglasses, could mean that the warning
local traffic regulations. light in the windscreen cannot be seen.
Poor weather or winding roads could
Related information affect the radar sensor's capacity to detect
• Distance Warning* - limitations (p. 213) vehicles in front.
• Distance Warning* - symbols and mes- The size of other vehicles could also affect
sages (p. 214) detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This
could mean that the warning lamp illumi-
nates at a shorter distance than the setting
or that the warning is temporarily absent.
Extremely high speeds can also cause the
lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance
than that set due to limitations in sensor
range.
For further information on radar sensor limita-

tions, see Radar sensor - limitations (p. 207) 07
and (p. 227).
Related information
• Distance Warning* - symbols and mes-
sages (p. 214)

07 Driver support
Distance Warning* - symbols and instrument panel if the function is reduced

messages due to its limitations.
The function has certain symbols and mes-

sages that can be shown in the combined
SymbolA Message Specification

Radar blocked See Distance Warning temporarily disengaged.
manual The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event of heavy rain or if slush
has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Collision warning Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake fully or partially disengaged.
Service required Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
Related information
• Distance Warning* - limitations (p. 213)
07

07 Driver support
City Safety™ IMPORTANT City Safety™ - function

City Safety™ is a function for helping the City Safety™ detects the traffic in front of the
Maintenance and replacement of City
driver to avoid a collision when driving in Safety™ components must only be per- car with a laser sensor fitted in the top edge
queues, amongst other things, when changes formed by a workshop - an authorised of the windscreen. If there is an imminent risk
in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in Volvo workshop is recommended. of collision, City Safety™ will automatically
attention, could lead to an incident. brake the car, which may be experienced as
sudden braking.
The City Safety™ function is active at speeds WARNING
under 50 km/h and it helps the driver by auto-
City Safety™ does not engage in all driv-
matically braking the car in the event of immi- ing situations or traffic, weather or road
nent risk of collision with vehicles in front, conditions.
should the driver not react in time by braking
City Safety™ does not react to vehicles
and/or steering away.
driving in a different direction from the car,
City Safety™ is activated in situations where to small vehicles and motorcycles or to
the driver should have started braking earlier, humans and animals.
which is why it cannot help the driver in every City Safety™ can prevent collision at a
situation. speed difference of less than 15 km/h - at
a higher speed difference, it is only possi-
City Safety™ is designed to be activated as ble to reduce collision speed. In order to
late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary obtain full brake function, the driver must
intervention. depress the brake pedal.
City Safety™ must not be used as an excuse Never wait for City Safety™ to engage.
for the driver to change his/her driving style. If The driver always bears responsibility for
the driver solely relies on City Safety™ to do maintaining the proper distance and
the braking, there will be a collision sooner or speed.
later.
The driver or passengers normally only notice Related information 07
City Safety™ if a situation arises where the • City Safety™ - limitations (p. 217)
car is extremely close to being in a collision. • City Safety™ - function (p. 215)
If the car is also equipped with Collision • City Safety™ - operation (p. 216)
Warning with Auto Brake (p. 222)* these two • City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 219)
systems complement each other. • City Safety™ - symbols and messages
(p. 221)
}}

07 Driver support
||
When the function is activated and brakes, City Safety™ - operation
the combined instrument panel shows a text City Safety™ is a function for helping the
message to the effect that the function is/has driver to avoid a collision when driving in
been active. queues, amongst other things, when changes
in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in
NOTE attention, could lead to an incident.
When City Safety™ brakes, the brake On and Off
lights come on.
NOTE
Related information
• City Safety™ - limitations (p. 217) The City Safety™ function is activated
automatically when the engine is started.
Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window11. • City Safety™ (p. 215)
If the speed difference is 4-15 km/h in relation • City Safety™ - operation (p. 216) In certain situations, it may advisable to disa-
to the vehicle in front then City Safety™ can • City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 219) ble City Safety™, e.g. where leafy branches
completely prevent a collision. • City Safety™ - symbols and messages could sweep over the bonnet and/or wind-
City Safety™ activates a short, sharp braking (p. 221) screen.
and stops the car in normal circumstances, City Safety™ handled in the menu system
just behind the vehicle in front. For most dri- MY CAR (p. 112) and after starting the engine
vers this is well outside normal driving style the function can be deactivated as follows:
and may be experienced as being uncomfort-
able. • Search in MY CAR for Driver support
system and select the Off option at City
If the difference in speed between the vehi- Safety.
cles is greater than 15 km/h then City
However, the function will be enabled the
Safety™ may not prevent the collision on its
07 next time the engine is started, regardless
own. To obtain full brake force, the driver
of whether the system was enabled or
must depress the brake pedal. This could
disabled when the engine was switched
then make it possible to prevent a collision,
off.
even at speed differences above 15 km/h.
216
07 Driver support
WARNING City Safety™ - limitations tems will provide best possible braking force
The sensor in City Safety™ is designed to with maintained stability.
The laser sensor also transmits laser light
when City Safety™ is disabled manually. detect cars and other large vehicles in front of When your own car is reversing, City Safety™
the car irrespective of whether it is day or is temporarily deactivated.
night.
Related information City Safety™ is not activated at low speeds -
• City Safety™ (p. 215) However, the function does have some limita- under 4 km/h, which is why the system does
tions. not intervene in situations where a vehicle in
• City Safety™ - limitations (p. 217)
front is being approached very slowly, e.g.
• City Safety™ - function (p. 215) The sensor's limitations mean that City
when parking.
Safety™ has poorer functionality - or none at
• City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 219)
all - in e.g. heavy snowfall or rain, dense fog, Driver commands are always prioritised,
• City Safety™ - symbols and messages dust storms or white-out situations. Misting, which is why City Safety™ does not intervene
(p. 221) dirt, ice or snow on the windscreen may also in situations where the driver is steering or
• MY CAR (p. 112) disrupt the function. accelerating in a clear manner, even if a colli-
sion is unavoidable.
Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for
projecting load, or accessories such as auxili- When City Safety™ has prevented a collision
ary lamps and bull bars that are higher than with a stationary object the car remains sta-
the bonnet limit the function. tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the
car is braked for a vehicle in front that is mov-
The laser beam from the sensor in City
ing, then speed is reduced to the same speed
Safety™ measures how the light is reflected.
as that maintained by the vehicle in front.
The sensor cannot detect objects with low
reflection capacity. The rear sections of the On a car with manual gearbox the engine
vehicle generally reflect the light sufficiently stops when City Safety™ has stopped the
thanks to the number plate and rear light car, unless the driver manages to depress the
reflectors. clutch pedal beforehand.
07
On slippery road surfaces the braking dis-
tance is extended, which may reduce the
capacity of City Safety™ to avoid a collision.
In such situations the ABS12 and ESC13 sys-
12 (Anti-lock Braking System) - Anti-lock braking system.

13 (Electronic Stability Control) - Stability system.
}}
217
07 Driver support
||
NOTE Cause Action IMPORTANT
• Keep the windscreen surface in front The windscreen sur- Clean the wind- If there are cracks, scratches or stone
of the laser sensor free from ice, snow chips in the windscreen in front of either of
face in front of the screen surface in the laser sensor's "windows" and they
and dirt (see the illustration for sensor
laser sensor is dirty or front of the sensor cover a surface of approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm
location (p. 215)).
covered with ice or from dirt, ice and (or larger), then a workshop must be con-
• Do not affix or mount anything on the snow. snow. tacted for replacement of the windscreen
windscreen in front of the laser sensor. (see the illustration for sensor location
• Remove ice and snow from the bonnet The laser sensor field Remove the (p. 215)) - an authorised Volvo workshop is
- snow and ice must not exceed a of vision is blocked. blocking object. recommended.
height of 5 cm. Failure to take action may result in
reduced performance for City Safety™.
Fault tracing and action To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or
If the message Windscreen sensors reduced operation for City Safety™, the
following also applies:
blocked See manual is shown in the com-
bined instrument panel it indicates that the • Volvo recommends that you do not
laser sensor is blocked and cannot detect repair cracks, scratches or stone chips
vehicles in front of the car. This means in turn in the area in front of the laser sensor -
that City Safety™ is not operational. instead, the whole windscreen should
be replaced.
The Windscreen sensors blocked See
manual message is not shown for all situa- • Before replacing a windscreen, con-
tact an authorised Volvo workshop to
tions in which the laser sensor is blocked.
verify that the correct windscreen is
The driver must therefore be diligent about
ordered and fitted.
keeping the windscreen and area in front of
the laser sensor clean. • The same type or Volvo-approved
windscreen wipers must be fitted dur-
07 The following table presents possible causes ing replacement.
for the message being shown, along with
suggestions for appropriate action.
Related information
• City Safety™ (p. 215)
• City Safety™ - function (p. 215)
• City Safety™ - operation (p. 216)
218
07 Driver support
City Safety™ - laser sensor • IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies WARNING

The City Safety™ function includes a sensor with FDA (U.S. Food Administration)
standards for laser product design with If any of these instructions are not followed
which transmits laser light (see illustration then there is a risk of eye injury!
(p. 215) for sensor location). Contact a quali- the exception of deviations in accordance
with "Laser Notice No. 50" from • Never look into the laser sensor (which
fied workshop in the event of a fault or if the
26 July 2001. emits spreading invisible laser radia-
laser sensor needs servicing - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended. It is abso- tion) at a distance of 100 mm or closer
Radiation data for the laser sensor with magnifying optics such as a mag-
lutely essential to follow the prescribed The following table specifies the laser sen- nifying glass, microscope, lens or simi-
instructions when handling the laser sensor. sor's physical data. lar optical instruments.
The following two labels relate to the laser • Testing, repair, removal, adjustment
Maximum pulse energy 2.64 µJ and/or replacement of the laser sen-
sensor:
sor's spare parts must only be carried
Maximum average output 45 mW
out by a qualified workshop - we rec-
Pulse duration 33 ns ommend an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
Divergence (horizontal x verti- 28° × 12° • To avoid exposure to harmful radia-
cal) tion, do not carry out any readjust-
ments or maintenance other than
those specified here.
• The repairer must follow specially
drawn up workshop information for the
laser sensor.
• Do not remove the laser sensor (this
includes removing the lenses). A
The upper label in the figure describes the removed laser sensor does not fulfil
laser beam's classification: laser class 3B as per standard IEC 07
60825-1. Laser class 3B is not eye-
• Laser radiation - Do not look into the safe and therefore entails a risk of
laser beam with optical instruments - injury.
Class 1M laser product.
• The laser sensor's connector must be
The lower label in the figure describes the unplugged before removal from the
laser beam's physical data: windscreen.
}}
219
07 Driver support
||
• The laser sensor must be fitted onto
the windscreen before the sensor's
connector is plugged in.
• The laser sensor transmits a laser light
when the remote control key is in key
position II (p. 79) even if the engine is
switched off.
Related information
• City Safety™ - symbols and messages
(p. 221)
07
220
07 Driver support
City Safety™ - symbols and symbols may illuminate in the combined by briefly pressing the OK button on the
messages instrument panel and a text message may be direction indicator stalk.
In conjunction with automatic braking by the shown. A text message can be acknowledged
City Safety™ (p. 215) system, one or more
Symbol Message Meaning/Action

Auto braking by City Safety City Safety™ is braking or has automatically braked.
Windscreen sensors blocked The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it.
See manual
• Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor.
Read about laser sensor limitations (p. 217).
City Safety Service required City Safety™ is not operational.

Related information
• City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 219)
07
221
07 Driver support
Collision warning system* Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" function • Collision warning system* - limitations
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and may appear in two variants: (p. 227)
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to Level 1 • Collision warning system* - camera sen-
assist the driver when there is a risk of collid- sor limitations (p. 228)
The driver is merely warned14 of occurring
ing with a pedestrian, cyclist or vehicle in obstacles by means of visual and acoustic • Collision warning system* - symbols and
front that are stationary or moving in the same signals - no automatic braking intervenes, the messages (p. 230)
direction. driver must himself brake.
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Level 2
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is activated The driver is warned of occurring obstacles
in situations where the driver should have by means of visual and acoustic signals - the
started braking earlier, which is why it cannot car is braked automatically if the driver him-
help the driver in every situation. self does not act within a reasonable time.
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is designed IMPORTANT
to be activated as late as possible in order to Maintenance of the internal components of
avoid unnecessary intervention. the "Collision Warning with Auto Brake
and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection"
must only be performed at a workshop -
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" can pre- an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
vent a collision or reduce collision speed. mended.
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" must not Related information
be used as an excuse for the driver to change • Collision warning system* - function
his/her driving style. If the driver solely relies (p. 223)
on Collision Warning with Auto Brake to do
• Collision warning system* - detection of
07 the braking, there might be a risk of a colli- pedestrians (p. 225)
sion sooner or later.
Two system levels cyclists (p. 224)
Depending on how the car is equipped, the • Collision warning system* - operation
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and (p. 226)
14 No warning for cyclists with "Level 1".

07 Driver support
Collision warning system* - function 1 - Collision warning If in this situation the driver has not yet
The driver is first warned of a potentially started to take evasive action and the risk of
imminent collision. collision is imminent then the automatic brak-
ing function is deployed - this takes place
The collision warning system can detect
irrespective of whether or not the driver
pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles that are sta-
brakes. Braking then takes place with full
tionary or moving in the same direction in
brake force in order to reduce collision speed,
front of the driver's vehicle.
or with limited brake force if it is sufficient to
If there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian, avoid a collision. For cyclists, the warning and
cyclist or a vehicle then the driver's attention full brake intervention may come very late or
is attracted with a flashing red warning signal simultaneously.
(1) and an acoustic signal.
2 - Brake support16
Function overview15. If the risk of collision has increased further
after the collision warning then the brake sup-
Audio-visual warning signal in the event
port is activated.
of a collision risk.
This means that the brake system is prepared
Radar sensor16
for rapid braking by applying the brakes
Camera sensor lightly, which may feel like a slight jolt.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake executes If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently
three steps in the following order: quickly then full brake function is imple-
mented.
1. Collision warning
Brake support also reinforces the driver's
2. Brake support16
braking if the system considers that the brak-
3. Auto Brake16 ing is not sufficient to avoid a collision. 07
The collision warning system and City
Safety™ (p. 215) complement each other. 3 - Auto Brake16
The automatic brake function is activated
last.
16 With system Level 2 only.
}}

07 Driver support
||
WARNING Collision warning system* - detection tours, directly from behind and in the car's cen-
of cyclists tre line.
The collision warning system does not Optimal performance of the system requires
engage in all driving situations or traffic,
weather or road conditions. The collision that the system function that detects a cyclist
warning system does not react to vehicles receives as unambiguous information as pos-
or cyclists driving in another direction to sible about the body and bicycle contours -
the car or to animals. this implies the opportunity to identify the
Warning only activated in the event of a bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper
high risk for collision. This section "Func- and lower body combined with a normal
tion" and the section "Limitations" inform human pattern of movement.
about limitations that the driver must be
If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle
aware of before using the Collision Warn-
ing system with Auto Brake. are not visible to the function's camera then
the system cannot detect a cyclist.
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at • For the function to be able to detect a
a vehicle speed exceeding 80 km/h. The function only "sees" cyclists from behind, cyclist, he/she must be an adult and rid-
who are travelling in the same direction. ing an "adult bicycle".
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians and cyclists do not work in • The bicycle must be equipped with a
darkness and tunnels - not even when highly visible and approved17 rearward-
streetlights are lit. facing red reflector, fitted at least 70 cm
The auto-brake function can prevent a col- above the roadway.
lision or reduce collision speed. To ensure • The function can only detect cyclists
full brake performance, the driver should directly from behind and who are travel-
always depress the brake pedal - even ling in the same direction - not at an
when the car auto-brakes.
angle from behind, not from the side.
Never wait for a collision warning. The • Cyclists travelling on the left or right-hand
07 driver is always responsible that the cor-
edge of the car's imagined/extended side
rect distance and speed are maintained -
even when the collision warning system lines may be detected late or not at all.
with auto-brake is used. • The function's capacity to detect cyclists
Optimum examples of what the system interprets at dusk and dawn is limited - just like the
as a cyclist - with clear body and bicycle con- human eye.
Related information
17 The reflector must fulfil the recommendations and conditions of the traffic authority in the market in question.

07 Driver support
• The function's capacity to detect cyclists Collision warning system* - detection • In order for a pedestrian to be detected
is deactivated when driving in darkness of pedestrians he/she must appear full-length and have
and tunnels - even when streetlights are a height of at least 80 cm.
lit. • The camera sensor's ability to see pedes-
• For optimum bicycle detection, the City trians at dusk and dawn is limited - just
Safety™ function must be activated, see like the human eye.
City Safety™ (p. 215). • The camera sensor's capacity to detect
pedestrians is deactivated when driving in
WARNING darkness and tunnels - even when street-
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & lights are lit.
Cyclist Detection is a means of assistance.
The function cannot detect: WARNING
• all cyclists in all situations and does "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
not see partially obscured cyclists, for Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is a
example. Optimal examples of what the system regards as means of assistance. The function cannot
pedestrians with clear body contours. detect all pedestrians in all situations and
• cyclists in clothing that obscures the does not see, for example:
contours of the body or who are Optimal performance of the system requires
approaching from the side. that the system function that detects pedes- • partially obscured pedestrians, people
trians receives as unambiguous information in clothing that hides their body con-
• bicycles that have no rearward-facing tour or pedestrians shorter than
red reflector. as possible about the contours of the body -
80 cm.
this implies the opportunity to identify the
• bicycles loaded with large objects. head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower • pedestrians who are carrying larger
The driver is always responsible that the body combined with a normal human pattern objects.
vehicle is driven properly and with a safety
of movement. The driver is always responsible that the
distance adapted to the speed.
vehicle is driven properly and with a safety
If large parts of the body are not visible to the distance adapted to the speed. 07
Related information function's camera then the system cannot
detect a pedestrian.
• Collision warning system* (p. 222) Related information

07 Driver support
Collision warning system* - operation Settings for the collision warning system are • Search for Warning distance in
made via the centre console's screen and the Collision warning in the menu system
Warning signals On and Off menu system MY CAR, see (p. 112). MY CAR (p. 112) - and there select Long,
Normal or Short.
Light and acoustic signals
When the collision warning system's light and The warning distance determines the sys-
acoustic warnings are activated, the warning tem's sensitivity. Warning distance Long pro-
lamp (no. [1] in previous illustration) is tested vides an earlier warning. First test with Long
each time the engine is started by briefly illu- and if this setting produces too many warn-
minating the warning lamp's separate points ings, which could be perceived as irritating in
of light. certain situations, then change to warning
distance Normal.
After starting the engine, both the light and
acoustic signals can be switched off: Only use warning distance Short in excep-
tional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.
• Search for Collision warning in Driver
support system in the menu system MY
1. Acoustic and visual warning signal in the event CAR (p. 112) - and there select to
NOTE
of a collision risk.18 uncheck the function. When the adaptive cruise control is in use
You can select whether the collision warning the warning lamp and warning sound will
Acoustic signal
system's acoustic and visual warning signals be used by the cruise control even if the
After starting the engine the warning sound collision warning system is switched off.
should be switched on or off. can be activated/deactivated separately:
The collision warning system warns the
When starting the engine, the setting that was • Search for Warning sound in Collision driver in the event of a risk of a collision,
selected when the engine was switched off is warning in the menu system MY CAR but the function cannot shorten driver
obtained automatically. (p. 112) - and there select On or Off. reaction time.
Following which, the collision warning system In order for the collision warning system to
NOTE is only indicated with a light signal. be effective, always drive with Distance
07 Warning (p. 212) set at time interval 4–5.
The Brake Support and Auto Brake func-
tions are always enabled - they cannot be Set warning distance
deactivated. The warning distance regulates the distance
at which the visual and acoustic warnings are
deployed.
18 The illustration is schematic - car model and details may differ.

07 Driver support
NOTE Maintenance Collision warning system* - limitations

The function has certain limitations - for
Even if the warning distance has been set
to Long warnings could be perceived as example, it is not active until approx. 4 km/h.
being late in certain situations, e.g. when
The collision warning system's visual warning
there are large differences in speed or if
vehicles in front brake heavily. signal (see (1) in the illustration (p. 223)) may
be difficult to notice in the event of strong
sunlight, reflections, when sunglasses are
WARNING being worn or if the driver is not looking
No automatic system can guarantee straight ahead. The warning sound should
100 % correct function in all situations. therefore always be activated.
Therefore, never test Collision Warning On slippery road surfaces the braking dis-
with Auto Brake by driving at people or tance is extended, which may reduce the
vehicles - this may cause severe damage
Camera and radar sensor19. capacity to avoid a collision. In such situa-
and injury and risk lives.
For the sensors to work correctly, they must tions the ABS and ESC (p. 187) systems will
be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be provide best possible braking force with
Checking settings maintained stability.
cleaned regularly with water and car sham-
The current settings can be controlled via the
poo.
centre console's screen and the menu sys- NOTE
tem (p. 112) MY CAR.
NOTE The visual warning signal can be temporar-
ily disengaged in the event of high passen-
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
ger compartment temperature caused by
will reduce their function and may prevent
strong sunlight for example. If this occurs
measurement.
then the warning sound is activated even if
it is deactivated in the menu system.
Related information • Warnings may not appear if the dis-
• Collision warning system* (p. 222) 07
tance to the vehicle in front is small or
if steering wheel and pedal move-
ments are large, e.g. a very active driv-
ing style.
}}

07 Driver support
||
WARNING Collision Warning with Auto Brake is tempo- Collision warning system* - camera
rarily deactivated with reverse gear engaged. sensor limitations
Warnings and brake interventions could be
implemented late or not at all if the traffic Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not acti- "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
situation or external influences mean that vated at low speeds - under 4 km/h, which is Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to
the radar or camera sensor cannot detect why the system does not intervene in situa- assist the driver when there is a risk of collid-
a pedestrian, a vehicle or a cyclist in front tions where the car is approaching a vehicle ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in
correctly. in front very slowly, e.g. when parking. front that are stationary or moving in the same
The sensor system has a limited range for direction.
In situations where the driver demonstrates
pedestrians and cyclists20 - the system The function uses the car's camera sensor,
active, aware driving behaviour, a collision
can provide effective warnings and brake
warning may be postponed slightly in order to which has certain limitations.
interventions for them at vehicle speeds up
to 50 km/h. For stationary or slow-moving keep unnecessary warnings to a minimum.
The car’s camera sensor is also used - as
vehicles, warnings and brake interventions When Auto Brake has prevented a collision well as by Collision Warning with Auto Brake
are effective at vehicle speeds up to
70 km/h.
with a stationary object the car remains sta- - by the functions:
tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving car is braked for a vehicle in front that is mov-
• Automatic main/dipped beam dim-
vehicles could be disengaged due to dark- ming (p. 91)
ing, then speed is reduced to the same speed
ness or poor visibility. • Road sign information (p. 192)
as that maintained by the vehicle in front.
Warnings and brake interventions for • Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 232)
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at On a car with manual gearbox the engine
vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h. stops when Auto Brake has stopped the car, • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 235)
unless the driver manages to depress the
clutch pedal beforehand. NOTE
The collision warning system uses the same
radar sensors as the Adaptive cruise control Related information Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
(p. 197). Read more about radar sensor limi- camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist
and dirt.
tations (p. 207).
07 Do not stick or attach anything to the
If warnings are perceived as being too fre-
windscreen in front of the camera sensor
quent or disturbing then the warning distance as this may reduce effectiveness or cause
can be reduced (p. 226). This would lead to one or more of the systems dependent on
the system warning at a later stage, which the camera to stop working.
reduces the total number of warnings.
20 For cyclists, the warning and full brake intervention may come very late or simultaneously.

07 Driver support
The camera sensors have limitations similar At the same time, this means that - besides Cause Action
to the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in Collision Warning with Auto Brake - the Auto-
darkness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick matic main/dipped beam dimming, Road sign The windscreen Wait. It may take
fog for example. Under such conditions the information, Driver Alert Control and Lane surface in front of several minutes for
functions of camera-dependent systems Departure Warning functions will not have full the camera has the camera to
could be significantly reduced or temporarily functionality either. been cleaned but measure the visibil-
disengaged. the message ity.
The following table presents possible causes
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the car- for a message being shown along with the remains.
riageway, snow or ice on the road surface, appropriate action. Dirt has appeared Visit a workshop to
dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings between the inside have the wind-
could also significantly reduce camera sensor Cause Action of the windscreen screen inside the
function when it is used to scan the carriage- and the camera. camera cover
way and detect pedestrians and other vehi- The windscreen Clean the wind- cleaned - an author-
cles. surface in front of screen surface in ised Volvo work-
the camera is dirty front of the camera shop is recom-
The field of vision of the camera sensor is lim-
or covered with ice from dirt, ice and mended.
ited, which is why pedestrians, cyclists and
or snow. snow.
vehicles cannot be detected in some situa-
tions, or they are detected later than anticipa- Thick fog, heavy No action. At times Related information
ted. rain or snow means the camera does • Collision warning system* (p. 222)
During very high temperatures the camera is that the camera not work during
temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes does not work suffi- heavy rain or snow-
after the engine is started in order to protect ciently well. fall.
camera functionality.
Fault tracing and action

If the display shows the message 07
Windscreen sensors blocked See manual
then this means that the camera sensor is
blocked and cannot detect pedestrians,
cyclists, vehicles or road markings in front of
the car.

07 Driver support
Collision warning system* - symbols assist the driver when there is a risk of collid-
and messages ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and front that are stationary or moving in the same
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to direction.

Collision warning sys- Collision warning system switched off.
tem OFF Shown when the engine is started.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Collision warning sys- The collision warning system cannot be activated.

tem Unavailable Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Auto Braking was acti- Auto Brake has been active.

vated The message clears after one press of the OK button.
Windscreen sensors The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

blocked See manual Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
• Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 228).
07

07 Driver support

Radar blocked See Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.
manual The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or
if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Collision warning Serv- Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.
ice required
Related information
• Collision warning system* - function
(p. 223)
pedestrians (p. 225)
cyclists (p. 224)
• Collision warning system* - operation
(p. 226)
• Collision warning system* - limitations
(p. 227)
07
• Collision warning system* - camera sen-
sor limitations (p. 228)

07 Driver support
Driver Alert System* Driver Alert Control (DAC)* driver fatigue, irrespective of whether or not
The Driver Alert System is intended to assist The DAC function is intended to attract the DAC issues a warning.
drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or driver's attention when he/she starts to drive
who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are less consistently, e.g. if he/she becomes dis- NOTE
driving on. tracted or starts to fall asleep. The function must not be used to extend a
period of driving. Always plan breaks at
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly
The Driver Alert System consists of different regular intervals, and make sure you are
deteriorating driving ability and it is primarily well rested.
functions which can either be switched on at
intended for major roads. The function is not
the same time or individually:
intended for city traffic.
• Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 233). Limitation
In some cases the system may issue a warn-
• Lane Departure Warning - LDW (p. 235).
ing despite driving ability not deteriorating, for
A switched-on function is set in standby example:
mode and is not activated automatically until
speed exceeds 65 km/h.
• in strong side winds
• on rutted road surfaces.
The function is deactivated again when speed
decreases to below 60 km/h. NOTE
Both functions use a camera which is The camera sensor has certain limitations
dependent on the lane having side markings (p. 228).
painted on each side.
Related information
WARNING A camera detects the side markings painted • Driver Alert System* (p. 232)
Driver Alert System does not work in all on the carriageway and compares the section
situations but is designed merely as a sup- of the road with the driver's steering wheel
• Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation
(p. 233)
07 plementary aid. movements. The driver is alerted if the vehicle
The driver always bears ultimate responsi- does not follow the carriageway evenly. • Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and
messages (p. 234)
bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven In some cases driving ability is not affected
safely.
despite driver fatigue. In which case there
may not be any warning issued for the driver.
Related information For this reason it is always important to stop
• Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 232) and take a break in the event of any signs of
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 235)

07 Driver support
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation WARNING

Settings are made from the centre console
An alarm should be taken very seriously,
display screen and its menu system. as a sleepy driver is often not aware of
his/her own condition.
On/Off In the event of an alarm or a feeling of
The Driver Alert function can be set in tiredness; stop the car in a safe manner as
standby mode via the menu system MY CAR soon as possible and rest.
(p. 112):
Studies have shown that it is equally as
• Checked box - function activated. dangerous to drive while tired as it is under
the influence of alcohol.
• Unchecked box - the function is deacti-
vated.
Function Related information
Driver Alert is activated when speed exceeds • Driver Alert System* (p. 232)
65 km/h and remains active as long as the • Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 232)
speed is over 60 km/h.
If the vehicle is being driven errati-
cally, the driver is notified by an
acoustic signal plus the text mes-
sage Driver Alert Time for a break
- the linked symbol is illuminated in the com-
bined instrument panel at the same time. The
warning is repeated after a time if driving abil-
ity does not improve.
The warning symbol can go off:
07
• Press the left stalk switch OK button.

07 Driver support
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols or in the centre console's display screen in
and messages different situations.
DAC (p. 232) can show symbols and text Here are some examples:
messages on the combined instrument panel

Driver Alert Time for a The vehicle has been driven inconsistently - the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.
break
Windscreen sensors The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

blocked See manual Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
Driver Alert system Serv- The system is disengaged.

ice required
Related information
• Driver Alert System* (p. 232)
07 • Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 232)
• Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation
(p. 233)

07 Driver support
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* NOTE Lane Departure Warning (LDW) -

Lane Departure Warning is one of the func- function
The driver is only warned once each time
tions in the Driver Alert System - sometimes the wheels cross a line. So there is no Certain settings can be made for the Lane
also referred to as LDW (Lane Departure acoustic alarm when there is a line Departure Warning function.
Warning). between the car's wheels.
Off & On
The function is intended for use on motor-
ways and similar major roads in order to WARNING
reduce the risk of the vehicle accidentally
leaving its own lane in certain situations. LDW is merely a driver's aid and does not
engage in all driving situations or traffic,
Principle for LDW weather or road conditions.
The driver always bears ultimate responsi-
bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely and that applicable laws and road
traffic regulations are followed.
Related information
• Driver Alert System* (p. 232)
LDW is engaged or disengaged using a but-
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita- ton on the centre console. An indicator lamp
tions (p. 237) in the button illuminates when the function is
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function switched on.
(p. 235)
This function is complemented in the com-
(The figure is schematic - not model specific.)
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - opera- bined instrument panel with intuitive graphics
LDW consists of a camera that detects the tion (p. 236) in different situations.
side lines painted on the road/lane. • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols 07
and messages (p. 238) Personal preferences
If the vehicle crosses the left or right-hand
Settings are made from the centre console's
side line of the carriageway without due
screen via the menu system in MY CAR. For
cause then the driver is alerted by an acoustic
a description of the menu system, see MY
signal.
CAR (p. 112).
Select from the options:
}}

07 Driver support
||
• On at startup - The function enters Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - Related information
standby mode every time the engine is operation • Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 235)
started. Otherwise the same value as
when the engine was switched off is
LDW is complemented in the combined • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita-
instrument panel with intuitive graphics in dif- tions (p. 237)
obtained.
ferent situations. Here are some examples: • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function
• Increased sensitivity - The sensitivity (p. 235)
increases, an alarm is triggered earlier
and fewer limitations apply. • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols
and messages (p. 238)
Related information
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita-
tions (p. 237)
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - opera-
tion (p. 236)
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols
The LDW function's side lines (marked in red in

the figure).
• The LDW symbol has WHITE side lines -
the function is active and detects/"sees"
one side line, or both.
• The LDW symbol has GREY side lines -
the function is active but detects neither
left nor right side line.
07
or
• The LDW symbol has GREY side lines -
the function is in standby mode because
the speed is below 65 km/h.
• The LDW symbol has no side lines - the
function is deactivated.

07 Driver support
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) -

limitations
The Lane Keeping Aid camera sensor is
restricted in a similar way to the human eye.
For more information, read about camera

sensor limitations (p. 228).
NOTE
There are some situations where LDW
does not give any warning, such as:
• Direction indicators are switched on
• The driver has his/her foot on the
brake pedal21
• In the event of rapid depression of the
accelerator pedal21
• In the event of rapid steering wheel
movements21
• If turning is so sharp that the car rolls.
Related information
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function
(p. 235)
07
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - opera-
tion (p. 236)
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols
21 When "Increased sensitivity" is selected a warning is still given, see Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function (p. 235).

07 Driver support
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - instrument panel in combination with an Message examples:
symbols and messages explanatory message - follow the recommen-
In situations where there is no LDW function a dation given if appropriate.
symbol may be shown in the combined

Lane Departure Warning ON/ The function is switched on/off.
Lane Departure Warning OFF Shown at switch-on/off.
The text disappears after approx. 5 seconds.
Windscreen sensors blocked The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

See manual Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
Driver Alert system Service The system is disengaged.

required
Related information
07

07 Driver support
Park Assist* WARNING Park assist syst* - function

Parking assistance is used as an aid to park- The parking assistance system is automati-
ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on
• Parking assistance does not relinquish
cally activated when the engine is started -
the driver's own responsibility during
the centre console's display screen indicate parking.
the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If
the distance to the detected obstacle. parking assistance is switched off with the
• The sensors have blind spots where button, the lamp goes out.
Parking assistance sound level can be obstacles cannot be detected.
adjusted during the ongoing acoustic signal • Be aware of e.g. people or animals
using the centre console's VOL knob. The near the car.
sound level can also be adjusted in the audio
settings menu, which is accessed by pressing
SOUND or in the car's menu system (p. 112) Related information
MY CAR22. • Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 242)
Parking assistance is available in two vari- • Park assist syst* - function (p. 239)
ants:
• Park assist syst* - forward (p. 241)
• Rear only
• Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 242)
• Both front and rear.
• Park assist syst* - backward (p. 240)
NOTE • Park assist camera* (p. 243) On/Off for parking assistance and CTA*.
When a towbar is configured with the car's If the car is equipped with CTA (p. 249) the
electrical system, the protrusion of the indicator lamps flash for BLIS (p. 246) once,
towbar is included when the function then parking assistance is activated using the
measures the parking space. button.
07
22 Depending on the audio and media system.

}}

07 Driver support
||
IMPORTANT Park assist syst* - backward
Parking assistance is used as an aid to park-
Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or
low barriers may be in the "signal shadow" ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on
and are then temporarily not detected by the centre console's display screen indicate
the sensors - the pulsating tone may then the distance to the detected obstacle.
unexpectedly stop instead of changing
over to the expected constant tone.
The sensors cannot detect high objects,
such as projecting loading docks.
• In such situations, pay extra attention
and manoeuvre/reposition the car par-
ticularly slowly or stop the current
Display screen view - showing an obstacle left
front and right rear.
parking manoeuvre - there may be a
high risk of damage to vehicles or
The centre console's display screen shows other objects since the sensors are
an overview of the relationship between the temporarily unable to function opti-
car and detected obstacle. mally.
Marked sectors show which of the four sen-
sor(s) detected an obstacle. The closer to the Related information The distance covered to the rear of the car is
car symbol a selected sector box is, the • Park Assist* (p. 239) about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for
shorter the distance between the car and a obstacles behind comes from one of the rear
• Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
loudspeakers.
detected obstacle. (p. 242)
The frequency of the signal increases the • Park assist syst* - forward (p. 241) Rear parking assistance is activated when
shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of reverse gear is engaged.
or behind the car. Other sound from the audio When reversing with e.g. a trailer on the tow-
07 system is muted automatically. • Park assist syst* - backward (p. 240)
bar, rear parking assistance is switched off
When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is
• Park assist camera* (p. 243) automatically - otherwise the sensors would
constant and the active sensor's field nearest react to the trailer.
the car is filled in. If the detected obstacle is
within the distance for the constant tone both
behind and in front of the car, then the tone
sounds alternately from the loudspeakers.

07 Driver support
NOTE Park assist syst* - forward NOTE

Parking assistance is used as an aid to park-
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike Front parking assistance is deactivated
carrier on the towbar - without Volvo genu- ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on when the parking brake is applied or P
ine trailer wiring - parking assistance may the centre console's display screen indicate mode is selected in a car with an auto-
need to be switched off manually in order the distance to the detected obstacle. matic gearbox.
that the sensors do not react to them.
The parking assistance system is automati-
cally activated when the engine is started - IMPORTANT
Related information the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If
• Park Assist* (p. 239) parking assistance is switched off with the When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember
button, the lamp goes out. that these must not obscure the sensors -
• Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors the auxiliary lamps may then be perceived
(p. 242) as an obstacle.
• Park assist syst* - function (p. 239)
• Park assist syst* - forward (p. 241) Related information
• Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 242) • Park Assist* (p. 239)
• Park assist camera* (p. 243) • Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 242)
• Park assist camera* (p. 243)
The distance covered in front of the car is

about 0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for
obstacles in front comes from one of the front 07
loudspeakers.
Front park assist is active up to
approx. 10 km/h. The lamp in the button is
illuminated in order to indicate that the sys-
tem is activated. When the speed is below
10 km/h the system is reactivated.

07 Driver support
Park assist syst* - fault indication Park assist syst* - cleaning the
Parking assistance is used as an aid to park- sensors
ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on Parking assistance is used as an aid to park-
the centre console's display screen indicate ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on
the distance to the detected obstacle. the centre console's display screen indicate
the distance to the detected obstacle.
If the combined instrument panel's
information symbol illuminates with The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
constant glow and the text message ensure that they work properly. Clean them
Park Assist System Service required is with water and car shampoo.
shown then parking assistance is disen-
gaged.
Sensor location, rear.
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assis- NOTE
tance system may produce incorrect warn- Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
ing signals that are caused by external may cause incorrect warning signals.
sound sources that emit the same ultra-
sonic frequencies that the system works
with. Related information
Examples of such sources include horns, • Park Assist* (p. 239)
G031402
wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes • Park assist syst* - function (p. 239)
and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
Sensor location, front. • Park assist syst* - forward (p. 241)
Related information
• Park Assist* (p. 239) • Park assist syst* - backward (p. 240)
07
• Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors • Park assist camera* (p. 243)
(p. 242)
• Park assist syst* - forward (p. 241)

07 Driver support
Park assist camera* Function and operation where the car's rear wheels will roll with the
Parking camera is an auxiliary system, which current steering wheel angle - this facilitates
is activated when the reverse gear is selected. parallel parking, reversing into tight spaces
and for hitching a trailer. The car's approxi-
The camera image is shown on the centre mate external dimensions are illustrated by
console's screen. means of dashed lines. The park assist lines
can be deactivated - see section Settings
NOTE (p. 245).
When a towbar is configured with the car's If the car is also equipped with Parking assis-
electrical system, the protrusion of the tance sensors (p. 239)* then their information
towbar is included when the function is shown graphically as coloured areas in
measures the parking space. order to illustrate distances to detected
obstacles, see heading "Cars with reversing
Camera location next to the opening handle. sensors" later in the text.
WARNING
The camera shows what is behind the car The camera is active approx. 5 seconds after
• The parking camera serves as an aid. and if something appears from the sides.
It does not relieve the driver of respon- reverse gear has been disengaged or until the
sibility when reversing. The camera shows a wide area behind the car's speed exceeds 10 km/h forward or
car and part of the bumper and any towbar. 35 km/h backward.
• The camera has blind spots, where
obstacles cannot be detected. Objects on the screen may appear to tilt Light conditions
• Be aware of people and animals in the slightly - this is normal. The camera image is adjusted automatically
vicinity of the car. according to prevailing light conditions.
NOTE Because of this, the image may vary slightly
in brightness and quality. Poor light condi-
Objects on the display screen may be
closer to the car than they appear to be on tions can result in a slightly reduced image
the screen. quality.
07
If another view is active then the parking NOTE

camera system takes over automatically and Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow
its camera image is displayed on the screen. and ice to ensure optimum function. This
is particularly important in poor light.
When reverse gear is selected, two unbroken
lines are shown graphically which illustrate
}}

07 Driver support
||
Park assist lines IMPORTANT Cars with reversing sensors*
Bear in mind that the screen only shows
the area behind the car - pay attention to
the sides and front of the car when
manoeuvring during reversing.
Boundary lines
Examples of how the park assist lines can be dis- Four coloured areas (one per sensor) show dis-
played for the driver. tance.
The lines on the screen are projected as if If the car is also equipped with Parking assis-
they were at ground level behind the car and tance (p. 239) the distance is shown with col-
are directly related to steering wheel move- oured fields for each sensor that registers an
ment, which shows the driver the path the car obstacle.
will then take - also when the car is turning.
The system's different lines. The colour of the areas changes with
decreasing distance to the obstacle - from
NOTE Boundary line, free reversing zone
light yellow to yellow, via orange to red.
• When reversing with a trailer which is "Wheel tracks"
not connected electrically to the car, Colour / paint Distance (metres)
the lines on the display show the route The dashed line (1) frames in a zone up to
the car will take - not the trailer. about 1.5 m back from the bumper. It is also Light yellow 0,7–1,5
07
the limit of the car's most protruding parts,
• The screen shows no lines when a
such as door mirrors and corners - also when Yellow 0,5–0,7
trailer is connected electrically to the
the car is turning.
car's electrical system. Orange 0,3–0,5
• The parking camera is deactivated The wide "wheel tracks" (2) between the side
lines indicate where the wheels will roll and Red 0–0.3
automatically when towing a trailer if a
Volvo genuine trailer cable is used. can extend about 3.2 m back from the
bumper if no obstacle is in the way.

07 Driver support
Related information Park assist camera - settings 3. Highlight the option by pressing OK/
• Park assist camera - settings (p. 245) MENU once and go back out with EXIT.
• Park assist camera - limitations (p. 246) Activate switched-off camera
If the camera function is switched off when Towbar
• Park Assist* (p. 239) reverse gear is selected, it is activated in the The camera can be used to advantage when
following way: hitching a trailer. A park assist line for the
towbar's intended "trajectory" toward the
trailer can be shown on the screen - exactly
as for the "wheel tracks".
A choice can be made between showing the
"wheel tracks" or the towbar's trajectory
- both options cannot be shown simultane-
ously.
1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view is
shown.
2. Turn to reach the Tow bar trajectory
guide line option with TUNE.
3. Highlight the option by pressing OK/
• Press CAM - the screen shows the cur- MENU once and go back out with EXIT.
rent camera view. Zoom
If precise manoeuvring is required then the
Change setting
camera view can be zoomed in:
The default setting is that the camera is acti-
vated when reverse gear is selected. • Press CAM or turn TUNE - repeated
press/turn changes back to the normal
The settings for the parking camera can be
view.
changed when the screen shows a camera 07
view: If more options are available, they are in a
loop - press/turn until the desired camera
1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view is view is shown.
shown - the screenchanges to a menu
with various options.
2. Turn to reach the desired option with
TUNE.
}}

07 Driver support
||
Automatic zoom Park assist camera - limitations BLIS*
In cars with Parking assistance (p. 239) and BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) is a
towbar, Automatic zoom is also available as NOTE function designed for providing support for
an option in the camera menu. With this the driver when driving in dense traffic on
A bike carrier or other accessory mounted
option selected, the camera zooms into the on the rear of the car could obscure the roads with several lanes in the same direction.
towbar automatically when the car camera's view.
approaches an object/trailer. BLIS is a driver's aid intended to provide a
warning about:
See the earlier heading "Change setting" for To bear in mind
how a menu option is activated. Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it
• vehicles in the car's blind spot
only looks like a relatively small part of the • rapidly approaching vehicles in the left
Related information and right-hand lanes closest to the car.
image is obscured, it could be a relatively
large sector that is hidden from view. Obsta- The BLIS function CTA (p. 249) (Cross Traffic
• Park Assist* (p. 239) cles could thereby go undetected until they Alert) is a driver's aid intended to provide a
are very close to the car. warning about:
• Keep the camera lens free from dirt, ice • crossing traffic when the car is reversed.
and snow.
• Clean the camera lens regularly with luke- WARNING
warm water and car shampoo - take care
BLIS is a supplementary aid and does not
not to scratch the lens. work in all situations.
Related information BLIS is no substitute for a safe driving
• Park assist camera* (p. 243) style and the use of rearview and door mir-
rors.
• Park assist camera - settings (p. 245)
BLIS can never replace the driver's
• Park Assist* (p. 239) responsibility and attention - it is always
07 the driver's responsibility to change lanes
in a safe manner.

07 Driver support
Overview BLIS* - operation

BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) is a
function designed for providing support for
the driver when driving in dense traffic on
roads with several lanes in the same direction.
Activate/deactivate BLIS
BLIS is activated when the engine is started.
This is confirmed by the indicator lamps in
the door panels flashing once.
Keep this surface clean - also on the left-hand

BLIS lamp location23. side.
Indicator lamp • To ensure optimal functionality the areas

in front of the sensors must be kept
BLIS symbol clean.
Related information
NOTE • BLIS* - operation (p. 247)
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car • BLIS - symbols and messages (p. 251)
where the system has detected the vehi-
cle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at
• CTA* (p. 249)
the same time then both lamps illuminate. Button for activating/deactivating.
The BLIS function can be deactivated/acti-
Maintenance vated by pressing the BLIS button on the
The sensors for the BLIS functions are centre console. 07
located inside the rear wing/bumper on each Some combinations of the selected equip-
corner of the car. ment leave no vacant space for a button in
the centre console - in which case the func-
tion is handled by the car's menu system MY
CAR (p. 112).
}}

07 Driver support
||
When BLIS is deactivated/activated the lamp • the driver's vehicle is overtaken by other IMPORTANT
in the button extinguishes/illuminates and the vehicles
combined instrument panel confirms the Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions'
• the driver's vehicle is rapidly caught up components or repainting the bumpers
change with a text message. The door panel by another vehicle. must only be performed by a workshop -
indicator lamps flash once upon activation. an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a
To extinguish the message: quickly approaching vehicle in zone 2, the mended.
door panel BLIS lamp illuminates with a con-
• Press the left stalk switch OK button.
stant glow. If the driver activates the direction Related information
or indicator on the same side as the warning in • BLIS* (p. 246)
• Wait approx. 5 seconds - the message this situation then the BLIS lamp will change
• BLIS - symbols and messages (p. 251)
extinguishes. from a constant glow to flashing with a more
intense light.
When BLIS operates
WARNING
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is being
reversed.
Limitations
• Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can
reduce functionality and make it impossi-
ble to provide warnings. BLIS cannot
detect hazards if it is covered.
• Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in
Principle for BLIS: 1. Zone in blind spot. 2. Zone the area of the sensors.
07 for rapidly approaching vehicle.
• BLIS is deactivated when a trailer is con-
The BLIS function is active at speeds above nected to the car's electrical system.
approx. 10 km/h.
The system is designed to react when:

07 Driver support
CTA* WARNING CTA is only active during reversing and is

The BLIS function CTA (Cross Traffic Alert) is activated automatically when the gearbox's
CTA is a supplementary aid and does not reverse position is selected.
a driver aid intended to warn about crossing work in all situations.
traffic when the car is reversing. CTA is a sup- • If CTA detects something approaching
plement to BLIS (p. 246). CTA is no substitute for a safe driving style
from the side, an acoustic warning signal
and the use of rearview and door mirrors.
sounds. The signal comes from either the
Activate/deactivate CTA CTA can never replace the driver's respon- left or the right-hand speaker, depending
CTA is activated when the engine is started. sibility and attention - it is always the driv- on the direction from which the object is
This is confirmed by the indicator lamps for er's responsibility to reverse in a safe man- approaching.
BLIS in the door panels flashing once. ner.
• CTA also warns by illuminating the BLIS
lamps.
When CTA operates
• An additional warning is provided in the
form of an illuminated icon in the display
screen's PAS graphics (p. 239).
Limitations
CTA does not perform optimally in all situa-
tions, but has a certain limitation - for exam-
ple, the CTA sensors cannot "see" through
other parked vehicles or obstructing objects.
Here are some examples of when CTA's "field
of vision" may be limited from the beginning
On/Off for parking assistance and CTA sensors. and approaching vehicles cannot therefore be
The CTA function can be deactivated/acti- detected until they are very close:
Principle for CTA.
vated separately with the Parking assistance
(p. 239) On/Off button. The BLIS lamps flash CTA supplements the BLIS function by being
07
once on reactivation. able to see crossing traffic from the side dur-
ing reversing, such as when reversing out of a
However, the BLIS function remains activated parking space.
after the CTA has been deactivated.
CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles.
In favourable conditions, it may also be able
to detect smaller objects, such as cyclists
and pedestrians.
}}

07 Driver support
||
vehicle/object that is blocking, at which the
blind sector rapidly decreases.
Examples of further limitations:
• Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can
reduce functionality and make it impossi-
ble to provide warnings. CTA cannot
detect hazards if it is covered.
• CTA is deactivated when a trailer is con-
nected to the car’s electrical system.
IMPORTANT
The car is parked deep inside a parking slot. Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' Keep this surface clean - also on the left-hand
side.
Blind CTA sector. components or repainting the bumpers
must only be performed by a workshop - • To ensure optimal functionality the areas
Sector where CTA can detect/"see". an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- in front of the sensors must be kept
mended. clean.
• Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in
Maintenance the area of the sensors.
The sensors for the BLIS and CTA functions
are located inside the rear wing/bumper on Related information
each corner of the car. • BLIS* (p. 246)
• BLIS - symbols and messages (p. 251)
07
In an angled parking slot CTA can be completely

"blind" on one side.
However, when the driver is slowly reversing
the car, the angle is changed in relation to the

07 Driver support
BLIS - symbols and messages Adjustable steering force* Type approval - radar system
In situations where the BLIS (Blind Spot Speed related power steering causes the Type approval for the radar system can be
Information System) (p. 246) and CTA (Cross steering wheel force to increase with the read in the table.
Traffic Alert) (p. 249) functions fail or are inter- speed of the car in order to give the driver
rupted, the combined instrument panel may enhanced sensitivity.
show a symbol, supplemented by an explana-
tory message. Follow any recommendation On motorways the steering feels firmer.
given. Steering is light and requires no extra effort
when parking and at low speed.
Message examples:
The driver can choose between three differ-
ent levels of steering force for road respon-
Message Specification siveness or steering sensitivity in the menu
system MY CAR, MY CAR (p. 112):
CTA OFF CTA is manually switched
off - BLIS is active. • Once there, search for Steering force
level and select Low, Medium or High.
BLIS and BLIS and CTA are tempo-
This setting is not accessible when the car is
CTA OFF rarily non-operational
moving.
Trailer because a trailer is con-
attached nected to the car's electri-
cal system. NOTE
In certain situations the power steering
BLIS and BLIS and CTA are non- may become too hot and then needs to be
CTA Serv- operational. temporarily cooled - during this time the
ice required • Visit a workshop if the power steering operates with reduced
power and turning the steering wheel may
message remains - an
then be perceived to be slightly heavier.
authorised Volvo work-
shop is recommended. In parallel with the temporarily reduced 07
steering assistance the combined instru-
ment panel shows a message.
A text message can be acknowledged by
briefly pressing the OK button on the direc-
tion indicator stalk. Related information
• MY CAR (p. 112)
Related information
• BLIS* (p. 246)
}}

07 Driver support
||
Coun-
try/
Area
Singa-
pore
IDA: Infocomm Development

Authority of Singapore.
Brazil
Europe
Delphi Electronics &
Safety hereby declares that
L2C0038TR and L2C0049TR
are in compliance with the
essential requirements and
other relevant provisions of
Directive 1999/5/EC. This dec-
laration of conformity may, if
07 necessary, be consulted with
Delphi Electronics & Safety /
One Corporate Center /
Kokomo, Indiana 46904-9005
USA.
Related information
• Radar sensor (p. 206)
252
STARTING AND DRIVING
Alcohol lock* Alcohol lock* - functions and Indicator Battery status

The function of the alcohol lock is to prevent operation lamp (4)
the car from being driven by individuals under
the influence of alcohol. Before the engine Functions Green flash- Charging in progress
can be started the driver must take a breath ing
test that verifies that he/she is not under the
Green Fully charged
influence of alcohol. Alcohol lock calibration
takes place in accordance with each market's Yellow Semi-charged
limit value in force for driving legally.
Red Discharged - fit the charger
WARNING in the holder or connect the
power supply cable from
The alcohol lock is an aid and does not
exempt the driver from responsibility. It is the glovebox.
always the responsibility of the driver to be
sober and to drive the car safely.
NOTE
Nozzle for breath test. Store the alcohol lock in its holder. This
Related information will keep the built-in battery fully charged
• Alcohol lock* - functions and operation
Switch. and the alcohol lock is activated automati-
(p. 254) cally when the car is opened.
• Alcohol lock* - storage (p. 255) Transmission button.
• Alcohol lock* - before starting the engine Lamp for battery status. Related information
(p. 255) • Alcohol lock* (p. 254)
• Alcohol lock* - to bear in mind (p. 257) Lamp for result of breath test. • Alcohol lock* - storage (p. 255)
• Alcohol lock* - symbols and text mes- Lamp indicates ready for breath test. • Alcohol lock* - before starting the engine
sages (p. 258) (p. 255)
Operation - battery • Alcohol lock* - to bear in mind (p. 257)
Alcohol lock indicator lamp (4) shows battery • Alcohol lock* - symbols and text mes-
status: sages (p. 258)
08

Alcohol lock* - storage • Alcohol lock* - symbols and text mes- Alcohol lock* - before starting the
Store the alcohol lock in its holder. Release sages (p. 258) engine
the handheld unit by depressing it slightly in The alcohol lock is activated automatically
its holder and releasing it - it then springs out and is then ready for use when the car is
and can be removed from the holder. opened.
Handheld unit storage and charging station. Nozzle for breath test.
• Replace the handheld unit in the holder
by pushing it in until it engages. Switch.
• Store the handheld unit in the holder - Transmission button.
this provides it with the best protection
and keeps its batteries fully charged. Lamp for battery status.
Related information Lamp for result of breath test.

• Alcohol lock* (p. 254)
Lamp indicates ready for breath test.
(p. 254) 1. When the indicator lamp (6) is green the
• Alcohol lock* - before starting the engine alcohol lock is ready for use.
(p. 255) 08
2. Withdraw the alcohol lock from its holder.
• Alcohol lock* - to bear in mind (p. 257) If the alcohol lock is outside the car when
}}

||
it is unlocked then it must first be acti- Result after breath test • Alcohol lock* - storage (p. 255)
vated with the switch (2). • Alcohol lock* - to bear in mind (p. 257)
Indicator lamp Specification
3. Fold up the nozzle (1), take a deep breath (5) + Display • Alcohol lock* - symbols and text mes-
and blow with an even pressure until a text sages (p. 258)
"click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds.
The result will be one of the alternatives in Green lamp + Start the engine - no
the following table Result after breath Alcoguard alcohol content meas-
test. Approved test ured.
4. If no message is shown then the trans-
mission to the car may have failed - in Yellow lamp + Engine starting possi-
which case, press the button (3) to trans- Alcoguard ble - measured alcohol
mit the result to the car manually. Approved test content is above
0.1 promille but below
5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the alcohol
lock in its holder. the limit value in
forceA.
6. Start the engine following an approved
breath test within 5 minutes - otherwise it Red lamp + Dis- Engine starting not
must be repeated. approved test possible - measured
Wait 1 minute alcohol content is
to try again above the limit value in
forceA.
A Limit values vary from country to country. Find out what
applies in your country. See also Alcohol lock* (p. 254).
NOTE
After a completed period of driving, the
engine can be restarted within 30 minutes
without a new breath test.
Related information
08 • Alcohol lock* (p. 254)
(p. 254)

Alcohol lock* - to bear in mind The message can be cleared by pressing the Emergency situation
In order to obtain correct function and as send button (3) once. Otherwise it goes out In the event of an emergency situation or the
accurate a measurement result as possible: on its own after approx. 2 minutes but then alcohol lock is out of order, it is possible to
reappears each time the engine is started - bypass the alcohol lock in order to drive the
• Avoid eating or drinking only recalibration at a workshop1 can clear car.
approx. 5 minutes before the breath test. the message permanently.
• Avoid excess windscreen washing - the NOTE
alcohol in the washer fluid may result in Cold or hot weather
an incorrect measurement result. The colder the weather the longer it takes All Bypass activation is logged and saved
before the alcohol lock is ready for use: in memory, see Recording data (p. 18).
Change of driver
Temperature (ºC) Maximum heat- After the Bypass function has been activated
In order to ensure that a new breath test is
ing time (sec- the combined instrument panel shows
carried out in the event of a change of driver -
onds) Alcoguard Bypass enabled the whole time
depress the switch (2) and the send button (3)
while driving and can only be reset by a work-
simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds. At
+10 to +85 10 shop1.
which point the car returns to start inhibition
mode and a new approved breath test is -5 to +10 60 The Bypass function can be tested without
required before starting the engine. the error message being logged - in which
-40 to -5 180 case, carry out all the steps without starting
Calibration and service the car. The error message is cleared when
The alcohol lock must be checked and cali- At temperatures below -20 ºC or above the car is locked.
brated at a workshop1 every 12 months. +60 ºC the alcohol lock requires additional When the alcohol lock is installed, either the
30 days before recalibration is necessary the power supply. The combined instrument Bypass or Emergency function is selected as
combined instrument panel shows the mes- panel shows Alcoguard Please insert the bypassing option. This setting can be
sage Alcoguard Calibration required See power cable. In which case, connect the changed afterwards at a workshop1.
manual. If calibration is not carried out within power supply cable from the glovebox and
these 30 days then normal engine starting will wait until indicator lamp (6) is green. Activating the Bypass function
be blocked - only starting with the Bypass In extremely cold weather the heating time • Depress and hold the left-hand stalk
function will then be possible, see the follow- can be reduced by taking the alcohol lock switch OK button and the button for haz-
ing heading "Emergency situation". indoors. ard warning flashers simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds - the combined instru- 08
ment panel first shows Bypass activated
1 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

}}

||
Please wait for 1 minute and then Alcohol lock* - symbols and text Display text Meaning/Action
Alcoguard Bypass enabled - after messages
which the engine can be started. In addition to the previously described mes- Alcoguard Blowing too hard - blow
This function can be activated several times. sages related to how the alcohol lock works Please blow more gently.
The error message shown during driving can before starting the engine (p. 255) the com- softer
only be cleared at a workshop1. bined instrument panel's display can also
Alcoguard Blowing too weak -
show the following:
Activating the Emergency function Please blow blow harder.
• Depress and hold the left-hand stalk harder
Display text Meaning/Action
switch OK button and the button for haz-
Alcoguard Heating not finished -
ard warning flashers simultaneously for Alcoguard The engine has been
preheating wait for text Alcoguard
approx. 5 seconds - the combined instru- Restart possi- switched off for less
ment panel shows Alcoguard Bypass than 30 minutes - Please wait Please blow for 5 sec-
ble
enabled and the engine can be started. engine starting possible onds.
This function can be used once, after which a without new test. A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
reset must be made at a workshop1. Alcoguard Contact a workshopA. Related information
Related information Service • Alcohol lock* (p. 254)
• required
Alcohol lock* - functions and operation • Alcohol lock* - functions and operation
(p. 254) (p. 254)
Alcoguard No Transmission failed -
• Alcohol lock* - storage (p. 255) signal send manually with but- • Alcohol lock* - storage (p. 255)
• Alcohol lock* - before starting the engine received ton (3) or take a new • Alcohol lock* - before starting the engine
(p. 255) breath test. (p. 255)
• Alcohol lock* (p. 254) Alcoguard Test failed - take a new • Alcohol lock* - to bear in mind (p. 257)
• Alcohol lock* - symbols and text mes- Please try breath test.
sages (p. 258) again
Alcoguard Blowing too short - blow

Please blow for longer.
longer
08

Starting the engine 1. Insert the remote control key in the igni- WARNING
The engine is started and switched off using tion switch and press it in to its end posi-
tion. Note that if the car is equipped with Always remove the remote control key
the remote control key and the START/STOP from the ignition switch when leaving the
ENGINE button. alcohol lock* then a breath test must first
car, and make sure that the key position is
be approved before the engine can be 0 - in particular if there are children in the
started. For more information on the car. For information on how this works -
Alcohol lock, see Alcohol lock* (p. 254). see Key positions (p. 79).
2. Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed2.
(For cars with automatic gearbox - NOTE
Depress the brake pedal.)
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button than normal for certain engine types during
and then release it. cold starting. This is done in order that the
emissions system can reach normal oper-
When the engine is started the starter motor ating temperature as quickly as possible,
works until the engine is started or until its which minimises exhaust emissions and
overheating protection triggers. protects the environment.
Ignition switch with remote control key extrac-
ted/inserted. and START/STOP ENGINE button. IMPORTANT Keyless drive*
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts - Follow steps 2-3 for keyless (p. 171) starting
IMPORTANT wait for 3 minutes before making a further of the engine.
attempt. Starting capacity increases if the
Do not press in the remote control key battery is allowed to recover.
incorrectly turned - hold the end with the NOTE
detachable key blade, see Detachable key A prerequisite for the engine to start is that
blade - detaching/attaching (p. 168). WARNING one of the car's remote control keys with
the Keyless drive function is in the passen-
Never remove the remote control key from
ger compartment or cargo area.
the ignition switch after starting the engine
or when the car is being towed.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
08
the car while driving or during towing.
2 If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the engine.
}}

||
Related information Switching off the engine Steering lock
• Switching off the engine (p. 260) The engine is switched off using the START/ The steering lock makes steering difficult if
STOP ENGINE button. the car is e.g. taken unlawfully.
To stop the engine: Function

• Press START/STOP ENGINE - the • The steering lock unlocks when the
engine stops. remote control key is in the ignition
switch3 and the START/STOP ENGINE
If the gear selector is not in P position or if button is depressed.
the car is moving:
• The steering lock locks when the driver's
• Press twice on START/STOP ENGINE or door is opened after the engine has been
hold the button depressed until the switched off.
engine stops.
A mechanical noise can be perceived when
Related information the steering lock unlocks or locks.
• Key positions (p. 79)
Related information
• Starting the engine (p. 259)
• Key positions (p. 79)
• Steering wheel (p. 85)
08
3 Cars with Keyless drive only need to have a remote control key inside the passenger compartment.
260
Remote start (ERS)* NOTE Remote start (ERS) - operation

Remote start (ERS – Engine Remote Start)
Follow local/national rules/regulations on
means that the car's engine can be started idling.
remotely in order to warm up/cool down the
passenger compartment before departure.
ERS is activated via key and/or via Volvo On WARNING
Call*. To remote-start the engine, the following
The climate control starts with the same set- criteria must be met:
tings that were being used when the car was • The car must be supervised.
parked. • There must be no people or animals
An ERS-started engine is activated for a inside or around the car.
maximum of 15 minutes, then it is switched • The car must not be parked in a
off. After two ERS-activations the engine closed, unventilated area - the exhaust
must be started in the normal way before gases may seriously injure humans The key's buttons for remote start.
ERS can be re-used. and animals. Unlocking
ERS is only available in cars with automatic Locking
gearbox and cars that have a bonnet switch4 Related information
installed. • Remote start (ERS) - operation (p. 261) Approach lighting
• Remote start (ERS) - symbols and mes-
Unlocking, tailgate
NOTE sages (p. 263)
The service life of the remote control key's Information5
battery is affected by the ERS function. In
the event of frequent use of ERS the bat- Remote starting the engine
tery should therefore be changed once per To be able to remotely start the engine the
year, see Remote control key - replacing car must be locked and the bonnet closed.
the battery (p. 169).
Proceed as follows:
08
4 Available in the XC60, cars with alarm, most cars with 4-cylinder engines or if ERS is selected for new construction.
5 Only on PCC key, see Remote control key with PCC* - unique functions (p. 166).
}}

||
1. Briefly press on the key's button (2). Active functions When an ERS-started engine is switched off,
2. Follow this immediately afterwards with a The following functions are activated with a the direction indicators illuminate with a con-
long press - at least 2 seconds - on remote started engine: stant glow for 3 seconds.
button (3). • Ventilation system Related information
If the conditions for ERS are fulfilled then the • Audio/video system • Remote start (ERS)* (p. 261)
following takes place:
• Approach lighting. • Remote start (ERS) - symbols and mes-
1. The direction indicators flash quickly sev- sages (p. 263)
eral times. Deactivated functions
2. The engine starts. The following functions are deactivated with a
remote started engine:
3. The direction indicators illuminate with a
constant glow for 3 seconds to verify that • headlamps
the engine has started. • Position lamps
• Number plate lighting
NOTE
• Windscreen wiper.
After remote starting, the car continues to
be locked but with deactivated movement ERS is interrupted
detector*. The following steps switch off an ERS-started
engine:
With PCC6 key • The remote control key's
The light indication for Approach button (1), (2) or (4) is depressed
lighting7 flashes several times when • The car is unlocked
the button is pressed and then goes
to constant glow if all criteria for
• A door is opened
ERS have been fulfilled. However, this does • Accelerator pedal or brake pedal is
not mean that ERS has started the engine. depressed
To check whether ERS has started the • The gear selector is moved out of P posi-
tion
engine, the user can press the button (5) - if
the engine has started, there is a light indica- • Active ERS time exceeds 15 minutes.
08 tion by the buttons (2) and (3).
6 For more information on the PCC key, see Remote control key with PCC* - unique functions (p. 166).
7 For more information on Approach lighting, see Remote control key - functions (p. 164) and Approach lighting (p. 98).

Remote start (ERS) - symbols and Message Specification Interrupted ERS function
messages Message Specification
No remote ERS unavailable due to
In situations where the ERS function fails or is start Engine warning message from Remote start ERS interrupted
interrupted, a symbol is shown in the com- warning engine. Contact a work- off Gear not in because gear selector
bined instrument panel, supplemented by an shopA. P is not in P position.
explanatory text message.
No remote ERS unavailable due to Remote start ERS interrupted
ERS function unavailable start Engine error message from off Driver in because someone is in
Message Specification coolant level cooling system, see car the passenger compart-
low Coolant - level (p. 357). ment.
No remote ERS unavailable
start Too because a maximum of 2 No remote ERS unavailable Remote start ERS interrupted due to
many tries ERS activations in suc- start Door because a door/tailgate off Engine error message from
cession are allowed. open was not closed. warning engine. Contact a work-
shopA.
No remote ERS unavailable No remote ERS did not activate
start Low fuel because fuel level too start Bonnet because the bonnet was No remote ERS interrupted due to
level low. open not closed. start Engine error message from
coolant level cooling system.
No remote ERS unavailable No remote ERS unavailable low
start Gear not because gear selector is start Car not because the car was not
in P not in P position. locked locked. Remote start ERS interrupted
off Bonnet because the bonnet is
No remote ERS unavailable No remote ERS did not activate open open.
start Driver in because someone is in star Key in because the key was in
car the passenger compart- car the car. Remote start ERS interrupted since
ment. off Low bat- the battery voltage is
A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
tery too low.
No remote ERS unavailable due to
start Low low battery voltage. Remote start ERS interrupted since
battery Charge the battery by off Low fuel the fuel level is too low.
starting the engine. level 08
A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
}}
263
||
Related information Jump starting with battery 4. Connect one of the red jump lead's
• Remote start (ERS)* (p. 261) If the starter battery (p. 369) is discharged clamps to the donor battery's positive
• Remote start (ERS) - operation (p. 261) then the car can be started with current from terminal (1).
another battery.
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.
5. Open the clips on the front cover of the

battery in your car and remove the cover,
see Starter battery - replacement
(p. 371).
6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp
onto the car's positive terminal (2).
7. Connect one of the black jump lead's
When jump starting the car, the following clamps to the donor battery's negative
steps are recommended to avoid short cir- terminal (3).
cuits or other damage: 8. Connect the other clamp to a grounding
1. Set the car's electrical system in key point, e.g. right-hand engine mounting at
position 0, see Key positions - functions the top, the outer screw head (4).
at different levels (p. 79). 9. Check that the jump lead clamps are
2. Check that the donor battery has a volt- affixed securely so that there are no
age of 12 V. sparks during the starting procedure.
3. If the donor battery is installed in another 10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and
car - switch off the donor car's engine allow it to run a few minutes at a speed
and make sure that the two cars do not slightly higher than idle
touch each other. approx. 1500 rpm.
08

11. Start the engine in the car with the dis- Gearboxes Manual gearbox
charged battery. There are two main types of gearbox. Manual The function of the gearbox is to change the
gearbox and automatic gearbox. gear ratio depending on speed and power
IMPORTANT requirements.
• Manual gearbox (p. 265)
Do not touch the crocodile clips during the
start procedure. There is a risk of sparks • Automatic gearbox - Geartronic (p. 267)
forming. and Powershift (p. 270)
12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order -

IMPORTANT
first the black and then the red. To prevent damage to any drive system
> Make sure that none of the black jump components, the working temperature of
the gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of
lead's clamps comes into contact with
overheating, a warning symbol is illumi-
the battery's positive terminal or the nated in the combined instrument panel in
clamp connected to the red jump lead! conjunction with a text message being
shown. Follow the recommendation given
WARNING in the text message.
Gearshift pattern 6-speed gearbox.
• The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
Related information
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark The 6-speed box is available in two versions -
can be formed if a jump lead is con- • Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* reverse gear position differs between them.
nected incorrectly, and this can be (p. 267) Look at the actual gearshift pattern imprinted
enough for the battery to explode. on the gear lever.
• The battery contains sulphuric acid, • Depress the clutch pedal fully during
which can cause serious burns. each gear change.
• If sulphuric acid comes into contact • Take your foot off the clutch pedal
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with between gear changes.
large quantities of water. If acid
splashes into the eyes - seek medical
WARNING
attention immediately.
Always apply the parking brake when
parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear 08
Related information is not sufficient to hold the car in all situa-
• Starting the engine (p. 259) tions.
}}

||
Reverse gear inhibitor Gear shift indicator* Automatic gearbox
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possi- The gear shift indicator notifies the driver
bility of mistakenly attempting to engage when it is appropriate to engage the next
reverse gear during normal forward travel. higher or lower gear.
• Follow the gearing pattern printed on the An essential detail in connection with environ-
gear lever and start from neutral position,
mental driving is to drive in the right gear and
N before moving it to R position.
to change gear in plenty of time.
• Engage reverse gear only when the car is
stationary. An indicator is available as an aid on some
variants - GSI (Gear Shift Indicator) - which
notifies the driver when it is appropriate to
NOTE
engage the next higher or lower gear in order
With the upper variant of the shifting pat- to obtain the lowest possible fuel consump-
tern for 6-speed gearbox (see previous tion.
illustration) - first press down the gear Combined instrument panel "Digital" with
lever in the N position in order to engage However, taking into consideration characte- gear shift indicator.
reverse gear. ristics such as performance and vibration-free
The framed number indicates the current
running, it may be advantageous to change
gear.
gear at a higher engine speed. The framed
Related information number indicates the current gear. With "Analogue" combined
• Gearboxes (p. 265) instrument panel, the gear
Manual gearbox positions and indicator
• Transmission fluid - grade and volume
Gear shift indicator for man- arrows are displayed in its
(p. 408)
ual gearbox. Only one centre.
marker is illuminated at a
time - during normal driving
it is only illuminated in the Related information
centre. • Manual gearbox (p. 265)
When gearing up/down as recommended, the • Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic*
upper one is illuminated at "+" or the lower at (p. 267)
"-", marked red in the illustration.
08

Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* Parking position - P Neutral position - N

The Geartronic gearbox has two different gear Select P position when starting the engine or No gear is engaged and the engine can be
modes - Automatic and Manual. when the car is parked. started. Apply the parking brake if the car is
stationary with the gear selector in N position.
In order to move the gear selector from the P
position the brake pedal must be depressed To be able to move the gear selector from N
and the remote control key must be in posi- to other gear positions, the brake pedal must
tion I or II. be depressed and the remote control key
must be in key position II.
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when
the P position is engaged. Also apply the Drive position - D
parking brake (p. 288) when the car is D is the normal driving position. Shifting up
parked. and down takes place automatically based on
the level of acceleration and speed. The car
NOTE must be stationary when the gear selector is
The gear selector must be in P position to moved to D position from R position.
allow the car to be locked and alarmed.
D: Automatic gear positions. +/–: Manual gear Geartronic – Manual gear positions
positions. S: Sport mode*. (+S-)
Combined instrument panel (p. 64) shows the IMPORTANT The driver can also change gear manually
position of the gear selector using the follow- The car must be stationary when posi- using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The
ing indications: P, R, N, D, S*, 1, 2, 3 etc. tion P is selected. car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal
is released.
Gear positions
WARNING The manual gear position is reached
Automatic gear positions are
by moving the lever to the side from
indicated on the right of the Always apply the parking brake when position D to the end position at
combined instrument panel. parking on a slope - the automatic trans- "+S-". The combined instrument
(Only one marker is illumi- mission's P position is not sufficient to
panel's symbol "+S-" changes colour from
nated at a time - the one hold the car in all situation.
WHITE to ORANGE and the digits 1, 2, 3 etc.
showing the current gear
are displayed in a box, corresponding to the
selector position.) Reverse position - R gear that has just been selected.
Symbol "S" for Sport mode is ORANGE when The car must be stationary when R position is 08
the mode is active. selected. • Move the lever forwards towards "+"
(plus) to change up a gear and release the
}}

||
lever, which returns to its rest position To be able to change gear with the steering After each gear change the combined instru-
between + and –. wheel paddles they must first be activated. ment panel changes figure to show the cur-
or This is by means of pulling one of the paddles rent gear.
toward the steering wheel - the combined
• Pull the lever back towards "–" (minus) to instrument panel then changes indication NOTE
change down a gear and release it. from "D" to a figure, which indicates the cur-
The manual gearshift mode "+S–" can be rent gear. Automatic deactivation
selected at any time while driving. If the steering wheel paddles are not used
To then change gear one step: then they are deactivated after a short time
Geartronic automatically shifts down if the - this is indicated when the combined
driver allows the speed to decrease lower
• Pull one of the paddles backwards -
towards the steering wheel - and release. instrument panel switches indication, from
than a level suitable for the selected gear, in the figure for the current gear back to "D".
order to avoid jerking and stalling.
The exception is during engine braking -
To return to automatic driving mode: then the paddles are activated as long as
engine braking is in progress.
• Move the lever to the side to the end
position at D. Manual deactivation
The steering wheel paddle shifters can
NOTE also be deactivated manually:
If the gearbox has a Sport programme • Pull both paddles toward the steering
then the gearbox will only become manual wheel and hold until the combined
after the gear selector has been moved instrument panel changes character
forwards or backwards in its "+S–" posi- from the figure for the current gear to
tion. The combined instrument panel then "D".
changes indication from S to show which Both steering wheel "paddles".
of the gears 1, 2, 3 etc. is engaged. "-": Selects the next lower gear. The paddles can also be used with the gear
selector in Sport mode* - then the paddles
Paddles* "+": Selects the next higher gear.
are constantly activated without being deacti-
As a supplement to manual gear changing A gear change occurs at each pull of the pad- vated.
with the gear selector there are also controls dle provided that the engine speed does not
located on the steering wheel, so-called leave the permitted range.
08 "paddles".

Geartronic - Sport mode* (S)8 The gearbox "winter mode" means that the when the engine reaches its maximum speed
The Sport programme provides car moves off with a lower engine speed and in order to prevent damage to the engine.
sportier characteristics and allows reduced engine power on the drive wheels.
higher engine speed for the gears. Towing
Kick-down
At the same time it responds more If the car has to be towed - see important
quickly to acceleration. During active driving, When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
information in the section Towing (p. 309).
the use of a lower gear is prioritised, leading way to the floor (beyond the position normally
to a delayed upshift. regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is Related information
immediately engaged. This is known as kick- • Transmission fluid - grade and volume
To activate Sport mode: down. (p. 408)
• Move the gear selector to the side from D If the accelerator is released from the kick- • Automatic gearbox -- Powershift*
position to the end position at "+S–" - the down position, the gearbox automatically (p. 270)
combined instrument panel changes indi- changes up.
cation from D to S.
• Gearboxes (p. 265)
Kick-down is used when maximum accelera-
Sport mode can be selected at any time while
tion is needed, such as for overtaking.
driving.
Safety function
Geartronic - Winter mode
To prevent overrevving the engine, the gear-
It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads
box control program has a protective down-
if 3rd gear is engaged manually.
shift inhibitor which prevents the kick-down
1. Depress the brake pedal and move the function.
gear selector from D position to the end
position at "+S–" - the combined instru- Geartronic does not permit downshifting/
ment panel changes indication from D to kick-down which would result in an engine
the figure 19. speed high enough to damage the engine.
Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift
2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever down in this way at high engine speed – the
forward towards "+" (plus) twice - the dis- original gear remains engaged.
play shifts the indication from 1 to 3.
When kick-down is activated the car can
3. Release the brake and accelerate care-
fully. change one or more gears at a time depend-
ing on engine speed. The car changes up 08
8 With certain engines only.

9 If the car has Sport mode* then "S" is shown first.

Automatic gearbox -- Powershift* Towing can also overheat during slow driving in
The Powershift automatic gearbox transmits The model with Powershift transmission queues (10 km/h or slower) on an uphill gradi-
the motive force from the engine to the drive should not be towed as it is dependent on the ent, or with a trailer hitched. The gearbox
wheels with double mechanical clutch discs, engine running in order to receive sufficient cools down when the car is stationary, with
as opposed to Geartronic which instead uses lubrication. If towing (p. 309) still has to take foot brake depressed and the engine running
a hydraulic torque converter. place, the route must be as short as possible at idling speed.
and then at very low speed. Overheating during slow driving in queues
In the event of uncertainty as to whether the can be avoided by driving in stages:
car is equipped with Powershift or Geartronic • Stop the car and wait with your foot on
transmission, this can be verified by checking the brake pedal until there is a moderate
the designation on the gearbox label under distance to the traffic ahead, drive for-
the bonnet, Type designations (p. 395). The ward a short distance, and then wait
designation ”MPS6” means that it is another moment with your foot on the
Powershift transmission - otherwise it is brake pedal.
Geartronic automatic transmission.
See also important information in section IMPORTANT
Towing (p. 309). Use the foot brake to hold the car station-
ary on an uphill gradient - do not hold the
D: Automatic gear positions. +S–: Manual gear To bear in mind car with the accelerator pedal. The gear-
positions. S: Sport mode*. The transmission's double clutch has over- box could then overheat.
Powershift transmission operates in the same load protection that is activated if it becomes
way and has similar controls and functions as too hot, e.g. if the car is held stationary with Text message and action
the Geartronic automatic transmission. the accelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for In some situations the combined instrument
a long time. panel may show a text message at the same
One exception is the function "Geartronic -
Overheated transmission causes the car to time as a symbol is illuminated.
Winter mode" (p. 267):
shake and vibrate, and the warning symbol
• Powershift enables driving away on a
illuminates and the combined instrument
slippery road surface if 2nd gear is
panel shows a message. The transmission
engaged manually - instead of 3rd gear
with Geartronic.
08

Symbol Message Driving characteristics Action

Transmission hot Brake to Difficulty in maintaining even speed Transmission overheated. Keep the car stationary using the
hold at constant engine speed. foot brake.A
Transmission hot Park Significant pulling in the car's trac- Transmission overheated. Park the car immediately in a safe
safely Let engine run tion. manner.A
Transmission cooling Let No drive due to overheated gearbox. Transmission overheated. For fastest cooling: Run the
engine run engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P posi-
tion until the message clears.
A For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.
The table shows three steps with an WARNING Related information

increased degree of seriousness should the • Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p. 267)
transmission become too hot. In parallel with If a warning symbol combined with the text
Transmission hot Park safely Let • Transmission fluid - grade and volume
the text message, the driver is also advised (p. 408)
engine run is ignored then the heat in the
that the car's electronics are temporarily
gearbox may become so high that the
changing the driving characteristics. Follow power transmission between engine and
the instructions in the text message where gearbox is temporarily halted in order to
appropriate. prevent the clutch from malfunctioning -
the car then loses drive and is stationary
NOTE until gearbox temperature has cooled to
an acceptable level.
The examples in the table are no indication
of the car being defective, but show that a
safety function has been activated with a For more possible text messages with their
view to preventing damage to any of the respective proposals for solutions concerning
car's components. automatic gearbox, see Messages (p. 111).
A text message extinguishes automatically
after the action has been carried out or after
one press on the indicator stalk OK button. 08

Gear selector inhibitor Stationary car with engine running: Deactivate automatic gear selector
There are two different types of gear selector • Keep your foot on the brake pedal when inhibitor
inhibitor - mechanical and automatic. moving the gear selector to another posi-
tion.
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock
Parking position (P)
To be able to move the gear selector from P
to other gear positions, the brake pedal must
be depressed and the remote control key
must be in key position II (p. 79).
Shiftlock – Neutral (N)

If the gear selector is in N position and the
car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds
(irrespective of whether the engine is running) If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat
G021351
then the gear selector is locked. starter battery, the gear selector must be
M: Manual shifting10 - "+/-" or "Sport" mode. moved from the P position so that the car can
To be able to move the gear selector from N
be moved.
The gear selector can be moved forward and to other gear positions, the brake pedal must
back freely between N and D. Other positions be depressed and the remote control key Lift the rubber mat in the compartment
are locked with a latch that is released with must be in key position II, see Key positions behind the centre console and locate a
the inhibitor button on the gear selector. (p. 79). hole11 for the key blade (p. 168) in the
bottom of the compartment.
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever
can be moved forwards or backwards Search for a spring-loaded button down
between P, R, N and D. in the hole with the key blade; depress
the button with the blade and hold.
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
Move the gear selector from the P posi-
The automatic gearbox has special safety
tion and pull up the key blade.
systems:
4. Set the rubber mat back in place.
08
Parking position (P)
10 The illustration is schematic.

11 There may be 2 holes - one for the key blade and one that fixes the rubber mat.
272
Related information Hill start assist (HSA)*12 All Wheel Drive - AWD*
• Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p. 267) The foot brake can be released before setting Optimal traction is achieved with all-wheel
• Automatic gearbox -- Powershift* (p. 270) off or reversing uphill - the HSA (Hill Start drive.
Assist) function means that the car does not
roll backwards. All Wheel Drive is always available
The function means that the pedal pressure in

the brake system remains for several seconds
while the driver's foot is moved from brake
pedal to accelerator pedal.
The temporary braking effect releases after
several seconds or when the driver acceler-
ates.
Related information
All Wheel Drive (All Wheel Drive) means that

the car is driving all four wheels at the same
time.
The power is automatically distributed
between the front and rear wheels. An elec-
tronically controlled clutch system distributes
the power to the wheels that have the best
grip on the current road surface. This pro-
vides the best traction and prevents wheel
spin. Under normal driving conditions, the
majority of power is transmitted to the front
wheels.
All Wheel Drive improves driving safety in 08
rain, snow and icy conditions.
12 Depends on engine and gearbox combination. HSA not possible with some combinations.

Hill Descent Control (HDC)* WARNING gearbox, gear position 1 must be selected,
HDC can be compared to an automatic which is shown with the figure 1 in the com-
HDC does not work in all situations but is bined instrument panel, see Automatic gear-
engine brake. When you release the accelera- designed merely as a supplementary aid.
tor on downhill gradients the car is normally box -- Geartronic* (p. 267).
braked by means of the engine striving for low The driver always bears ultimate responsi-
bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven NOTE
engine idling speeds, so-called engine brak-
safely.
ing. But the steeper the roadway and the HDC cannot be activated on an automatic
more load in the car, the faster the car coasts gearbox when the gear selector is in posi-
despite engine braking - the HDC function Function tion D.
compensates for this with automatic brake
intervention.
Operation
General information on HDC HDC allows the car to roll at a maximum of
HDC makes it possible to increase/reduce 10 km/h forwards with engine braking and
speed on steep downhill gradients, with a 7 km/h backwards. However, any speed
foot only on the accelerator pedal, without within the gear's speed register can be
using the foot brake. The sensitivity of the selected using the accelerator pedal. When
accelerator pedal decreases and becomes the accelerator pedal is released, the car is
more precise by means of the full actuation of braked quickly to 10 or 7 km/h respectively,
the pedal being restricted to adjusting engine irrespective of the hill's gradient and without
speed within a limited range. The brake sys- the need for the foot brake.
tem brakes itself and provides the car with a HDC On/Off. The brake lights come on automatically when
low and even speed, so allowing the driver to the function is operating. The driver can brake
fully focus on steering. HDC is activated or deactivated with one of
the centre console's switches. The lamp or stop the car at any time by using the foot
HDC is particularly helpful on steep gradients within it illuminates when the function is acti- brake.
with an uneven road surface and slippery vated. HDC is deactivated:
sections. E.g. when launching a boat on a
trailer from a ramp. When HDC is operating, the combined • with the centre console's On/Off button
instrument panel's symbol illuminates • if a gear higher than 1 is selected on a
combined with the text message Hill manual gearbox
descent control ON.
08 • if a gear higher than 1 is selected on an
The function only operates in first gear posi- automatic gearbox, or if the gear selector
tion and in reverse gear. For an automatic is moved to position D.

The function can be disengaged at any time. Start/Stop* conscious way of driving the car by means of
If it takes place on a steep downhill gradient Some engine and gearbox combinations being able to allow the engine to stop auto-
then the braking effect will not release come fitted with a Start/Stop function which matically, whenever appropriate.
directly, but slowly instead. engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic Manual or Automatic
or waiting at traffic lights - the engine is then
NOTE switched off temporarily and restarts auto- Note that there are differences in the
matically when the journey is due to continue. Start/Stop function depending on whether the
With HDC activated you may experience a gearbox is manual or automatic.
delay between acceleration pedal activa-
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Cor-
tion and engine response. Related information
poration's core values and it influences all of
our operations. This target orientation has • Start/Stop* - function and operation
Related information resulted in several separate energy-saving (p. 276)
• All Wheel Drive - AWD* (p. 273) functions of which Start/Stop is one, all with • Starting the engine (p. 259)
the collective task of reducing fuel consump- • Start/Stop* - settings (p. 281)
tion, which in turn helps to reduce exhaust
emissions.
• Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-
start (p. 280)
General information on Start/Stop • Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts
(p. 279)
• Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
(p. 277)
• Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual
gearbox (p. 280)
• Start/Stop* - symbols and messages
(p. 282)
• Battery - Start/Stop (p. 373)
The engine is switched off - it becomes quieter

and cleaner. 08
The Start/Stop function gives the driver the
opportunity for a more active environmentally

Start/Stop* - function and operation Conditions M/A Auto-starting the engine

The Start/Stop function is activated automati- A Conditions M/
cally when the engine is started with the key. AA
Declutch, set the gear lever in neu- M
The Start/Stop function is tral position and release the clutch With the gear lever in neutral posi- M
activated automatically when pedal - the engine stops automati- tion:
the engine is started with the cally.
key. The driver is made 1. Depress the clutch pedal or
aware of this by the func- Stop the car with the foot brake A press the accelerator pedal -
tion's symbol illuminating in and then keep your foot on the the engine starts.
the combined instrument pedal - the engine stops automati- 2. Engage a suitable gear and
panel and the On/Off button cally. drive.
lamp illuminating.
A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox. Release the foot pressure on the A
All of the car's normal sys- foot brake - the engine starts auto-
tems such as lighting, radio, etc. work as nor- If the ECO function is acti- matically and the journey can con-
mal even with an engine that has stopped vated then the engine may tinue.
automatically, except that some equipment auto-stop before the car is
may have the function temporarily reduced, completely stationary. Maintain foot pressure on the foot A
e.g. the climate control system's fan speed or brake and depress the accelerator
extremely high volume on the audio system. pedal - the engine auto-starts.
Auto-stopping the engine As verification and reminder that the The following option is also availa- M+
The following is required for the engine to engine is auto-stopped the com- ble on a downhill gradient: A
auto-stop: bined instrument panel's symbol for Release the foot brake and let the
the Start/Stop function illuminates. car move off - the engine starts
automatically when the speed
exceeds normal walking pace.
A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
08

Deactivating the Start/Stop function • Start/Stop* - settings (p. 281) Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
In certain situations, it may • Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- Although the Start/Stop function is activated,
advisable to temporarily start (p. 280) the engine does not always stop automati-
switch off the automatic cally.
• Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts
Start/Stop function - this is (p. 279)
carried out with a push of The engine does not auto-stop if:
this button. • Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
(p. 277)
Conditions M/A
Disengaged function is indicated by • Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual A
the combined instrument panel's gearbox (p. 280)
Start/Stop symbol and the On/Off
• Start/Stop* - symbols and messages the car has not first achieved M+
button's lamp extinguishing. (p. 282) approx. 8 km/h after a key start or A
The Start/Stop function is disengaged until it • Battery - Start/Stop (p. 373) the last auto-stop.
is reactivated with the button or until the next
the driver has opened the seat- M+
time the engine is started with the key.
belt's buckle. A
Start assistance HSA
the capacity of the starter battery M+
The foot brake can also be released on an
is below the minimum permissible A
uphill slope to auto-start the engine - the HSA
level.
(p. 273) (Hill Start Assist) function prevents
the car from rolling backwards. the engine does not have normal M+
HSA means that the pressure in the brake operating temperature. A
system remains temporarily available while ambient temperature is around M+
the driver moves his/her foot from the brake freezing point or above A
pedal to the accelerator pedal for driving off approx. 30 °C.
with the engine having stopped automatically.
The temporary braking effect releases after a the windscreen's electric heating M+
couple of seconds or when the driver acceler- is activated. A
ates.
the environment in the passenger M+
Related information compartment differs from the pre- A
08
• Start/Stop* (p. 275) set values - indicated by the venti-
• Starting the engine (p. 259) lation fan running at a high speed.
}}

||
Conditions M/A Conditions M/A • Battery - Start/Stop (p. 373)
A A
the car is reversed. M+ the atmospheric air pressure is A

A less than equivalent to
1500-2500 metres above sea level
the starter battery temperature is M+ - the current air pressure varies
below the freezing point or is too A with the prevailing weather condi-
high. tions.
the driver makes greater steering M+ adaptive cruise control Queue A
wheel movements. A Assist is activated.
the exhaust system's particulate M+ the gear selector is in S positionC A
filter is full - the temporarily disen- A or "+/-".
gaged Start/Stop function is reac-
tivated as soon as an automatic A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
B With certain engines only.
cleaning cycle has been per- C Sport mode.
formed (see Diesel particle filter
(DPF) (p. 299)). Related information
the road is very steep. M+
• Start/Stop* (p. 275)
A • Start/Stop* - function and operation
(p. 276)
a trailer is connected electrically to M+ • Starting the engine (p. 259)
the car’s electrical system. A
• Start/Stop* - settings (p. 281)
the bonnet has been openedB. M+ • Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-
A start (p. 280)
the gearbox does not have normal A • Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts
(p. 279)
operating temperature.
08 gearbox (p. 280)
• Start/Stop* - symbols and messages
(p. 282)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts Conditions M/AA • Start/Stop* - settings (p. 281)
An auto-stopped engine may restart in certain • Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-
cases without the driver having decided that The driver's seatbelt buckle is A start (p. 280)
the journey should continue. opened with the gear selector in D • Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
or N position. (p. 277)
In the following cases the engine also starts
automatically if the driver has not depressed Steering wheel movementsB. A • Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual
the clutch pedal (manual gearbox) or takes gearbox (p. 280)
his/her foot off the brake pedal (automatic The gear selector is moved out of A • Start/Stop* - symbols and messages
gearbox): the D position to S positionC, R or (p. 282)
"+/-".
Conditions M/AA The driver's door is opened with A
the gear selector in D position - a
Misting forms on the windows. M+A
"ping" sound and text message
The environment in the passenger M+A inform that the Start/Stop function
compartment deviates from the is active.
preset values. A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
B With certain engines only.
There is a temporarily high current M+A C Sport mode.
take-off or starter battery capacity
drops below the lowest permissi- WARNING
ble level.
Do not open the bonnet when the engine
Repeated pumping of the brake M+A has stopped automatically - the engine
pedal. may suddenly start automatically. First
switch off the engine as normal using the
The bonnet is openedB. M+A START/STOP ENGINE button before
opening the bonnet.
The car starts to roll, or there is a M+A
small increase in speed if the car Related information
auto-stopped without being com- • Start/Stop* (p. 275)
pletely stationary. 08
• Start/Stop* - function and operation
(p. 276)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not • Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual
auto-start gearbox (p. 280) gearbox
The engine does not always auto-start after • Start/Stop* - symbols and messages In the event that a start-up fails and the
having auto-stopped. (p. 282) engine stops, proceed in accordance with the
• Battery - Start/Stop (p. 373) below:
In the following cases the engine does not
auto-start after having auto-stopped: 1. Depress the clutch pedal again - the
engine starts automatically.
Conditions M/ 2. In certain cases the gear lever must be
AA set in neutral position. The combined
instrument panel then shows the text Put
A gear is engaged without M gear in neutral.
declutching - a display text
prompts the driver to set the gear Related information
lever in neutral position in order to • Start/Stop* (p. 275)
enable auto-start. • Start/Stop* - function and operation
(p. 276)
The driver is unrestrained, the gear A
selector is in P position and the • Starting the engine (p. 259)
driver’s door is open - a normal • Start/Stop* - settings (p. 281)
engine start must take place. • Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-
start (p. 280)
Related information (p. 279)
• Start/Stop* (p. 275) • Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
• Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 277)
(p. 276) • Start/Stop* - symbols and messages
• Starting the engine (p. 259) (p. 282)
• Start/Stop* - settings (p. 281) • Battery - Start/Stop (p. 373)
08 (p. 279)
(p. 277)

Start/Stop* - settings • Start/Stop* - symbols and messages

The car's MY CAR menu system, under the (p. 282)
DRIVe heading, contains information about • Battery - Start/Stop (p. 373)
Volvo's Start/Stop system, as well as recom-
mendations for energy-saving driving techni-
ques.
Related information
(p. 276)
start (p. 280)
(p. 279)
08
(p. 277)
gearbox (p. 280)

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages Text message For some of them there is a recommended
The Start/Stop function can show text mes- In combination with this indicator action that should be performed. The follow-
sages in the combined instrument panel. lamp the Start/Stop function may ing table shows some examples.
show text messages in the com-
bined instrument panel for certain situations.
Symbol Message Info/Action M/AA

Auto Start/Stop Service Start/Stop is not operational. Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- M+A
required ommended.
Autostart Engine running + Activated if the driver's door is opened with auto-stopped engine and the gear selector in A
acoustic signal D position.
Press start button The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as normal with the START/STOP M+A
ENGINE button.
Depress clutch pedal to The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the clutch pedal to be depressed. M
start
Depress brake and clutch The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the brake or clutch pedal to be depressed. M
pedals to start
Put gear in neutral to start Gear is engaged without declutching - disengage and set the gear lever in neutral posi- M
tion.
08

Symbol Message Info/Action M/AA

Select P or N to start Start/Stop has been deactivated - move the gear selector to N or P position and start the A
engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button.
Press start button The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as normal with the START/STOP A
ENGINE button and the gear selector in P or N.
If a message does not go out following com-

pletion of the action then a workshop should
be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
Related information
(p. 276)
• Start/Stop* - settings (p. 281)
start (p. 280)
(p. 279)
(p. 277)
gearbox (p. 280)
08

ECO* NOTE panel ECO symbol and the ECO button lamp
ECO13 is an innovative Volvo function for illuminating when the function is activated.
When the ECO function is activated, sev-
automatic-gearbox cars, capable of reducing eral parameters in the climate control sys- ECO function On or Off
fuel consumption by up to 5%, depending on tem's settings are changed, and several Disengaged ECO function is
the driver's driving style. The function gives electricity consumer functions are
indicated by the combined
the driver the option of a more active environ- reduced. Certain settings can be reset
manually, but full functionality is only instrument panel ECO sym-
mentally conscious way of driving.
restored by deactivating the ECO function. bol and the ECO button lamp
General extinguishing. The function is
The following are changed then switched off until it is
ECO - Operation reactivated with the ECO
upon activation of the ECO
function: button.
Eco Coast - Function

The Eco Coast subfunction means in practice
that engine braking is deactivated, meaning in
• Gearbox gearshift points. turn that the car's kinetic energy is used to
• Engine management and response from coast for longer distances. When the driver
the accelerator pedal. releases the accelerator pedal the gearbox is
automatically disengaged from the engine
• Start/Stop function - the engine can also
auto-stop before the car has stopped whose speed is reduced to idling speed with
down to being completely stationary. minimum consumption.
• The Eco Coast function is activated -
ECO On/Off
This function is intended for use in the event
engine braking ceases. of an anticipated reduction in speed, e.g. to
• Climate control system settings - some ECO symbol coast forward to an intersection or a red light.
electricity consumers are deactivated or Eco Coast enables proactive driving where
operate at reduced power. The ECO function is deactivated when the
the driver can use the so-called "Pulse &
engine is switched off, and must therefore be
Glide" technique and a minimum of braking.
activated after each time the engine is
started. There are exceptions for certain Combination On and Off
engines. However, it is easily verified by
08 A combination of Eco Coast and temporarily
means of both the combined instrument
deactivated ECO function can also collec-
13 Not possible on the XC60 and XC70 with AWD.

tively contribute to reduced consumption. • on steep downhill gradients - to be able More information and settings
Accordingly: to use engine braking.
• Active Eco Coast: Long coasting without • before an imminent overtaking manoeu-
engine braking = Low consumption vre - in order to be able to complete it in
the safest possible way.
and
Deactivating Eco Coast and returning to
• Deactivated ECO function: Short coasting engine braking can be performed as follows:
with engine braking = Minimum con-
sumption. • Press the ECO button.
• Move the gear lever to manual "S+/-"
NOTE position.
However, to achieve optimal low fuel con- • Change gear with the steering wheel pad-
sumption, Eco Coast in combination with dle shifters.
short coasting distances should generally • Actuate the accelerator or brake pedal. The car's menu system MY CAR contains
be avoided.
further information on the ECO concept - see
Eco Coast - Limitations
the section MY CAR (p. 112).
Activating Eco Coast The function is not available if:
The function is activated when the accelera- • cruise control is activated Related information
tor pedal is fully released, in combination with • the road's downhill gradient is steeper • General information on climate control
the following parameters: (p. 126)
than approx. 6%
• ECO button activated • manual gear changing is performed with
• Gear selector in D position the steering wheel paddle shifters*
• Speed within the range of • engine and/or gearbox are not at normal
approx. 65-140 km/h operating temperature.
• The road's downhill gradient is not • the gear selector is moved from D- to "S
steeper than approx. 6%. +/-" position
• speed is outside the range of
Deactivate Eco Coast approx. 65-140 km/h
In certain situations it may be desirable to
deactivate the Eco Coast function. Examples 08
of such situations include:
285
Foot brake wet road surfaces, prior to long-stay parking WARNING

The foot brake is used to reduce the car's and after the car has been washed, it is there-
speed while driving. fore advisable to carry out cleaning by brak- If and illuminate at the same
ing gently for a short period while driving. time, there may be a fault in the brake sys-
The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If tem.
a brake circuit is damaged then the brake Maintenance If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is
pedal will engage deeper and a higher pres- To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi- normal at this stage, drive carefully to the
sure on the pedal is needed to produce the ble, follow the Volvo service intervals as nearest workshop and have the brake sys-
normal braking effect. specified in the Service and Warranty Book- tem checked - an authorised Volvo work-
let. shop is recommended.
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in
by a brake servo. the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur-
IMPORTANT
ther before topping up the brake fluid.
WARNING The wear on the brake system's compo-
nents must be checked regularly. The reason for the loss of brake fluid must
The brake servo only works when the be investigated.
engine is running. Contact a workshop for information about
the procedure or engage a workshop to
carry out the inspection - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information
If the foot brake is used when the engine is • Parking brake (p. 288)
switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and a
higher pedal pressure must be used to brake Symbols and messages • Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers
the car.
Symbol Specification (p. 287)
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a • Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
heavy load the brakes can be relieved by Constant glow – Check the
brake fluid level. If the level is (p. 287)
using engine braking. Engine braking is most
efficiently used if the same gear is used low, fill with brake fluid and • Foot brake - anti-lock braking system
check for the cause of the (p. 287)
downhill as up.
brake fluid loss.
For more general information on heavy loads
on the car, see Engine oil - adverse driving Constant glow for 2 seconds
conditions (p. 404). when the engine is started -
08 automatic function check.
Cleaning the brake discs
Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs
may result in delayed brake function. With
286
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system Foot brake - emergency brake lights Foot brake - emergency brake
The anti-lock braking system, ABS (Anti-lock and automatic hazard warning assistance
Braking System), prevents the wheels from flashers Emergency brake assistance EBA (Emergency
locking up during braking. Emergency brake lights are activated to alert Brake Assist) helps to increase the braking
vehicles behind about sudden braking. The force and so reduce the braking distance.
The function allows the steering ability to be function means that the brake light flashes
maintained, and it is easier to swerve to avoid instead of - as in normal braking - shining with EBA detects the driver's braking style and
a hazard for example. Vibration may be felt in a constant glow. increases the braking force when necessary.
the brake pedal when this is engaged and this The brake force can be reinforced up to the
is normal. Emergency brake lights are activated at level when the ABS system is engaged. The
A short test of the ABS system is made auto- speeds above 50 km/h in the event of sudden EBA function is interrupted when the pressure
matically after the engine has been started braking. After the car's speed has been on the brake pedal is reduced.
when the driver releases the brake pedal. A slowed below 10 km/h the brake light returns
further automatic test of the ABS system may from flashing to the normal constant glow - NOTE
be made when the car reaches 10 km/h. The while at the same time the hazard warning
When EBA is activated the brake pedal
test may be experienced as pulses in the flashers (p. 95) are activated, and they flash
lowers slightly more than usual, depress
brake pedal. until the driver changes engine speed with the (hold) the brake pedal as long as neces-
accelerator pedal or they are deactivated with sary. If the brake pedal is released then all
Related information their button. braking ceases.
• Foot brake (p. 286)
Related information
• Parking brake (p. 288)
• Foot brake (p. 286) Related information
• Foot brake - emergency brake lights and • Foot brake (p. 286)
• Parking brake (p. 288)
automatic hazard warning flashers • Parking brake (p. 288)
(p. 287) • Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
(p. 287) • Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
• Foot brake - emergency brake assistance automatic hazard warning flashers
(p. 287) • Foot brake - anti-lock braking system
(p. 287)
(p. 287)
• Foot brake - anti-lock braking system
(p. 287)
08
287
Parking brake Applying the parking brake pressing and holding the control for PUSH
The parking brake holds the car stationary, LOCK/PULL RELEASE. The braking proce-
when the driver's seat is empty, by mechani- dure is stopped when the control is released.
cally locking/blocking two wheels.
NOTE
Function
In the event of emergency braking at
A faint electric motor noise can be heard
speeds above 10 km/h a signal sounds
when the electrical parking brake is being during the braking procedure.
applied. The noise can also be heard during
the automatic function checking of the park-
ing brake. Parking on a hill
If the car is parked facing uphill:
If the car is stationary when the parking brake
is applied then it only acts on the rear wheels. • Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
If it is applied when the car is moving then the Parking brake control - apply. If the car is parked facing downhill:
normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts 1. Depress the foot brake pedal firmly.
on all four wheels. Brake function changes
• Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
over to the rear wheels when the car is almost 2. Press the control PUSH LOCK/PULL
stationary. RELEASE. WARNING
> The combined instrument pan- Always apply the parking brake when
Low battery voltage el's symbol starts flashing - once there parking on a slope - leaving the car in
If the battery voltage is too low then the park- is a constant glow the parking brake is gear, or in P if it has automatic transmis-
ing brake can neither be released nor applied. applied. sion, is not sufficient to hold the car in all
Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage situation.
is too low, see Jump starting with battery 3. Release the foot brake pedal and make
(p. 264). sure that the car is at a standstill position.
• When parking the vehicle, always engage
1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the
gear selector in position P (for automatic
gearbox).
Emergency brake
08 In an emergency the parking brake can be
applied when the vehicle is in motion by
288
Disengaging the parking brake NOTE 2. Start the engine.
The parking brake can also be released 3. Depress the foot brake pedal firmly.
manually by depressing the clutch pedal 4. Move the gear selector to position D or R
instead of the brake pedal. Volvo recom- and depress the accelerator.
mends that the brake pedal is used.
> The parking brake releases and
the combined instrument panel's sym-
Releasing automatically
bol extinguishes.
1. Start the engine.
2. Engage 1st gear or reverse gear. NOTE
3. Ease up the clutch and depress the For safety reasons, the parking brake is
accelerator. only released automatically if the engine is
> The parking brake releases and running and the driver is wearing a seat-
Parking brake control - release. belt. The parking brake is released imme-
the combined instrument panel's sym- diately on cars with automatic gearbox
Cars with manual gearbox bol extinguishes. when the accelerator pedal is depressed
and the gear selector is in position D or R.
Releasing manually Cars with automatic gearbox
1. Insert the remote control key in the igni-
tion switch14. Releasing manually Heavy load uphill
1. Insert the remote control key in the igni- A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the
2. Depress the foot brake pedal firmly. car to roll backward when the parking brake
tion switch14.
3. Pull the control PUSH LOCK/PULL is released automatically on a steep incline.
2. Depress the foot brake pedal firmly.
RELEASE. Avoid this by depressing the control while
> 3. Pull the control. driving off. Release the control when the
The parking brake releases and
> The parking brake releases and engine achieves traction.
the combined instrument panel's sym-
bol extinguishes. the combined instrument panel's sym- Replacing the brake linings
bol extinguishes. The rear brake linings must be replaced at a
Releasing automatically workshop due to the design of the electric
1. Put the seatbelt on. parking brake - an authorised Volvo work-
shop is recommended. 08
14 For a car with the Keyless system: Press START/STOP ENGINE.

}}
289
||
Symbols and messages and deleted, see Messages - handling
For information on how the combined instru- (p. 112).
ment panel's text messages can be shown

"Message" • Read the combined instrument panel's message.
A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is applied.

If the symbol flashes in any other situation then this means that a fault has arisen.
• Read the combined instrument panel's message.
Handbrake not A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released:
fully released
• Try to apply and release the brake.
If the fault persists after a few attempts:
• Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Note: A warning signal sounds if the journey is continued with this error message.
08
290

Handbrake not A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied:
applied
• Try to release and apply the brake.
The message is also illuminated on cars with manual gearbox when the car is driven at low speed with the door
open in order to alert the driver that the parking brake may have been unintentionally disengaged.
Handbrake A fault has arisen:

Service
• Try to apply and release the brake.
required
If the car has to be parked before a possible

fault has been rectified, then the wheels must
be turned as if parking on a hill and 1st gear
engaged (manual gearbox) or the gear selec-
tor must be in position P (automatic gearbox).
A text message can be acknowledged by
briefly pressing the OK button on the direc-
tion indicator stalk.
Related information
• Foot brake (p. 286)
08
291
Driving in water IMPORTANT Overheating

Fording means that the car is driven through a Under special conditions, for example hard
Engine damage can occur if water enters
water-covered roadway. Fording must be car- the air filter. driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is
ried out with great caution. a risk that the engine and drive system may
In depths greater than 25 cm, water could overheat - in particular with a heavy load.
The car can be driven through water at a enter the transmission. This reduces the
maximum depth of 25 cm at a maximum lubricating ability of the oils and shortens For information about overheating when driv-
speed of 10 km/h. Extra caution should be the service life of these systems. ing with a trailer, see Driving with a trailer*
exercised when passing through flowing Damage to any component, engine, trans- (p. 301).
water. mission, turbocharger, differential or its
internal components caused by flooding, • Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front
During driving in water, maintain a low speed hydrostatic locking or oil shortage, is not of the grille when driving in hot climates.
and do not stop the car. When the water has covered by the warranty. • If the temperature in the engine's cooling
been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly In the event of the engine stalling in water, system is too high then a warning symbol
and check that full brake function is achieved. do not try restart - tow the car from the is illuminated in the combined instrument
Water and mud for example can make the water to a workshop - an authorised Volvo panel's information display and a text
brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake workshop is recommended. Risk of engine message High engine temperature
function. breakdown. Stop safely is shown there - stop the car
in a safe way and allow the engine to run
• Clean the electric contacts of the electric
at idling speed for several minutes in
engine block heater* and trailer coupling Related information
order to cool down.
after driving in water and mud. • Recovery (p. 311)
• Do not let the car stand with water over • Towing (p. 309) • If the text message High engine
the sills for any long period of time - this temperature Turn off engine or Engine
could cause electrical malfunctions. coolant level low Stop safely is shown
then the engine must be switched off
after stopping the car.
• In the event of overheating in the gearbox
a built-in protection function is activated
which, amongst other things, illuminates
a warning symbol in the combined instru-
ment panel, and its display shows the
08 text message Transmission hot Reduce
speed or Transmission hot Stop safely
Wait for cooling - follow the recommen-
dation given and lower the speed and

stop the car in a safe way and allow the Driving with open tailgate/boot lid Overload - starter battery
engine to run at idling speed for a few When driving with the tailgate open, toxic The electrical functions in the car load the
minutes in order to allow the gearbox to exhaust fumes can be sucked into the car starter battery (p. 369) to varying degrees.
cool down. through the cargo area. Avoid using the key position II (p. 79) when
• If the car overheats, the air conditioning the engine is switched off. Instead use posi-
may be switched off temporarily. WARNING tion I - which uses less power.
• Do not turn the engine off immediately Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic Also, be aware of different accessories that
you stop after a hard drive. exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car load the electrical system. Do not use func-
through the cargo area.
tions which use a lot of power when the
NOTE
engine is switched off. Examples of such
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to Related information functions are:
operate for a time after the engine has • Loading (p. 153)
been switched off. • ventilation fan
• headlamps
• windscreen wiper
• audio system (high volume).
If the starter battery voltage is low then the
combined instrument panel's information dis-
play shows the text Low battery charge
Power save mode. The energy-saving func-
tion then shuts down certain functions or
reduces certain functions such as the ventila-
tion fan and/or audio system.
– In which case, charge the starter battery
by starting the engine and then running it
for at least 15 minutes - starter battery
charging is more effective during driving
than running the engine at idling speed
while stationary.
08
293
Before a long journey Winter driving starter battery and its capacity is reduced
Before a long journey, it makes good sense to For winter driving it is important to perform by the cold.
go through the following points: certain checks in order to ensure that the car • Use washer fluid (p. 368) to avoid ice
can be driven safely. forming in the washer fluid reservoir.
• Check that the engine is working normally
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo rec-
and that fuel consumption (p. 412) is nor- Check the following in particular before the
mal. ommends using winter tyres on all wheels if
cold season:
there is a risk of snow or ice.
• Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil • The engine coolant (p. 357) must contain
or other fluid). at least 50% glycol. This mixture protects NOTE
• Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths. the engine against frost erosion down to
approximately –35 °C. To achieve opti- The use of winter tyres is a legal require-
• Carrying a warning triangle (p. 323) is a ment in certain countries. Studded tyres
legal requirement in certain countries. mum antifreeze protection, different types
of glycol must not be mixed. are not permitted in all countries.
Related information • The fuel tank must be kept filled to pre-
• Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 353) vent condensation. Slippery driving conditions
• Practise driving on slippery surfaces under
Changing wheels - removing wheels • Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
(p. 319) lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate star- controlled conditions to learn how the car
ting in cold weather and also reduce fuel reacts.
• Lamp replacement - general (p. 359)
consumption while the engine is cold. For
Related information
more information on suitable oils, see
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions • Winter driving (p. 294)
(p. 404).
IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard
driving or in hot weather.
• The condition of the starter battery and

charge level must be inspected. Cold
weather places great demands on the
08
294
Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing Fuel filler flap - manual opening Filling up with fuel
The fuel filler flap can be opened/closed as The fuel filler flap can be opened manually Important things to consider when refuelling.
follows: when electric opening from the passenger
compartment is not possible. Opening/closing the fuel cap
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
A certain overpressure may arise in the tank

Open the fuel filler flap using the button on 1. Open/remove the side hatch in the cargo in the event of high outside temperatures.
the lighting panel - the flap opens when the area (same side as fuel filler flap) and Open the cap slowly.
button is released. locate the green cord with handle.
• After refuelling - refit the cap and turn it
In the combined instrument panel's 2. Pull the cord gently straight back until the until one or more clicking sounds are
display the arrow on the symbol indi- fuel filler flap folds out with a "click". heard.
cates which side of the car the fuel cap is
located. IMPORTANT Filling up with fuel
Pull the wire gently - minimal force is
• Do not overfill the tank but fill until the
• Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in pump nozzle cuts out.
until a click confirms that it is closed. required to disengage the hatch lock.
Related information NOTE

Related information
• Filling up with fuel (p. 295) • Filling up with fuel (p. 295) Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot
weather.
08
}}
295
||
Filling with a fuel can15 Fuel - handling IMPORTANT
When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel Fuel of a lower quality than that recom-
located under the floor hatch in the cargo Mixing different types of fuel16 or the use
mended by Volvo must not be used as engine
of fuel that is not recommended invalid-
area. power and fuel consumption is negatively ates Volvo's warranties, as well as any
Make sure you insert the funnel's pipe firmly affected. supplementary service agreements, and
into the filler pipe. The filler pipe has an open- this applies to all engines. NOTE: Does not
able cover and the funnel's pipe must be slid
WARNING apply to cars with engines adapted for
driving on ethanol fuel (E85).
past the cover before filling can begin. Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and get-
ting fuel splashes in the eyes.
Related information NOTE
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any
• Fuel filler flap - manual opening (p. 295) contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
• Fuel - handling (p. 296) of water for at least 15 minutes and seek trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi-
medical attention. nation with fuel grade are factors that
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, could affect the car's performance.
bioethanol and mixtures of them and die-
sel are highly toxic and could cause per-
manent injury or be fatal if swallowed. Related information
Seek medical attention immediately if fuel • Economical driving (p. 300)
has been swallowed. • Fuel - diesel (p. 297)
• Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 299)
WARNING • Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be (p. 412)
ignited. • Fuel tank - volume (p. 411)
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before
starting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone
when refuelling. The ring signal could
cause spark build-up and ignite petrol
fumes, leading to fire and injury.
08
15 Only applies to cars with diesel engine.

16 Only applies to mixing petrol and ethanol fuel.
296
Fuel - petrol IMPORTANT Fuel - diesel

Petrol is used as fuel. Diesel is used as fuel.
• Fuel that contains up to
Only use petrol from well-known producers. 10 percent by volume ethanol is per- Only use diesel fuel from well-known produc-
Never use fuel of dubious quality. Petrol must mitted. ers. Never use fuel of dubious quality. Diesel
fulfil the EN 228 standard if this is available. • EN 228 E10 petrol (max fuel must fulfil the EN 590 and/or SS 155435
10 percent by volume ethanol) is standards. Diesel engines are sensitive to
• 95 RON can be used for normal driving.
approved for use. contaminants in the fuel, such as metals and
• 98 RON is recommended for optimum
• Ethanol higher than E10 (max a high volume of sulphur for example.
performance and minimum fuel consump-
10 percent by volume ethanol) is not At low temperatures (-6 °C to -40 °C), a par-
tion.
permitted, e.g. E85. affin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel,
When driving in temperatures above +38 °C,
fuel with the highest possible octane rating is
• Ethanol higher than E10 which may lead to ignition problems. Special
(max 10 percent by volume ethanol) is diesel fuel designed for low temperatures
recommended for optimum performance and not permitted, e.g. E85. around freezing point is available from the
fuel economy.
major oil companies. This fuel is less viscous
Related information at low temperatures and reduces the risk of
IMPORTANT paraffin precipitate.
• Fuel - handling (p. 296)
• Use only unleaded petrol to avoid
• Economical driving (p. 300) The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
damaging the catalytic converter. reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When
• Fuel that contains up to 10 volume-%
• Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 412) refuelling, check that the area around the fuel
ethanol is permitted. filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the
• Fuel containing metallic additives must
• Fuel tank - volume (p. 411) paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter-
not be used. gent and water.
• Do not use any additives which have
not been recommended by Volvo.
08
}}
297
||
IMPORTANT Once the engine has stopped due to fuel The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals
starvation, the fuel system needs a few specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet
Diesel fuel must: moments to carry out a check. Do this before or if you suspect that the car has been filled
• fulfil the EN 590 and/or SS 155435 starting the engine, once the fuel tank has with contaminated fuel. For more information,
standards been filled with diesel: see Volvo service programme (p. 345).
• have a sulphur content not exceeding 1. Insert the remote control key in the igni-
10 mg/kg tion switch and push it in to the end posi- IMPORTANT
• have a maximum of 7 vol % FAME tion. For more information, see Key posi- Certain special additives remove the water
(Fatty Acid Methyl Ester). tions (p. 79). separation in the fuel filter.
2. Press the START button without
depressing the brake and/or clutch pedal. Related information
IMPORTANT
3. Wait approx. one minute. • Fuel - handling (p. 296)
Diesel type fuels that must not be used:
4. To start the engine: Depress the brake • Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 299)
• Special additives and/or clutch pedal and then press the
• Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
• Marine diesel fuel START button again. (p. 412)
• Heating oil
NOTE
• FAME17 (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) and
vegetable oil. Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel
shortage:
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in
accordance with Volvo recommendations • Stop the car on as flat/level ground as
and generate increased wear and engine possible - if the car is tilting there is a
damage that is not covered by the Volvo risk of air pockets in the fuel supply.
warranty.
Draining condensation from the fuel
Empty tank filter
The design of the fuel system in a diesel The fuel filter separates condensation from
engine means that if the vehicle runs out of the fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine
fuel, the tank may need to be vented in the operation.
workshop in order to restart the engine after
08 fuelling.
17 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of FAME, but further amounts must not be added.
298
Catalytic converters • Fuel - diesel (p. 297) Diesel particle filter (DPF)
The purpose of the catalytic converters is to Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter,
purify exhaust gases. They are located close which results in more efficient emission con-
to the engine so that operating temperature is trol.
reached quickly.
The particles in the exhaust gases are collec-
The catalytic converters consist of a monolith ted in the filter during normal driving. So-
(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel called "regeneration" is started in order to
walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/ burn away the particles and empty the filter.
rhodium/palladium. These metals act as cata- This requires the engine to have reached nor-
lysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate a mal operating temperature.
chemical reaction without being used up
Regeneration of the particle filter is automatic
themselves.
and normally takes 10-20 minutes. It may
Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor take a little longer at a low average speed.
Fuel consumption may increase slightly dur-
The Lambda-sond is part of a control system
ing regeneration.
intended to reduce emissions and improve
fuel economy. For more information, see Fuel Regeneration in cold weather
consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 412). If the car is frequently driven short distances
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen con- in cold weather then the engine does not
tent of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. reach normal operating temperature. This
This value is fed into an electronic system means that regeneration of the diesel particle
that continuously controls the injectors. The filter does not take place and the filter is not
ratio of fuel to air directed to the engine is emptied.
continuously adjusted. These adjustments When the filter has become approx. 80% full
create optimal conditions for efficient com- of particles, a yellow warning triangle is
bustion, and together with the three-way cat- shown in the combined instrument panel, and
alytic converter reduce harmful emissions the message Soot filter full See manual is
(hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide and nitrous shown in its information display.
oxides).
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the
Related information car until the engine reaches normal operating 08
• Economical driving (p. 300) temperature, preferably on a main road or
• Fuel - petrol (p. 297)
}}
299
||
motorway. The car should then be driven for Economical driving • For lowest fuel consumption, activate
approximately 20 minutes more. Driving economically means driving smoothly ECO (p. 284)*18.
while thinking ahead and adjusting your driv- • Use the ECO Guide which indicates how
NOTE ing style and speed to the prevailing condi- fuel-efficiently the car is being driven, see
The following may arise during regenera- tions. Eco guide & Power guide* (p. 68).
tion: • Drive in the highest gear possible, adap-
ted to the current traffic situation and
• a smaller reduction of engine power
road - lower engine speeds result in lower
may be noticed temporarily
fuel consumption. Use the gear indicator
• fuel consumption may increase tem- (p. 266).
porarily
• Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration
• a smell of burning may arise. and heavy braking.
• High speed results in increased fuel con-
When regeneration is complete the warning sumption - the wind resistance increases
text is cleared automatically. with speed.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather - the • Do not run the engine to operating tem-
perature at idling speed, but rather drive
engine then reaches normal operating tem-
with a light load as soon as possible - a
perature more quickly.
cold engine consumes more fuel than a
warm one.
IMPORTANT
• Drive with the correct air pressure in the
If the filter is completely filled with parti- tyres and check this regularly - select
cles, it may be difficult to start the engine ECO tyre pressure for best results, see
and the filter is non-functional. Then there Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 415).
is a risk that the filter will need to be
replaced. • Choice of tyres can affect fuel consump-
tion - seek advice on suitable tyres from a
dealer.
Related information
• Remove unnecessary items from the car -
• Fuel - handling (p. 296)
the greater the load the higher the con-
08
• Fuel - diesel (p. 297) sumption.
• Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions • Use engine braking to slow down, when it
(p. 412) can take place without risk to other road
• Fuel tank - volume (p. 411) users.

• A roof load and ski box increase air resis- Driving with a trailer* • Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
tance, leading to higher consumption - When driving with a trailer there are a number brand new. Wait until it has been driven
remove the load carriers when not in use. of important points to think about regarding at least 1000 km.
• Avoid driving with open windows. e.g. the towing bracket, the trailer and how • The brakes are loaded much more than
For information about Volvo Car Corpora- the load is positioned in the trailer. usual on long and steep downhill slopes.
tion's environmental philosophy, see Volvo Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. speed.
Car Corporation's environmental philosophy
The total of the weight of the passengers and
(p. 21). • For safety reasons, the maximum permit-
all accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's ted speed for the car when coupled with
For more information about fuel consumption, payload by a corresponding weight. For more a trailer should not be exceeded. Follow
see Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions detailed information, see Weights (p. 399). the regulations in force for the permitted
(p. 412). speeds and weights.
If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo,
then the car is delivered with the necessary • Maintain a low speed when driving with a
WARNING equipment for driving with a trailer. trailer up long, steep ascents.
Never switch off the engine while moving, • The car's towing bracket must be of an • Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of
such as downhill, this deactivates impor- approved type. more than 12%.
tant systems such as the power steering
and brake servo. • If the towbar is retrofitted, check with Trailer cable
your Volvo dealer that the car is fully An adapter is required if the car's towing
equipped for driving with a trailer. bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer
Related information
• Fuel - handling (p. 296) • Distribute the load on the trailer so that has 7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable
the weight on the towing bracket com- approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does
• Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions plies with the specified maximum towball not drag on the ground.
(p. 412) load.
• Fuel tank - volume (p. 411) • Increase the tyre pressure to the recom- Direction indicators and brake lights on
mended pressure for a full load. For infor- the trailer
mation on the tyre pressure, see Tyres - If any of the trailer's lamps for direction indi-
approved tyre pressures (p. 415). cators are broken, then the combined instru-
• The engine is loaded more heavily than ment panel's symbol for direction indicators
usual when driving with a trailer. flashes faster than normal and the information
display shows the text Trailer indicator
08
malfunction.
18 Only applies to cars with automatic gearbox.

}}

||
If any of the trailer's lamps for the brake light Related information Driving with a trailer* - manual
are broken then the Trailer brake light • Driving with a trailer* - manual gearbox gearbox
malfunction text is shown. (p. 302) When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a
Level control* • Driving with a trailer* - automatic gearbox hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.
(p. 303)
The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant Overheating
height irrespective of the car's load (up to the • Towing bracket/Towbar* (p. 303)
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a
maximum permissible weight). When the car • Lamp replacement - general (p. 359) hot climate there may be a risk of overheat-
is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly, ing.
which is normal
• Do not run the engine at higher revolu-
Trailer weights tions than 4500 rpm (diesel engines:
For information on Volvo's permitted trailer 3500 rpm) - otherwise the oil temperature
weights, see Towing capacity and towball may become too high.
load (p. 400).
Diesel engine 5-cyl
• In the event of a risk of overheating the
NOTE optimal speed for the engine is
The stated maximum permitted trailer 2300-3000 rpm for optimal circulation of
weights are those permitted by Volvo. the coolant.
National vehicle regulations can further
limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars Related information
can be certified for higher towing weights • Driving with a trailer* (p. 301)
than the car can actually tow.
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for
trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and
trailer may be difficult to control in the
event of sudden movement and braking.
08

Driving with a trailer* - automatic IMPORTANT Towing bracket/Towbar*

gearbox A towing bracket means that it is possible to
See also the specific information on slow
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a driving with a trailer for cars with the e.g. tow a trailer behind the car.
hot climate there may be a risk of overheating. Powershift automatic transmission, see
If the car is equipped with a detachable/
Automatic gearbox -- Powershift* (p. 270).
• An automatic gearbox selects the opti- removable towbar, the installation instruc-
mum gear related to load and engine tions for the loose section must be followed
speed. Starting on a hill carefully, see Detachable towbar* - attach-
• In the event of overheating a warning 1. Depress the foot brake. ment/removal (p. 305).
symbol is illuminated in the combined 2. Move the gear selector to driving posi-
instrument panel with a message that is tion D. WARNING
shown in the information display - follow
3. Release the parking brake. If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable
the recommendation given.
towbar:
4. Release the foot brake and start driving
Steep inclines off. • Follow the installation instructions
• Do not lock the automatic transmission in carefully.
a higher gear than the engine "can cope Related information • The detachable section must be
with" - it is not always a good idea to • Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p. 267) locked with the key before setting off.
drive at a high gear with low engine revo-
lutions. • Check that the indicator window
shows green.
Parking on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake. Important checks
2. Activate the parking brake. • The towbar's towball must be cleaned
and greased regularly.
3. Move the gear selector to position P.
4. Release the foot brake. NOTE
• Move the gear selector to park position P When a hitch with a vibration damper is
when parking an automatic car with a used, the towball must not be lubricated.
hitched trailer. Always use the parking
brake.
Related information 08
• Block the wheels with chocks when park- • Driving with a trailer* (p. 301)
ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill.

Detachable towbar* - storage Detachable towbar* - specifications

Store the detachable towbar in the cargo Specifications for detachable towbar.
area.
Specifications
Dimensions, mounting points (mm)

G031713
G021485
A 1036
Towbar storage space.
B 111
IMPORTANT C 855
Always remove the towbar after use and
store it in the appointed location in the car, D 428
firmly fastened with its strap.
E 109
Related information F 326

• Detachable towbar* - specifications G Side member
(p. 304)
• Detachable towbar* - attachment/removal H Ball centre
(p. 305)
• Driving with a trailer* (p. 301) Related information
• Detachable towbar* - attachment/removal
08 (p. 305)
• Detachable towbar* - storage (p. 304)
• Driving with a trailer* (p. 301)

Detachable towbar* - attachment/

removal
The attachment/removal of the detachable
towbar is performed in the following way:
Attaching
G021487
G021489
Ensure that the mechanism is in the Insert the towbar until you hear a click.
unlocked position by turning the key
clockwise.
Remove the protective cover by first turn-

ing the screws a quarter turn . Then
slide the cover diagonally downward and
G021490
forward in order to release and finally pull
it backwards to remove it .
G021488
The indicator window must show green.
The indicator window must show red.
08
}}

||
G000000
G021494
G021495
Turn the key anticlockwise to locked Check that the towbar is secure by pull- Safety cable.
position. Remove the key from the lock. ing it up, down and back.
WARNING
WARNING
Take care to secure the trailer's safety
If the towbar is not fitted correctly then it cable in the intended bracket.
must be detached and reattached in
accordance with the previous instructions.
Removing the towbar

IMPORTANT
Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch,
the remainder of the towbar should be
clean and dry.
Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the

unlocked position.
08
306
Trailer Stability Assist - TSA19

The trailer stability assist TSA (Trailer Stability
Assist) function is designed to stabilise the car
and trailer combination if it begins to snake.
Push in the locking wheel and turn it Refit the protective cover by wedging the
anticlockwise until you hear a click. cover's hooks into the bumper's rear
edge. Push the cover upward until the
bolts are in the correct position .
Finally, turn the bolts a quarter turn so
that the cover is attached. It is important
that the handle of the bolts is set trans-
versely during assembly.
Related information
• Detachable towbar* - storage (p. 304)
• Detachable towbar* - specifications
Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it (p. 304)
comes to a stop. Hold it in this position • Driving with a trailer* (p. 301)
while pulling the towbar rearward and
upward.
WARNING
Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in
the car, see Detachable towbar* - storage
(p. 304). 08
19 Included in the installation of Volvo genuine towbar.

}}

||
TSA- the function is included in the stability often enough to help the driver regain control Related information
system (p. 187) ESC20. of the car. • Electronic stability control (ESC) - general
If snaking is not eliminated the first time the (p. 187)
Function
The snaking phenomenon can occur with any TSA system comes into action, the car/trailer
car/trailer combination. Snaking normally combination is braked with all wheels and
occurs at high speeds. But, there is a risk of it engine power is reduced. Once snaking has
occurring at lower speeds (70-90 km/h) if the been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer
trailer is overloaded or the load is improperly combination is stable once again, the system
distributed, e.g. too far back. stops regulating and the driver once again
has full control of the car. For more informa-
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a tion, see Electronic stability control (ESC) -
triggering factor, e.g.: operation (p. 188).
• Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and
Miscellaneous
powerful side wind.
TSA can engage within the speed range
• Car with trailer drives on an uneven road 60-160 km/h.
surface or in a pothole.
• Sweeping steering wheel movements. NOTE
Operation TSA function is switched off if the driver
If snaking has started, it could be difficult or selects Sport mode, see Electronic stabil-
even impossible to suppress. This makes the ity control (ESC) - general (p. 187).
car/trailer combination difficult to control and
there is a risk that you could, for example, TSA may fail to engage if the driver uses sud-
end up in the wrong lane or leave the car- den steering wheel movements to try to rec-
riageway. tify the snaking because, in such a situation,
the system cannot determine whether it is the
The trailer stability assist function continually
trailer or the driver that is causing the snak-
monitors car movements, particularly lateral
ing.
movements. If snaking is detected, the front
wheels are individually braked. This serves to The ESC20 symbol in the combined
08 stabilise the car/trailer combination. This is instrument panel flashes when the
TSA system is working.
20 (Electronic Stability Control) - Electronic stability control.
308
Towing WARNING In the event of uncertainty as to whether or

During towing, one vehicle is towed by not the car is equipped with Powershift trans-
The brake servo and power steering do not mission, this can be verified by checking the
another vehicle using a tow rope. work when the engine is switched off - the designation on the gearbox label under the
brake pedal needs to be depressed
Find out the statutory maximum speed limit bonnet, see Type designations (p. 395). The
about 5 times more heavily and the steer-
for towing before towing begins. ing is considerably heavier than normal. designation ”MPS6” means that it is
1. Unlock the steering lock by inserting the Powershift transmission - otherwise it is
remote control key in the ignition switch Geartronic automatic transmission.
Manual gearbox
and giving a long press on the START/ Prior to towing:
STOP ENGINE button - key position II is IMPORTANT
activated, see Key positions (p. 79) for – Move gear lever into neutral and release
Avoid towing.
more information about key positions. the parking brake.
• However, the car can be towed for a
2. The remote control key must remain in Automatic gearbox Geartronic short distance at low speed to move it
the ignition switch while the car is being Prior to towing: from a dangerous position - not further
towed. than 10 km and not faster than
– Move the gear selector to position N and
10 km/h. Note that the car must
3. Keep the towline taut when the towing release the parking brake.
always be towed with the wheels roll-
vehicle reduces speed by holding your
ing forward.
foot gently pressed on the brake pedal - IMPORTANT
thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking. • In the event of moving a longer dis-
• Do not tow the vehicle at speeds tance than 10 km, the car must be
4. Be prepared to brake to stop. higher than 80 km/h or for distances in transported with the drive wheels
excess of 80 km. raised from the road - professional
WARNING • Note that the car must always be recovery is recommended.
• Check that the steering lock is towed with the wheels rolling forward.
unlocked before towing. Prior to towing:
• The remote control key must be in key Automatic gearbox Powershift – Move the gear selector to position N and
position II - in position I all airbags are Models with the Powershift gearbox should release the parking brake.
deactivated. not be towed. If towing still has to take place,
Jump starting
• Never remove the remote control key the route must be as short as possible and
from the ignition switch when the car Do not tow the car to bump start the engine. 08
then with very low speed.
is being towed. Use a donor battery if the starter battery is
}}
309
||
discharged and the engine does not start, see Towing eye The cover for the towing eye's attach-
Jump starting with battery (p. 264). The towing eye is screwed into a threaded ment point is available in two variants
socket behind a cover on the right-hand side which must be opened in different ways:
IMPORTANT of the bumper, front or rear. • Open the variant with a recess using a
The catalytic converter may be damaged coin or similar inserted in the recess,
Attaching the towing eye turning it outwards. Then turn out the
during attempts to tow-start the engine.
cover completely and remove it.
Related information • The second variant has a marking
along one side or in a corner: Press the
• Towing eye (p. 310)
marking with a finger and fold out the
• Recovery (p. 311) opposite side/corner at the same time
using a coin or similar - the cover turns
around its axis and can then be
removed.
Screw the towing eye right in up to its
flange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g.
using the wheel wrench.
After use, unscrew the towing eye and
return it to its place.
Finish by refitting the cover onto the
bumper.
The towing eye may be used to pull the car
up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed plat-
form. The car's position and ground clear-
ance determine whether it is possible. If the
slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too
steep, or if the ground clearance under the
Take out the towing eye that is located
car is inadequate, then the car may be dam-
under the floor hatch in the cargo area -
aged if you try to pull it up using the towing
08 in some cases it may be hidden under the
eye. Raise the car using the recovery vehi-
sill.
cle's lifting device if necessary.
310
WARNING Recovery IMPORTANT

Recovery means that the vehicle is transpor-
No one/nothing is allowed to remain Note that the car must always be transpor-
behind the recovery vehicle while the car ted away by means of another vehicle. ted with the wheels rolling forward.
pulled up onto the flatbed platform.
Call a recovery service for recovery assis- • An All Wheel Drive car (AWD) with
tance. raised front suspension must not be
IMPORTANT towed at speeds above 70 km/h. It
The towing eye may be used to pull the car
should not be towed further than 50
The towing eye is only designed for towing up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed plat-
km.
on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck form. The car's position and ground clear-
or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for ance determine whether it is possible. If the
recovery assistance. slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too Related information
steep, or if the ground clearance under the • Towing (p. 309)
Related information car is inadequate, then the car may be dam-
• Towing (p. 309) aged if you try to pull it up using the towing
eye. Raise the car using the recovery vehi-
• Recovery (p. 311)
cle's lifting device if necessary.
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain
behind the recovery vehicle while the car
pulled up onto the flatbed platform.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing
on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck
or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for
recovery assistance.
08
311
WHEELS AND TYRES
09 Wheels and tyres
Tyres - maintenance New tyres Wear and maintenance 09

Amongst other things, the function of the Correct tyre pressure (p. 315) results in more
tyres is to provide grip on the road surface, even wear. Driving style, tyre pressure, cli-
dampen vibration and protect the wheel from mate and road condition affect how quickly
wear. your tyres age and wear. To avoid differences
in tread depth and to prevent wear patterns
Driving characteristics arising, the front and rear wheels can be
Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characte- switched with each other. A suitable distance
ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre for the first change is approx. 5000 km and
pressure and speed rating are important for then at 10000 km intervals. Volvo recom-
how the car performs. mends that you contact an authorised Volvo
workshop for checking if you are uncertain
Tyre age about tread depth. If significant differences in
All tyres older than 6 years old should be wear (> 1 mm difference in tread depth)
checked by an expert even if they seem Tyres are perishable. After a few years they between tyres have already occurred, then
undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even begin to harden at the same time as the fric- the least worn tyres must always be fitted on
if they are hardly ever or never used. The tion capacity/characteristics gradually deteri- the rear. Understeer is normally easier to cor-
function can therefore be affected. This orate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh rect than oversteer, and leads to the car con-
applies to all tyres that are stored for future tyres as possible when you replace them. tinuing forwards in a straight line rather than
use. Examples of external signs which indi- This is especially important with regard to having the rear end skidding to one side,
cate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are winter tyres. The last four digits in the resulting in possible complete loss of control
cracks or discoloration. sequence mean the week and year of manu- over the car. This is why it is important for the
facture. This is the tyre's DOT marking rear wheels never to lose grip before the front
(Department of Transportation), and this is wheels.
stated with four digits, for example 1510. The
tyre in the figure was manufactured in week Wheels must be stored lying down or hanging
15 of 2010. up - never standing up.
Summer and winter tyres WARNING

When summer and winter wheels are
A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control
changed the wheels should be marked with
over the car.
which side of the car they were mounted on,
for example L for left and R for right.
}}
313
09 Wheels and tyres
||
09 Related information Tyres - direction of rotation NOTE
• Tyres - dimensions (p. 317) Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed
Make sure that both pairs of wheels have
• Tyres - speed ratings (p. 318) to only turn in one direction have the direction the same type and dimension, and also the
of rotation marked with an arrow.
• Tyres - load index (p. 317) same make.
• Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 314)
• Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 315) Follow the recommended tyre pressures
specified in the tyre pressure table (p. 415).
Related information
• Tyres - dimensions (p. 317)
• Tyres - speed ratings (p. 318)
• Tyres - load index (p. 317)
• Tyres - maintenance (p. 313)
• Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 315)
G021778
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
The tyre must always rotate in the same
direction throughout its lifespan. Tyres should
only be switched between front and rear
positions, never between left and right-hand
sides, or vice versa. If the tyres are fitted
incorrectly, the car's braking characteristics
and capacity to force rain and slush out of the
way are adversely affected. Tyres with the
greatest tread depth should always be fitted
to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk of
skidding).
314
09 Wheels and tyres
Tyres - tread wear indicators Tyres - air pressure • Tyre pressure for the car's recommended 09
A tread wear indicator shows the status of the Tyres can have different air pressures which tyre dimension
tyre's tread. are measured in bar. • ECO pressure1
Check the air pressure in the tyres • Spare wheel tyre pressure (Temporary
Spare)
The tyre pressures must be checked every
month.
NOTE
This also applies to the car's spare wheel.
• Check the tyre pressure when the
tyres are cold. "Cold tyres" means that
the tyres are at the same temperature
as the outdoor temperature. The tyres
will heat up and the tyre pressures will
increase after driving for a few kilome-
G021829
tres.
• Tyre pressures which are too low will
Tread wear indicators. increase fuel consumption, reduce tyre
Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless service life and impair the car's han-
dling. Driving with tyre pressures
bands across the width of the tread. On the
which are too low may lead to the
side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread
tyres overheating and sustaining dam-
Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth
age. Tyre pressures affect ride com-
is down to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be fort, road noise and steering.
level in height with the tread wear indicators.
Change to new tyres as soon as possible. • Tyre pressure decreases over time,
Remember that tyres with little tread depth this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre
pressure also varies depending on
provide very poor grip in rain and snow.
ambient temperature.
Related information
}}
315
09 Wheels and tyres
||
09 Tyre pressure label • Tyres - maintenance (p. 313) Wheel and wheel rim dimensions
• Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 315) Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in
accordance with the examples in the table
below.
The car has an approval for the complete

vehicle. This means that certain combinations
of wheel (wheel rim) and tyre are approved.
Wheels (rims) have a designation of dimen-
sions, for example: 7Jx16x50.
G021830
7 Rim width in inches
J Rim flange profile

The tyre pressure label on the driver's side
door pillar (between frame and rear door) 16 Rim diameter in inches
shows which pressures the tyres should have
at different loads and speed conditions. This 50 Off-set in mm (distance from wheel
is also specified in the tyre pressure table, centre to wheel contact surface
see Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 415). against the hub)
Fuel economy, ECO pressure Related information

In order to obtain optimum fuel economy at • Tyres - dimensions (p. 317)
speeds below 160 km/h an ECO pressure is
recommended (applies to both full and light
• Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 415)
load), see Tyres - approved tyre pressures
(p. 415).
Related information
1 ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy.
316
09 Wheels and tyres
Tyres - dimensions • Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 316) Tyres - load index 09
The car's wheels (wheel rims) and tyres have Load index indicates a tyre's ability to carry a
a certain dimension, see the examples in the certain load.
table below.
Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a
The car has an approval for the complete load, a load index (LI). The car's weight deter-
vehicle. This means that certain combinations mines the load capacity required of the tyres.
of wheels (wheel rims) and tyres are Minimum permissible index is indicated in the
approved. load index table.
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres. Related information
Example of designation: 235/60 R18 103 V. • Tyres - dimensions (p. 317)
235 Tyre width (mm)
60 Ratio between tyre wall height and • Tyres - maintenance (p. 313)
tyre width (%)
R Radial ply
18 Rim diameter in inches
103 Codes for the maximum permitted

tyre load, tyre load index (LI)
V Speed rating for maximum permitted

speed, speed rating (SS). (In this
case 240 km/h.)
Related information
317
09 Wheels and tyres
09 Tyres - speed ratings Wheel bolts

W 270 km/h
Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum Wheel bolts are used to fasten the wheels at
speed and therefore belongs to a particular Y 300 km/h the hubs and are available in different ver-
speed rating (SS - Speed Symbol). sions.
Tyre speed class must at least correspond WARNING

IMPORTANT
with the car's top speed. Minimum speed rat- The car must be fitted with tyres which
ing is indicated in the speed rating table have the same or a higher load index The wheel bolts must be tightened to 140
below. The only exception to these regula- (p. 317) (LI) and speed rating (SS) than Nm. Overtightening can damage the nuts
specified. If a tyre with too low a load and the bolts.
tions is the winter tyre (p. 319)2, where a
index or speed rating is used, it may over-
lower speed rating may be used. If such a heat.
tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven Only use rims that are tested and approved
faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine acces-
example, class Q can be driven at a maxi- Related information sories. Check the torque with a torque
mum of 160 km/h). Traffic regulations deter- • Tyres - dimensions (p. 317) wrench.
mine how fast a car can be driven, not the • Tyres - load index (p. 317) Locking wheel bolts*
speed rating of the tyres. • Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 314) Locking wheel bolts* can be used on both
aluminium and steel rims. Under the cargo
NOTE area floor there is space for the sleeve for the
The maximum permitted speed is speci- lockable wheel bolts.
fied in the table.
Related information
• Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 316)
Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)
T 190 km/h
H 210 km/h
V 240 km/h
2 Both metal-studded and studless tyres.

09 Wheels and tyres
Winter tyres Using snow chains Changing wheels - removing wheels 09

Winter tyres are tyres that are adapted for Snow chains may only be used on the front The car's wheels can be changed for e.g. win-
winter road conditions. wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars). ter wheels/winter tyres.
Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow
Winter tyres chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this Spare wheel*
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particu- wears out both the snow chains and tyres. The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only
lar dimensions. Tyre dimensions are depend- intended for use temporarily and must be
ent on engine variant. When driving on winter WARNING replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as
tyres, the correct type of tyres must be fitted possible. The car's handling may be altered
to all four wheels. Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva- by the use of the spare wheel. The spare
lent chains designed for the car model,
wheel is smaller than the normal wheel. The
and tyre and rim dimensions. In the event
NOTE of uncertainty Volvo recommends that you car's ground clearance is affected accord-
consult an authorised Volvo workshop. ingly. Pay attention to high kerbs and do not
Volvo recommends that you consult a machine wash the car. If the spare wheel is
Volvo dealer about which wheel rim and The wrong snow chains may cause serious
tyre types are most suitable. damage to your car and lead to an acci- fitted on the front axle, you cannot use snow
dent. chains at the same time. On all-wheel drive
cars the drive on the rear axle can be discon-
Studded tyres nected. The spare wheel must not be
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently IMPORTANT
repaired.
for 500-1000 km so the studs settle properly Only single-sided snow chains are permit-
into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and espe- ted. Use Volvo genuine snow chains or The correct tyre pressure for the spare wheel
cially the studs, a longer service life. similar that are properly suited to the car is stated in the tyre pressure table (p. 415).
model, tyre size and wheel rim size. In the
event of uncertainty Volvo recommends IMPORTANT
NOTE that you consult an authorised Volvo work-
The legal provisions for the use of studded shop. • Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a
tyres vary from country to country. spare wheel on the car.
Related information • The car must never be driven fitted
with more than one "Temporary
Tread depth • Changing wheels - removing wheels
(p. 319) Spare" wheel.
Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem-
peratures place considerably higher demands
on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel
therefore recommends not to drive on winter well with the outside down. The same bolt
tyres that have a tread depth of less than runs through to secure the spare wheel and
4 mm.
}}

09 Wheels and tyres
||
09 the foam block. The foam block contains all 3. Place chocks in front of and behind the
WARNING
the tools needed to change the wheels. wheels which will remain on the ground to
Check that the jack is not damaged, that prevent them from rolling. Use heavy
Taking out the spare wheel under the the threads are thoroughly lubricated and wooden blocks or large stones for exam-
cargo area floor that it is free from dirt.
ple.
1. Fold up the cargo area floor, from the rear
4. Screw together the towing eye with the
and forwards. NOTE wheel wrench* until the stop position in
2. Undo the retaining screw. Volvo recommends only using the jack* accordance with the following figure.
3. Lift out the foam block with its tools. that belongs to the car model in question,
which is indicated on the jack's label.
4. Lift out the spare wheel.
The label also indicates the jack's maxi-
mum lift capacity at a specified minimum
Removing
lifting height.
Set up warning triangle (p. 323) if a wheel is
replaced in trafficked location. The car and
jack* must be on a firm horizontal surface. 2. Take out jack*, wheel wrench*, removal
tool for wheel covers* and for the wheel
1. Apply the parking brake, (p. 288) and bolts' plastic caps that are fitted in the
engage reverse gear, or position P if the foam block. If another jack is selected,
car has an automatic gearbox. see Raising the car (p. 348).
IMPORTANT
The towing eye must be screwed into all
threads in the wheel bolt wrench.
5. Remove the plastic caps from the wheel

bolts with the intended tool.
6. Loosen the wheel bolts ½-1 turn anti-
clockwise with the wheel wrench.
Tool for removing the plastic caps on the wheel

bolts.

09 Wheels and tyres
8. Related information 09
WARNING
• Changing wheels - fitting (p. 322)
Never position anything between the
ground and the jack, nor between the jack • Jack* (p. 324)
and the car's jacking point. • Warning triangle (p. 323)
• Wheel bolts (p. 318)
7. There are two jacking points on each side
of the car. There is a recess in the plastic
cover at each point. Crank the foot of the
jack down so it is pressed squarely on the
ground.
Check that the jack sits in the anchorage

as illustrated and that the foot is posi-
tioned vertically under the anchorage.
IMPORTANT
The jacking point is the rearmost of the
two rear recesses.
9. Lift the car so that the wheel is free.

Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the
IMPORTANT wheel.
The ground must be firm, smooth and
level. WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised
on the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack. If a wheel must be
changed in a trafficked environment, pas-
sengers must stand in a safe place.

09 Wheels and tyres
09 Changing wheels - fitting • Warning triangle (p. 323)

NOTE
It is important that the procedure for fitting
• After a tyre has been inflated, always
the wheel is carried out correctly.
refit the dust cap in order to avoid
Installation damage to the valve from gravel, dirt,
1. Clean the contact surfaces between etc.
wheel and hub. • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts unscrew.
thoroughly.
3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot
NOTE
rotate.
The wheel cover outlet for the valve must
be positioned over the valve on the wheel
rim during fitting.
NOTE
The car's regular jack is designed only for
use occasionally and for a short time, such
as when changing a wheel with a punc-
tured tyre, switching between summer
tyres and winter tyres, etc. Only the jack
belonging to the specific model is to be
used to jack up the car. If the car is to be
jacked up more often, or for a longer time
4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is than is required just to change a wheel,
important that the wheel bolts are tight- use of a garage jack is recommended. In
this instance, follow the instructions for
ened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check use that come with the equipment.
the torque with a torque wrench.
5. Refit any full wheel covers. Related information
• Changing wheels - removing wheels
(p. 319)
• Jack* (p. 324)

09 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle Lift the floor hatch and take out the warn- Tools 09
The warning triangle is used to warn other ing triangle. Amongst other things, the car contains towing
road users of a stationary vehicle. Take the warning triangle from the case, eye, jack* and wheel bolt wrench*.
fold out and assemble the two loose
Storage and folding up
sides.
Fold out the warning triangle's support
legs.
Follow the regulations for the use of a warn-
ing triangle. Position the warning triangle in a
suitable place with regard to traffic.
Ensure the warning triangle and its case are
properly secured in the cargo area after use.
Located under the cargo area floor are the

car's towing eye, jack* and wheel wrench*.
There is also space for the sleeve for the
lockable wheel bolts.
Related information
• Emergency puncture repair* (p. 332)
• Towing eye (p. 310)
(p. 319)
• Jack* (p. 324)

09 Wheels and tyres
09 Jack* First aid kit*

IMPORTANT
A jack is used to raise the car, e.g. when The first aid box contains first aid equipment.
The tools and jack* must be stored in the
changing the tyres. intended location in the car's cargo area
when not in use.
The original jack should only be used for
changing to the spare wheel. The jack's
thread must always be well greased. Related information
• Warning triangle (p. 323)
Tools - returning into place
A case with first aid equipment is located

under the floor in the cargo area.
The tools and jack* must be returned to their

correct places after use. The jack needs to be
cranked together to the correct position in
order to have space.
The foam block and spare wheel are replaced
in the reverse order to taking out.
Note that there is an arrow on the upper foam
block. It must point forwards in the car.

09 Wheels and tyres
• Tyre pressure monitoring system 09

Tyre pressure monitoring*3 Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - rec-
Tyre pressure monitoring warns the driver ommendations (p. 328) (TPMS)*10 - general
when the pressure is too low in one or more • Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - drive- Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS) (Tyre
of the car's tyres. For certain markets the tyre able punctured tyres* (p. 329) Pressure Monitoring System)* warns the
pressure monitoring is standard in accord- driver when the pressure is too low in one or
ance with legal requirements. more of the car's tyres.
There are two systems for tyre pressure Tyre pressure monitoring uses sensors
monitoring, TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring located inside the air valve in each wheel.
System) and TM (Tyre Monitor). In the event When the car is driven at about 30 km/h the
of uncertainty about which system the car system detects the tyre pressure. If the pres-
has, open the menu system MY CAR and sure is too low then a warning lamp illumi-
search for the car's settings: nates in the combined instrument panel and
• The Tyre pressure menu is used if it is one of the following messages is shown:
TPMS, see Tyre pressure monitoring sys- • Tyre pressure low Check front right
tem (TPMS)* - general (p. 325) tyre
• The Tyre monitoring menu is used if it is • Tyre pressure low Check front left
TM, see Tyre pressure monitoring (TM)* tyre
(p. 330).
• Tyre pressure low Check rear right
The system does not replace normal tyre tyre
maintenance.
• Tyre pressure low Check rear left tyre
Related information • Tyre needs air now Check front right
• Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS)* tyre
- general (p. 325)
• Tyre needs air now Check front left
• Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - adjust tyre
(recalibration) (p. 326)
• Tyre needs air now Check rear right
• Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - recti- tyre
fying low tyre pressure (p. 330)
• Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - acti-
vate/deactivate (p. 328)
3 Standard in certain markets.

}}

09 Wheels and tyres
||
09 • Tyre needs air now Check rear left Related information Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)*16 -
tyre • Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - adjust adjust (recalibration)
• Tyre pressure system Service (recalibration) (p. 326) Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS) (Tyre
required • Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - recti- Pressure Monitoring System)* warns the
Both factory-fitted and optional wheels can fying low tyre pressure (p. 330) driver when the pressure is too low in one or
be equipped with TPMS sensors in the • Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - acti- more of the car's tyres.
valves. vate/deactivate (p. 328)
TPMS can be adjusted in order to follow Vol-
If wheels without TPMS sensors are used or if • Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - rec- vo's tyre pressure recommendations (p. 315),
a sensor has failed then Tyre pressure ommendations (p. 328) such as when driving with a heavy load, for
system Service required will be shown. • Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)* - drive- example.
able punctured tyres* (p. 329)
Always check the system after changing a
wheel in order to ensure that replacement NOTE
wheels work with the system. The car must be stationary when calibra-
For information on the correct tyre pressure, tion is started.
see Tyres - air pressure (p. 315).
Settings are made using the centre console's
The system does not replace normal tyre
controls, see MY CAR (p. 112).
maintenance.
1. Inflate the tyres to the desired pressure in
IMPORTANT accordance with the tyre pressure label
on the driver's side door pillar (between
If a fault occurs in the TPMS system the front and rear doors).
warning lamp in the combined instru-
ment panel will flash for approx. 1 minute 2. Start the engine.
and then illuminate with a constant glow. A 3. Select the menu system MY CAR to open
message is also shown in the combined
instrument panel. the menus for tyre pressure.
4. Select Calibrate tyre pressure and
press OK.


09 Wheels and tyres
5. Drive for at least 10 minutes at a speed of Tyre pressure monitoring system error has occurred in the system. Contact 09
at least 30 km/h. (TPMS)*18 - status a Volvo dealer or workshop.
> Calibration is performed automatically Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS) (Tyre Clearing warning messages
following initialisation by the driver. Pressure Monitoring System)* warns the If a tyre pressure message has been shown
The system provides no confirmation driver when the pressure is too low in one or and the TPMS warning lamp has been illumi-
when the calibration is complete. more of the car's tyres. nated:
The new reference values apply until steps
System and tyre status 1. Check the tyre pressure on the indicated
1-5 are carried out again.
The current status of the system and the tyres tyre/tyres with a tyre pressure gauge.
Related information can be checked, see MY CAR (p. 112).
2. Inflate the tyre/tyres to the correct pres-
• Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 325) 1. Select the menu system MY CAR to open sure in accordance with the tyre pressure
• Tyres - air pressure (p. 315) the menus for tyre monitoring. label on the driver's side door pillar
(between front and rear doors).
2. Select Tyre pressure.
3. In some cases it may be necessary to
The status is colour-coded for each tyre in
drive the car for a few minutes at a speed
accordance with the following:
above 30 km/h in order to clear the warn-
• All-green: the system is operating nor- ing text. At which point, the TPMS warn-
mally and the tyre pressure in all tyres is ing lamp is extinguished as well.
slightly above the recommended level.
• Yellow wheel: corresponding tyre's pres-
sure is too low.
• Red wheel: corresponding tyre's pressure
is very low.
• All wheels grey: the system is temporarily
unavailable. It may be necessary to drive
the car for a few minutes at a speed
above 30 km/h before the system
becomes active again.
• All wheels grey and the message Tyre
pressure system Service required: an

}}

09 Wheels and tyres
09
NOTE Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)*19 - Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)*22 -
activate/deactivate recommendations
• The TPMS system uses a so-called
compensated pressure value, based Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS) (Tyre Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS) (Tyre
on both tyre temperature and ambient Pressure Monitoring System)* warns the Pressure Monitoring System)* warns the
temperature. This means that the tyre driver when the pressure is too low in one or driver when the pressure is too low in one or
pressure may differ slightly from the more of the car's tyres. more of the car's tyres.
recommended pressures listed on the
tyre pressure label on the driver's side NOTE • Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors
are fitted to all wheels on the car, includ-
door pillar (between front and rear The car must be stationary when the tyre ing winter wheels.
doors). For this reason, it may be nec- pressure monitoring is activated/deacti-
essary to inflate the tyres to a slightly vated. • Volvo recommends that sensors are not
higher pressure in order to clear a low moved between different wheels.
tyre pressure message. • The spare wheel is not equipped a with
Settings are made using the centre console's
• To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the TPMS sensor.
pressure should be checked on cold • If the spare wheel or a wheel without a
tyres. "Cold tyres" means the tyres are 1. Start the engine. TPMS sensor is used, the error message
the same temperature as the ambient 2. Select the menu system MY CAR to open Tyre pressure system Service
temperature (approx. 3 hours after the the menus for tyre pressure. required will be shown in the combined
car has been driven). After a few kilo- instrument panel.
metres of driving, the tyres warm up 3. Select Tyre pressure and press OK.
and the pressure increases. • If a wheel has been changed, or if the
> An X is shown in the information dis- TPMS sensor has been moved to another
play if the system is activated, the wheel then the seal, nut and valve core
option disappears if the system is must be replaced.
WARNING
deactivated20.
• Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to • When TPMS sensors are installed, the car
tyre failure, which could result in the Related information should be switched off for at least 15
minutes otherwise an error message will
driver losing control of the car. • Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 325)
be shown in the combined instrument
• The system cannot indicate sudden panel.
tyre damage in advance.

20 Only in certain markets.

09 Wheels and tyres
09
WARNING Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)*24 - WARNING
driveable punctured tyres*
When inflating a tyre equipped with TPMS, Only people with knowledge of SST tyres
hold the nozzle of the pump directly If SST (Self Supporting run flat Tires)* is should fit them.
against the valve to avoid damaging the selected, the car is also equipped with TPMS
SST tyres must only be fitted together with
valve. (p. 325).
TPMS.
This type of tyre has a specially reinforced After an error message about low tyre
NOTE side wall that makes continued driving possi- pressure has been shown, do not drive
ble to a limited extent despite the tyre losing faster than 80 km/h.
• After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid all or some of its pressure. These tyres are fit- Maximum mileage before tyre replacement
damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, ted on a special rim. (Normal tyres can also is 80 km.
etc. be fitted to this rim.) Avoid hard driving such as sudden braking
• Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust If an SST tyre loses tyre pressure then the or turning.
caps can rust and become difficult to yellow TPMS lamp in the combined instru- SST tyres must be replaced if they are
unscrew. ment panel illuminates and a message is damaged or punctured.
shown in the information display. If this
occurs, reduce speed to max. 80 km/h. The
NOTE Related information
tyre must be replaced as soon as possible.
• Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 325)
If you want to change the tyre dimension Drive carefully, in some cases it can be diffi-
then the TPMS system must be reconfig-
ured. For further information - contact a cult to see which tyre is faulty. In order to
Volvo dealer. establish which tyre needs attention, check
all four tyres.
Related information

09 Wheels and tyres
09
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS)*26 - Tyre pressure monitoring (TM)*29 IMPORTANT
rectifying low tyre pressure The TM (Tyre Monitor) system senses tyre If a fault occurs in the TM system the
The tyre pressure monitoring system TPMS rotation speed in order to determine whether
warning lamp in the combined instru-
(Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)27 warns the tyres have the correct tyre pressure. If the ment panel will flash for approx. 1 minute
the driver when the pressure is too low in one pressure is too low, the tyre's diameter is and then illuminate with a constant glow. A
or more of the car's tyres and indicates the changed and, as a result, so is the rotation message is also shown in the combined
tyre to which it applies. The lamp illuminates speed. By comparing the tyres with each instrument panel.
in yellow at the first indication, stop and other the system can determine whether one
check the tyre pressure as soon as possible. or more tyres have pressure that is too low. The system does not replace normal tyre
When the lamp illuminates in red you must maintenance.
stop and rectify the tyre pressure immedi- Messages
ately. If the tyre pressure is too low then a warning TM recalibration
lamp ( ) illuminates in the combined instru- In order for TM to work correctly, a reference
If a message for low tyre pressure is shown in ment panel and one of the following mes- value for the tyre pressure must be deter-
the display: sages is shown: mined. This must be performed each time the
1. Check the tyre pressure on the tyre in • Tyre pressure low Check front right tyres are changed or the tyre pressure is
question. tyre changed.
2. Inflate the tyre(s) to the correct pressure. • Tyre pressure low Check front left
tyre
3. Drive at least at 30 km/h for several
minutes and check that the message dis- • Tyre pressure low Check rear right
appears. tyre
• Tyre pressure low Check rear left tyre
Related information
• Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 325) • Tyre pressure low Check tyres
• Tyre pressure system Service
required

27 Option only in certain markets.

09 Wheels and tyres
Recalibration • All wheels yellow: two or more tyres have 09

NOTE
Settings are made using the centre console's pressure that is too low.
Remember that the TM system must be
recalibrated at each tyre change or if the • All wheels grey: the system is temporarily
1. Switch off the ignition. tyre pressure is changed. If new reference unavailable. It may be necessary to drive
values are not stored then the system can- the car for a few minutes at a speed
2. Inflate the tyres to the desired pressure in not function properly. above 30 km/h before the system
accordance with the tyre pressure label becomes active again.
on the driver's side door pillar (between • All wheels grey and the message Tyre
front and rear doors) and select key posi- NOTE pressure system Service required: an
tion II, see Key positions - functions at • After a tyre has been inflated, always error has occurred in the system. Contact
different levels (p. 79). refit the dust cap in order to avoid a Volvo dealer or workshop.
3. Select the menu system MY CAR to open damage to the valve from gravel, dirt,
etc. Clearing warning messages
the menus for tyre monitoring.
If a tyre pressure message has been shown
4. Select Calibrate tyre pressure and • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
and the TM warning lamp has been illumi-
caps can rust and become difficult to
press OK. nated:
unscrew.
5. Start and drive the car. 1. Check the tyre pressure on the indicated
> Recalibration is carried out while the System and tyre status tyre/tyres with a tyre pressure gauge.
car is being driven and can be inter- The current status of the system and the tyres 2. Inflate the tyre/tyres to the correct pres-
rupted at any time. If the engine is can be checked, see MY CAR (p. 112). sure in accordance with the tyre pressure
switched off while recalibration is in label on the driver's side door pillar
progress then it is resumed when the 1. Select the menu system MY CAR to open
(between front and rear doors).
car is driven again. the menus for tyre monitoring.
3. Recalibrate the TM system.
TM is then recalibrated and the new reference 2. Select Tyre monitoring.
value applies until steps 1-5 are carried out The status is colour-coded for each tyre in
again. accordance with the following:
• All-green: the system is operating nor-
mally and the tyre pressure in all tyres is
slightly above the recommended level.
• Yellow wheel: corresponding tyre's pres-
sure is too low.
}}
331
09 Wheels and tyres
09 Emergency puncture repair*

NOTE IMPORTANT
Emergency puncture repair, where the emer-
• The TM system uses a so-called com-
gency puncture repair kit (TMK - Temporary
If the compressor is connected to one of
pensated pressure value, based on the two 12 V sockets, in the tunnel con-
both tyre temperature and ambient
Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and sole, no other current consumer must be
temperature. This means that the tyre check and adjust the tyre pressure (p. 415). connected to the other one.
pressure may differ slightly from the The emergency puncture repair kit (p. 333)
recommended pressures listed on the consists of a compressor and a bottle of seal- NOTE
tyre pressure label on the driver's side
ant. The sealing works as a temporary repair.
door pillar (between front and rear The compressor for temporary emergency
The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced puncture repair has been tested and
doors). For this reason, it may be nec-
before its expiration date and after use. The approved by Volvo.
essary to inflate the tyres to a slightly
higher pressure in order to clear a low sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punctured
tyre pressure message. in the tread.
Related information
• To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the
NOTE • Emergency puncture repair* - operation
pressure should be checked on cold (p. 334)
tyres. "Cold tyres" means the tyres are The emergency puncture repair kit is only • Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking
the same temperature as the ambient intended for sealing tyres with a puncture (p. 336)
temperature (approx. 3 hours after the in the tread.
car has been driven). After a few kilo- • Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview
metres of driving, the tyres warm up (p. 333)
The emergency puncture repair kit has limited
and the pressure increases. capacity to seal tyres which have punctures • Tools (p. 323)
in the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emer-
WARNING gency puncture repair kit if they have larger
slits, cracks or similar damage. Connect the
• Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to compressor to one of the car's 12 V sockets.
tyre failure, which could result in the Choose the socket that is nearest to the
driver losing control of the car. punctured tyre.
• The system cannot indicate sudden
tyre damage in advance.

09 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair kit* - Emergency puncture repair kit* - 09

IMPORTANT
location overview
If the compressor for emergency puncture
Emergency puncture repair kit (TMK - repair is connected to one of the two sock- Emergency puncture repair, where the emer-
Temporary Mobility Kit) is used to seal a ets (p. 152) in the tunnel console then no gency puncture repair kit (TMK - Temporary
puncture and check and adjust the tyre pres- other current consumer may be connected Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and
sure (p. 415). to the other one. check and adjust the tyre pressure (p. 415).
Location of the emergency puncture

repair kit NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo.
Related information
• Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview
(p. 333)
• Emergency puncture repair kit* - sealant
(p. 337)
Label, maximum permitted speed
Switch
The emergency puncture repair kit is located
under the floor in the cargo area. Cable
Set up the warning triangle (p. 323) if a tyre is Bottle holder (orange cap)
being sealed in a trafficked location.
Protective cap
NOTE Pressure reducing valve
The emergency puncture repair kit is only
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture Air hose
in the tread.
Sealing fluid bottle
Pressure gauge
}}

09 Wheels and tyres
||
09 Related information Emergency puncture repair* - 1. Detach the label for maximum permitted
• Emergency puncture repair kit* - location operation speed (which is fitted on one side of the
(p. 333) Emergency puncture repair, where the emer- compressor) and affix it to the steering
• Emergency puncture repair kit* - sealant gency puncture repair kit (TMK - Temporary wheel.
(p. 337) Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and
• Emergency puncture repair* (p. 332) check and adjust the tyre pressure (p. 415). WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
Emergency puncture repair
after the emergency tyre repair kit has
been used. Volvo recommends that you
visit an authorised Volvo workshop for
inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum
driving distance is 200 km). The staff there
can determine whether or not the tyre can
be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.
WARNING
The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the
case of contact with skin, wash away the
fluid with soap and water.
2. Check that the switch is in position 0 and

locate the cable and the air hose.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use.
The seal is broken automatically when the
bottle is screwed in.
For information on the function of the parts, see

Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview 3. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the
(p. 333). bottle's stopper.

09 Wheels and tyres
4. Screw the bottle into its holder. 7. Flick the switch to position I. 9. Switch off the compressor to check the 09
pressure on the pressure gauge. Mini-
WARNING WARNING mum pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum
3.5 bar. (Release air with the pressure
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped Never stand next to the tyre when the reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage. compressor is running. If cracks or
unevenness arise then the compressor high.)
must be switched off immediately. The
5. Connect the hose from the compressor to journey should not be continued. Contact- WARNING
the valve. ing an authorised tyre centre is recom-
mended. If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the
6. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and hole in the tyre is too big. The journey
start the car. should not be continued. Contacting an
NOTE authorised tyre centre is recommended.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure
If the compressor is connected to one of can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure 10. Switch off the compressor and unplug the
the two 12 V sockets in the tunnel console drops after approximately 30 seconds. cable from the 12 V socket.
then no other current consumer may be 11. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and
connected to the other one.
8. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes. fit the valve cap.
12. As soon as possible, drive approximately
WARNING IMPORTANT 3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so
Do not leave children in the car without Risk of overheating. The compressor must that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.
supervision when the engine is running. not run for more than 10 minutes.
Related information
• Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking
(p. 336)
• Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview
(p. 333)

09 Wheels and tyres
09 Emergency puncture repair* - replacement/repair of the damaged tyre.

WARNING
rechecking Advise the workshop that the tyre contains
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped sealing fluid.
Emergency puncture repair, where the emer- with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
gency puncture repair kit (TMK - Temporary
Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and WARNING
check and adjust the tyre pressure (p. 415). 3. Make sure the compressor is switched
off. Detach the air hose and cable. You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has
Check tyre pressure Fit the valve cap. been used. Volvo recommends that you
1. Reconnect the equipment. visit an authorised Volvo workshop for
2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure NOTE inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum
driving distance is 200 km). The staff there
gauge.
• After a tyre has been inflated, always can determine whether or not the tyre can
• If it is below 1.3 bar30 then the tyre is refit the dust cap in order to avoid be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.
insufficiently sealed. The journey damage to the valve from gravel, dirt,
should not be continued. Contact a etc. Related information
tyre centre. • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust • Emergency puncture repair* (p. 332)
• If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 caps can rust and become difficult to
• Emergency puncture repair* - operation
bar30, the tyre must be inflated to the unscrew. (p. 334)
pressure specified in accordance with
the tyre pressure table, see Tyres - • Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview
approved tyre pressures (p. 415). NOTE (p. 333)
Release air using the pressure reduc- The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must
ing valve if the tyre pressure is too be replaced after use. Volvo recommends
high. that this replacement is performed by an
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends that you drive to the near-

est authorised Volvo workshop for the
30 1 bar = 100 kPa.

09 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair kit* - Emergency puncture repair kit* - 09

IMPORTANT
inflating the tyres sealant
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
The car's original tyres can be inflated using not run for more than 10 minutes. The container (bottle) with the emergency
the compressor in the emergency puncture puncture repair kit (p. 333) contains sealant
repair kit (p. 333). and it can be replaced.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in
1. The compressor must be switched off. accordance with the tyre pressure table, Replace the bottle when the expiration date
Make sure that the switch is in position 0 see Tyres - approved tyre pressures has passed. Treat the old bottle as environ-
and locate the cable and air hose. (p. 415). Release air using the pressure mentally hazardous waste.
reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too
2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
high. WARNING
in the air hose valve connection to the
bottom of the thread on the tyre's air 6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natu-
valve. hose and cable. ral rubber-latex.
7. Refit the dust cap. Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic
WARNING reaction in the event of skin contact.
Related information
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
danger to life. Never leave the engine run- • Emergency puncture repair* (p. 332)
Store out of the reach of children.
ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf- • Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview
ficient ventilation. (p. 333)
• Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking Related information
WARNING (p. 336) • Emergency puncture repair* (p. 332)
Do not leave children in the car without

supervision when the engine is running.
3. Connect the cable to one of the car's

12 V sockets and start the car.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the
switch to position I.

09 Wheels and tyres
09 Type approval - tyre pressure

monitoring (TPMS)
Type approval of the sensors in tyre pressure
monitoring - TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System)* can be read in the table.

09 Wheels and tyres
09
Country/Area
Brazil
Ukraine
}}
339
09 Wheels and tyres
||
09
Country/Area
Israel
340
09 Wheels and tyres
Declaration of Conformity (Declaration of Conformity) 09
Country/
Area
Countries in
the EU:
Exporting country: Germany

Manufacturer: Continental Automotive GmbH
Type of equipment: TPMS unit
}}
341
09 Wheels and tyres
||
09
Country/
Area
Czech Repub- Continental tímto prohlašuje, že tento Radio Transmitter je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými
lic: ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Denmark: Undertegnede Continental erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr Radio Transmitter overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige
relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Germany: Hiermit erklärt Continental, dass sich das Gerät Radio Transmitter in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen
und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.
Estonia: Käesolevaga kinnitab Continental seadme Radio Transmitter vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud
direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
UK Hereby, Continental declares that this Radio Transmitter is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant
provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Spain: Por medio de la presente Continental declara que el Radio Transmitter cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera
otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Greece: ΜΕ ΗΝ ΠΑΡΟ ΣΑ Continental ΗΛΩΝΕ Ο Radio Transmitter Σ ΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕ Α ΠΡΟΣ Σ Ο Σ Ω Ε Σ ΑΠΑ ΗΣΕ Σ Α
Σ ΛΟ ΠΕΣ ΣΧΕ ΕΣ Α ΑΞΕ Σ ΗΣ Ο Η ΑΣ 1999/5/Ε .
France: Par la présente Continental déclare que l'appareil Radio Transmitter est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres
dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Italy: Con la presente Continental dichiara che questo Radio Transmitter è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni
pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latvia: Ar šo Continental deklarē, ka Radio Transmitter atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem
noteikumiem.
Lithuania: Šiuo Continental deklaruoja, kad šis Radio Transmitter atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.
Netherlands: Hierbij verklaart Continental dat het toestel Radio Transmitter in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere
relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
342
09 Wheels and tyres
09
Country/
Area
Malta: Hawnhekk, Continental, jiddikjara li dan Radio Transmitter jikkonforma mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti oħrajn
relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
Hungary: Alulírott, Continental nyilatkozom, hogy a Radio Transmitter megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az
1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Poland: Niniejszym Continental oświadcza, że Radio Transmitter jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi
postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Portugal: Continental declara que este Radio Transmitter está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva
1999/5/CE.
Slovenia: Continental izjavlja, da je ta Radio Transmitter v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive
1999/5/ES.
Slovakia: Continental týmto vyhlasuje, že Radio Transmitter spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice
1999/5/ES.
Finland: Continental vakuuttaa täten että Radio Transmitter tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä
koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Sweden: Härmed intygar Continental att denna Radio Transmitter står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga
relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
Iceland: Hér með lýsir Continental yfir því að Radio Transmitter er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun
1999/5/EC.
Norway: Continental erklærer herved at utstyret Radio Transmitter er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante krav i
direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Related information

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
10 Maintenance and service
Volvo service programme Book service and repair*1 4. Select preferred communication channel
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi- Manage service, repair and booking informa- (SMS or phone). Booking information is
ble, follow the Volvo service programme as tion directly in your Internet-connected car. always sent to the car and to you via
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. email.
This service provides a convenient way to Prerequisite for booking from car 10
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised book a service and workshop visit directly in
Volvo workshop to perform the service and
• To send and receive booking information
the car. Car information is sent to your dealer, to and from the car, the car must be con-
maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the who can prepare the workshop visit. The nected to the Internet, see Sensus Info-
personnel, special tools and service literature dealer will contact you to schedule an tainment supplement for information on
to guarantee the highest quality of service. appointment time. For certain markets, the how to connect the car to the Internet.
system reminds you of a scheduled appoint-
• Since the booking information is sent
IMPORTANT ment time as it approaches and the naviga- over your private phone subscription, you
tion system2 can also guide you to the work- will be asked whether you want to send
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and shop when the time comes. the information. The question is asked
Warranty Booklet. once and then applies to the selected
Before the service can be used connection for a limited time.
Related information Volvo ID and my profile • For the service to work and for the sys-
• Climate control system - fault tracing and • Register a Volvo ID. For more information tem to communicate via the car's screen,
repair (p. 359) and how to create a Volvo ID, see Volvo notifications/pop-up messages must be
ID (p. 20). accepted. In the normal view for the MY
CAR source, press OK/MENU and then
• Log in to the web portal My Volvo, go to
your profile and carry out the following: Service & repair Display
notifications.
1. Check that the car is connected to your
profile. Using the service
2. Check that your contact information is All menus and settings are accessed from the
correct. normal view in MY CAR by pressing OK/
MENU and then Service & repair.
3. Select the Volvo dealer you want to con-
tact for service and repair. When it is time for service, and in some cases
when the car is in need of repair, this is noti-
1 Applies to certain markets.

2 Applies to Sensus Navigation.
}}

||
fied in the combined instrument panel (p. 64) Book a service or repair manually1 Call the dealer1
and via a pop-up menu in the screen. 1. Press the MY CAR button in the centre With a Bluetooth® phone connected to the
console and select Service & repair car, you can call your dealer. For connecting
Dealer information Request service the phone, see Sensus Infotainment supple-
10 ment.
or repair.
> Vehicle data is sent automatically to – Select Service & repair Dealer
your dealer. information Call dealer.
2. The dealer sends a booking proposal to Using the navigation system1, 2
the car. Enter your workshop as destination or way-
3. Accept or request a new booking pro- point in the navigation system.
posal. – Select Service & repair Dealer
After the booking has been accepted the information Set single destination.
booking information is stored in the car, see
Service message in the screen. –
My bookings. The car will automatically com- Select Service & repair Dealer
Meaning of the answer options in the municate with you via the screen by means of information Add as waypoint.
screen's pop-up menu: reminders about the booking and guide you
Sending vehicle data1
• Yes - A booking enquiry is sent to your to the workshop visit.
Vehicle data is sent to a central Volvo data-
dealer who then comes back with a You can also book a workshop visit via My base (not your dealer) from which Volvo deal-
booking proposal. The service lamp and Volvo. Go to "My bookings" and select ers can retrieve vehicle information using the
service message in the combined instru- "Update" in order to gain access to bookings car's identification number (VIN3). The num-
ment panel are extinguished. from My Volvo. ber is printed in the car's service and war-
• No - No more pop-up messages will be My bookings1 ranty booklet, alternatively inside the wind-
shown in the screen. The message in the screen's bottom left-hand corner.
combined instrument panel remains. After Show booking information in the car's screen.
this option has been selected, it is possi- Accept or request a new booking proposal. – Select Service & repair Send car
ble to start the manual booking in the car, – Select Service & repair My bookings. data.
see below.
• Postpone - The pop-up menu is shown
the next time the car is started.
1 Applies to certain markets.

2 Applies to Sensus Navigation.
3 Vehicle Identification Number
346
Booking information and vehicle data

When you decide to book a service from your
car, the booking information and vehicle data
will be sent. Vehicle data information consists
of a number of signals within the following 10
areas:
• Service requirement.
• Function status.
• Fluid levels.
• Mileage (distance).
• The car's vehicle identification number
(VIN3).
• The car's software version.
Related information
• Volvo ID (p. 20)
3 Vehicle Identification Number
347
Raising the car

When raising the car it is important that the
jack or lifting arms are fitted in the intended
points on the car's underbody.
10
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
belongs to the car model in question. If a
jack is selected other than the one recom-
mended by Volvo, follow the instructions
supplied with the equipment.
348
10
Jacking points (arrows) for the jack that belongs to the car and lifting points (marked in red).
If the car is raised with a front workshop jack
then this must be positioned under one of the
four lifting points furthest in under the car. If
the car is raised with a rear workshop jack
then it must be positioned under one of the
lifting points. Ensure that the workshop jack
is positioned so that the car cannot slide off
the jack. Always use axle stands or similar.
If the car is raised with a two-pillar workshop
lift then the front and rear lifting arms can be
positioned under the outer lifting points (jack-
ing points). Alternatively, the inner lifting
points can be used at the front.
Related information
(p. 319)
349
Bonnet - opening and closing WARNING Engine compartment - overview

The bonnet can be opened when the handle The overview shows normal checking points.
Check that the bonnet locks properly when
by the pedals has been pulled backwards, closed.
and the lock by the grille has been moved to
10 the left.
Related information
• Engine compartment - checking (p. 352)
• Engine compartment - overview (p. 350)
G031911
Pull the handle by the pedals. An informa-

tion symbol lights when the bonnet is
open, see Combined instrument panel -
meaning of indicator symbols (p. 69).
Move the catch to the left and open the
bonnet. (The catch hook is located
between the headlamp and grille, see
illustration.)
350
Engine compartment 4 cyl. 2.0 l4 WARNING Engine oil dipstick6

The ignition system has very high voltage Radiator
and output. The voltage in the ignition sys-
tem is highly dangerous. The car's electri- Filling engine oil
cal system must always be in key position 10
0 when work is being performed in the Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid
engine compartment; see Key positions - (located on the driver's side)
functions at different levels (p. 79). Starter battery
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition
coil when the car's electrical system is in Relay and fuse box
key position II or when the engine is hot.
Filling washer fluid
Engine compartment except 4 cyl. 2.0 l5 Air filter

The appearance of the engine compartment may
differ depending on engine variant.
Filling engine oil
WARNING
The ignition system has very high voltage
Coolant expansion tank and output. The voltage in the ignition sys-
tem is highly dangerous. The car's electri-
Power steering fluid reservoir cal system must always be in key position
0 when work is being performed in the
Radiator engine compartment; see Key positions -
functions at different levels (p. 79).
Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid
(located on the driver's side) Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition
coil when the car's electrical system is in
Starter battery key position II or when the engine is hot.
Relay and fuse box The appearance of the engine compartment may
differ depending on engine variant.
Related information
Filling washer fluid Coolant expansion tank
• Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 350)
Air filter Power steering fluid reservoir • Engine compartment - checking (p. 352)
4 Does not apply to the B4204T7 engine - see instead the following heading "Engine compartment except 4-cyl. 2.0 l".
5 Also applies to the B4204T7 engine.
6 Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).
351
Engine compartment - checking Engine oil - general When driving under adverse conditions, see
Some oils and fluids should be checked at An approved engine oil must be used in order Engine oil - adverse driving conditions
regular intervals. that the recommended service intervals can (p. 404).
be applied.
10 Regular checking IMPORTANT
Check the following oils and fluids at regular
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
intervals, e.g. when refuelling:
engine's service intervals all engines are
• Coolant filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
• Engine oil
has been made very carefully with regard
• Power steering fluid to service life, starting characteristics, fuel
• Washer fluid consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in
WARNING order that the recommended service inter-
vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
Remember that the radiator fan (located at grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
the front of the engine compartment, otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
behind the radiator) may start automati- starting characteristics, fuel consumption
cally some after the engine has been Volvo recommends: and environmental impact.
switched off.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war-
Always have the engine cleaned by a ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop grade and viscosity is not used.
is recommended. There is a risk of fire if
the engine is hot. Volvo recommends that oil changes are
carried out at an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
Related information
• Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 350) Volvo uses different systems for warning of
• Engine compartment - overview (p. 350) low/high oil level or low oil pressure. Certain
• Coolant - level (p. 357) engine variants have an oil pressure sensor,
and then the combined instrument panel's
• Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 353)
warning symbol for low oil pressure is used.
• Power steering fluid - level (p. 358) Other variants have an oil level sensor, when
• Washer fluid - filling (p. 368) the driver is informed via the instrument's
warning symbol and display texts. Cer-
352
tain variants have both systems. Contact a Engine oil - checking and filling
Volvo dealer for more information. The oil level is checked on certain engine vari-
Change the engine oil and oil filter in accord- ants with the electronic oil level sensor, on
ance with the intervals specified in the Serv- other engine variants with the oil dipstick.
ice and Warranty Booklet. 10
Using oil of a higher than specified grade is Engine with oil dipstick7
permitted. If the car is driven in adverse con-
ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a
higher grade; see Engine oil - adverse driving
conditions (p. 404).
G021737
For filling capacities, see Engine oil - grade
and volume (p. 405). The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX
marks.
Related information
G021734
Dipstick and filler pipe.
Checking the oil level in a new car is espe-
cially important before the first scheduled oil
change.
Volvo recommends checking the oil level
every 2 500 km. The most accurate measure-
ments are made on a cold engine before star-
ting. The measurement will be inaccurate if
taken immediately after the engine is
switched off. The dipstick will indicate that
the level is too low because the oil has not
had time to flow down into the oil sump.
7 Does not apply to the 4-cyl. 2.0 litre or 5-cyl. diesel, which have electronic oil level sensor. However, does apply to the B4204T7 engine.
}}
353
||
Measurement and filling if required Engine with electronic oil level sensor,
1. Ensure that the car is level. After switch- 4-cyl. 2.0 l8
ing off the engine it is important to wait
5 minutes to allow the oil time to run back
10 to the sump.
2. Pull up and wipe the dipstick.
3. Re-insert the dipstick.
4. Pull it out and check the level.
5. If the level is close to MIN then 0.5 litres
should be added. If the level is signifi-
cantly below, then an additional amount Message and graph in the display. The left-hand
is required. display shows the digital combined instrument
panel and the right-hand the analogue.
6. If required, check the level again, do it Filler pipe9.
after driving a short distance. Then repeat Message
You do not need to take action with respect
steps 1 - 4.
to the engine oil level before a message is Engine oil level
shown in the display, see following illustra-
WARNING tion.
The oil level is checked using the electronic
oil level gauge with the thumbwheel when the
Never fill above the MAX mark. The level
engine is switched off, see Menu navigation -
should never be above MAX or below MIN
as this could lead to engine damage. combined instrument panel (p. 110).
WARNING
WARNING
If the message Oil service required is
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust mani- shown, visit a workshop - an authorised
fold due to the risk of fire. Volvo workshop is recommended. The oil
level may be too high.
8 Does not apply to the B4204T7 engine - see instead the earlier heading "Engine with oil dipstick".
9 Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.
354
IMPORTANT 2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand Engine with electronic oil level sensor,
stalk switch to position Oil level. 5-cyl. diesel
If notified of low oil level, only fill with the
volume specified, for example, 0.5 litres. > You will then see information displayed
about the engine oil level.
10
For more information on menu naviga-
NOTE
tion, see Menu navigation - combined
The system cannot directly detect changes instrument panel (p. 110).
when the oil is filled or drained. The car
must have been driven approx. 30 km and
have been stationary for 2 hours with the
NOTE
engine switched off and on level ground If the right conditions for measuring the oil
before oil level indication is correct. level are not met (time after engine shut-
down, the car's inclination, outside tem-
perature, etc.) then the message Not
WARNING available will be shown. This does not
mean that there is something wrong in the Filler pipe10.
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust mani-
fold due to the risk of fire. car's systems. You do not need to take action with respect
to the engine oil level before a message is
shown in the display, see following illustra-
Measuring the oil level, 4-cyl. 2.0 l tion.
If the oil level needs to be checked then it
should be carried out in accordance with the
following sequence.
1. Activate key position II; see Key positions
- functions at different levels (p. 79).
10 Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.

}}
355
||
IMPORTANT 2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand
stalk switch to position Oil level.
In the event of the message Oil level low
Refill 0.5 litre, only fill with 0.5 litres. > You will then see information displayed
about the engine oil level.
10
For more information on menu naviga-
NOTE tion, see Menu navigation - combined
The oil level is only detected by the system instrument panel (p. 110).
during driving. The system cannot directly
detect changes when the oil is filled or
drained. The car must be driven
about 30 km before the oil level display is
correct.
Message and graph in the display. The left-hand
display shows the digital combined instrument
panel and the right-hand the analogue. WARNING
Message Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4)
appears as shown in the illustration below.
Engine oil level The level must never be above MAX or
below MIN, as this could lead to engine
The oil level is checked using the electronic damage.
oil level gauge with the thumbwheel when the
engine is switched off, see Menu navigation - The figures 1-4 represent filling level. Do not fill
combined instrument panel (p. 110). more oil if filling level (3) or (4) is shown. Recom-
WARNING mended filling level is 4. Message and graph in
the display. The left-hand display shows the digi-
WARNING Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust mani-
tal combined instrument panel and the right-
fold due to the risk of fire. hand the analogue.
If the message Oil service required is
shown, visit a workshop - an authorised Related information
Volvo workshop is recommended. The oil Measuring the oil level, 5-cyl. diesel
level may be too high. If the oil level needs to be checked then it • Engine oil - general (p. 352)
should be carried out in accordance with the
following sequence.
1. Activate key position II; see Key positions
- functions at different levels (p. 79).
356
Coolant - level WARNING IMPORTANT

The coolant cools the internal combustion
engine to the correct operating temperature.
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant • A high content of chlorine, chlorides
requires topping up when the engine is at and other salts may cause corrosion in
The heat that is transferred from the engine to operating temperature, unscrew the the cooling system.
the coolant can be used to heat the passen- expansion tank cap slowly to gently 10
ger compartment. release the overpressure. • Always use coolant with anti-corrosion
agent as recommended by Volvo.
The coolant level must lie between the MIN
and MAX marks on the expansion tank. For capacities and for standards regarding • Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50%
water and 50% coolant.
water quality; see Coolant - grade and vol-
Checking the level and topping up ume (p. 407). • Mix the coolant with approved quality
tap water. In the event of any doubt
Check the coolant regularly about water quality, used ready-mixed
The level must be between the MIN and MAX coolant in accordance with Volvo rec-
marks on the expansion tank. If the system is ommendations.
not filled sufficiently, high temperatures could • When changing coolant/replacing
occur, causing a risk of damage to the cooling system components, flush the
engine. cooling system clean with approved
quality tap water or flush with ready-
mixed coolant.
• The engine must only be run with a
well-filled cooling system. Otherwise,
temperatures that are too high may
occur resulting in the risk of damage
When topping up the coolant, follow the (cracks) in the cylinder head.
instructions on the packaging. It is important
that the mixture of coolant concentrate and
water is correct for the prevailing weather
conditions. Never top up with water only. The
risk of freezing increases with both too little
and too much coolant concentrate.
357
Brake and clutch fluid - level Filling Power steering fluid - level
Brake and clutch fluid level should be The power steering fluid level must be
between the reservoir MIN and MAX marks. between the reservoir's MIN and MAX marks.
The fluid does not need to be changed.
10 Checking the level
Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser-
voir. The level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks that are visible inside the reser-
voir. Check the level regularly.
Change the brake fluid every other year or at
every other regular service.
The fluid should be changed annually on cars
driven in conditions requiring hard, frequent The fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side.
braking, such as driving in mountains or tropi-
cal climates with high humidity. The fluid reservoir is protected under the
cover over the cold zone in the engine com-
For capacities and recommended brake fluid partment. The round cover must be removed
grade, see Brake fluid - grade and volume first before the reservoir cap can be reached.
(p. 410). IMPORTANT
Turn and open the cover located on the
covering. Keep the area around the power steering
WARNING fluid reservoir clean when checking. The
Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the cover must not be opened.
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur- fluid. The level must be between the MIN
ther before topping up the brake fluid. and MAX marks, which are located on Check the level frequently. The fluid does not
Volvo recommends that the reason for the the inside of the reservoir. require changing. The level must be between
loss of brake fluid is investigated by an the MIN and MAX marks.
authorised Volvo workshop. IMPORTANT
For recommended fluid grade, see Power
Do not forget to refit the cap. steering fluid - grade (p. 410).
358
NOTE Climate control system - fault tracing Lamp replacement - general

and repair Lamp replacement can be carried out for
If a fault should arise in the power steering
system, or if the engine is switched off and The air conditioning system must only be bulbs. When replacing LED and Xenon lamps,
must be towed, then the car can still be serviced and repaired by an authorised work- please refer to a workshop.
steered. shop. 10
The bulbs are specified (p. 366). The follow-
Troubleshooting and repair ing list contains locations of bulbs and other
The air conditioning system contains fluores- light sources that are specialised, such as
cent tracing agents. Use ultraviolet light when LED11 lamps, or are unsuitable for changing
looking for leaks. for some other reason, except at a work-
Volvo recommends that you contact an shop12:
authorised Volvo workshop. • Active Xenon headlamps - ABL (Xenon
lamps)
WARNING • Daytime running lights/Position/parking
The air conditioning system contains pres- lamps front
surised refrigerant R134a. This system • Cornering lights
must only be serviced and repaired by an
authorised workshop.
• Side direction indicators, door mirrors
• Approach lighting, door mirrors
Related information • Interior lighting apart from Courtesy light-
ing front
• Volvo service programme (p. 345)
• Position/parking lamps rear
• Side marker lamps
• Direction indicators, rear.
11 LED (Light Emitting Diode)

}}
359
||
WARNING NOTE Lamp replacement - headlamps
All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the
On cars with Xenon headlamps, the Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog
replacement of Xenon lamps must be car- lamps and rear lamps may temporarily engine compartment. First loosen and remove
ried out at a workshop - an authorised have condensation on the inside of the the whole headlamp.
10 Volvo workshop is recommended. Working lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is
with Xenon lamps demands extreme cau- designed to withstand this. Condensation Removing the headlamp
tion because the headlamp is equipped is normally vented out of the lamp housing Set the car's electrical system in key position
with a high voltage unit. when the lamp has been switched on for a 0, see Key positions - functions at different
time. levels (p. 79).
WARNING
Related information
The car's electrical system must be in key • Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 360)
position 0 for bulb replacement; see Key
positions - functions at different levels • Lamp replacement - location of rear
(p. 79). lamps (p. 364)
(p. 365)
IMPORTANT
• Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo area
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs (p. 365)
with your fingers. Grease from your fingers
is vaporised by the heat, coating the • Lamp replacement - number plate lighting Pull out the headlamp's locking pins.
reflector and then causing damage. (p. 364)
Pull the headlamp straight forward.
NOTE IMPORTANT
If an error message remains after the bro-
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the
ken bulb has been replaced then we rec-
connector.
ommend that you visit an authorised Volvo
workshop.
360
When securing, check that the long lock pin Lamp replacement - cover for main/
is engaged - it should be engaged in both dipped beam bulbs
eyes. Main/dipped beam bulbs are accessed by
1. Plug in the connector, a clicking sound releasing the headlamp's larger cover.
should be heard. 10
2. Reinstall the headlamp and locking pins.

Check that they are firmly inserted.
3. Check the lighting.
Detach the headlamp connector by The headlamp must be mounted and the con-
pressing down the clip with your thumb. nector firmly connected before the lighting is
At the same time, guide out the connec- switched on or the remote control key is
tor with your other hand. inserted into the ignition switch.
5. Lift out the headlamp and place it on a Related information
soft surface to avoid scratching the lens. • Lamp replacement - general (p. 359)
6. Replace the bulb in question. • Lamp replacement - cover for main/
dipped beam bulbs (p. 361) Before starting to replace a bulb, see Lamp
Securing the headlamp replacement - headlamps (p. 360).
• Lamps - specifications (p. 366)
1. Unscrew the cover's four screws using a
Torx tool, size T20 (1). They should not be
loosened completely. (3 - 4 turns are suf-
ficient.)
2. Slide the cover to one side.
3. Remove the cover.
Reinstall the cover in reverse order.
Related information
• Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 360)
• Lamp replacement - dipped beam
(p. 362)
}}
361
• Lamp replacement - main beam (p. 362) Lamp replacement - dipped beam Lamp replacement - main beam
• Lamp replacement - extra main beam The dipped beam bulb is fitted inside the The main beam bulb is fitted inside the head-
(p. 363) headlamp's larger cover. lamp's larger cover.
10 NOTE NOTE
Applies to cars with halogen headlamps. Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.
1. Detach the headlamp (p. 360). 1. Detach the headlamp (p. 360).
2. Remove the cover (p. 361). 2. Remove the cover (p. 361).
3. Unplug the connector from the bulb. 3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise
and then pulling straight out.
4. Detach the bulb by pressing the holder
downwards. 4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
5. Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap it 5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socket
in. It can only be secured in one position. and turn clockwise in order to secure it. It
can only be secured in one position.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Related information
• Lamps - specifications (p. 366) Related information
362
Lamp replacement - extra main beam Lamp replacement - direction Lamp replacement - rear lamp
The extra main beam bulb is fitted inside the indicators front Rear fog lamps are reached from behind the
headlamp's larger cover. Undo the lamp holder for the direction indica- bumper.
tor lamp by turning it anticlockwise. Brake lights and reversing lamps are replaced
NOTE 10
from inside the cargo area.
Applies to cars with Xenon headlamps*.
Rear fog lamp
1. Detach the headlamp (p. 360).

2. Detach the bulb holder by turning anti-
clockwise. The rear fog lamp is accessed behind the
1. Detach the headlamp (p. 360).
3. Pull the bulb holder in order to extract the bumper.
2. Remove the cover (p. 361).
bulb. 1. Detach the bulb holder by turning anti-
3. Unplug the connector from the bulb. clockwise.
4. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in
4. Detach the bulb holder by pulling it and turning anticlockwise. 2. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in
straight out. and turning the bulb anticlockwise.
5. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn
5. Replace the bulb and fit the new one in clockwise. 3. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn
the socket. It can only be secured in one clockwise.
6. Fit the bulb holder and turn clockwise.
position.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order. 4. Fit the bulb holder and turn clockwise.
Related information
Related information
}}

||
Brake light and reversing lamp Lamp replacement - location of rear Lamp replacement - number plate
lamps lighting
The overview shows the location of the lamps The number plate lighting is located under the
at the rear. tailgate handle.
10
Both the brake light and the reversing lamp

bulbs are replaced from inside the cargo
area.
1. Open the panel. Brake light (LED) 1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.
2. Detach the bulb holder by turning anti-
Position/parking lamps (LED)/Side marker 2. Carefully detach the whole lamp housing
clockwise.
lamps (LED) and withdraw it.
3. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in Indicator 3. Replace the bulb.
and turning anticlockwise.
Reversing lamp (p. 363) 4. Refit the whole lamp housing and screw it
4. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn
into place.
clockwise. Brake lights (p. 363)
5. Fit the bulb holder and turn clockwise. Related information
Fog lamps (p. 363) • Lamps - specifications (p. 366)
Related information
• Lamp replacement - location of rear Related information
lamps (p. 364) • Lamp replacement - general (p. 359)
• Lamps - specifications (p. 366) • Lamps - specifications (p. 366)
364
Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo Lamp replacement - vanity mirror Related information
area lighting • Lamps - specifications (p. 366)
The cargo area lighting is located in the tail- The vanity mirror's lamps are fitted inside the
gate. lamp lenses.
10
Removal of lamp lens
G031942
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently prize so

that the lamp housing comes loose. 1. Insert a screwdriver under the lamp lens
2. Replace the bulb. and gently prize up the lock lugs on the
edge.
3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press
back the lamp housing. 2. Snap off the lamp lens.
3. Use needle-nose pliers to pull the bulb
Related information straight out to the side and replace with a
• Lamps - specifications (p. 366) new one. Note! - Do not pinch hard with
the pliers. Otherwise the lamp lens could
then be crushed.
Attaching the lamp lens

1. Refit the lamp lens.
2. Press it into place.
365
Lamps - specifications Lighting WA Type Wiper blades

The specifications apply to bulbs. When The wiper blades sweep water away from the
replacing LED and Xenon lamps, please refer Reversing lamp 21 P21W LL windscreen and rear window. Together with
to a workshop. the washer fluid they clean the windows and
10 Rear fog lamp 21 H21W LL ensure visibility for driving.
Lighting WA Type A Watt The windscreen wiper blades must be in serv-
ice position when they are to be replaced.
Dipped beam, 55 H7 LL Related information
halogen • Lamp replacement - general (p. 359) Service position
Main beam, Hal- 65 H9 • Lamp replacement - location of rear
lamps (p. 364)
ogen
Extra main beam, 65 H9 (p. 365)
ABL
Front direction 24 PY24W

indicators
Courtesy lighting 3 T10 Socket

front W2.1x9.5d
Glovebox lighting 5 Socket SV8.5

Length 43 mm Wiper blades in service position.
Vanity mirror 2 T5 Socket In order to change, clean or lift the wiper

lighting W2x4.6d blades (for scraping off ice from the wind-
screen, for example) they must be in service
Cargo area light- 10 Socket SV8.5 position.
ing Length 43 mm
IMPORTANT
Number plate 5 C5W LL
lighting Before placing the wiper blades in the
service position, make sure that they are
Brake light 21 P21W LL not frozen down.
366
1. Insert the remote control key in the igni- Replacing the wiper blades Fold up the wiper arm when it is in serv-
tion switch13 and briefly press the ice position. Press the button located on
START/STOP ENGINE button to set the the wiper blade mounting and pull
car's electrical system to key position I. straight out parallel with the wiper arm.
For detailed information on key positions, Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click" 10
see Key positions - functions at different is heard.
levels (p. 79).
Check that the blade is firmly installed.
2. Briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE
button again to set the car’s electrical 4. Fold the wiper arm back towards the
system in key position 0. windscreen.
3. Within 3 seconds, move the right stalk The wipers return from service position to
switch up and hold it in position for their starting position when you briefly press
approx. 1 second. the START/STOP ENGINE button to set the
> The wipers then move to standing car’s electrical system to key position I (or
straight up. when the car is started).
The wipers return to their starting position
when you briefly press the START/STOP
ENGINE button to set the car’s electrical sys-
tem to key position I (or when the car is
started).
IMPORTANT
If the wiper arms in service position have
been folded up from the windscreen, they
must be folded back down onto the wind-
screen before the wipers are allowed to
return to their starting position. This is to
avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet.
13 Not necessary in cars with the Keyless function.

}}
367
||
NOTE Cleaning Washer fluid - filling
For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, Washer fluid is used for cleaning the head-
The wiper blades are different lengths. The see Car wash (p. 388).
blade on the driver's side is longer than on lamps and windows. Washer fluid with anti-
the passenger side. freeze must be used during winter.
10 IMPORTANT
Replacing the wiper blades, rear Check the blades regularly. Neglected
window maintenance shortens the service life of
the wiper blades.
Related information
• Washer fluid - filling (p. 368)
The windscreen and headlamp washers share

G032770
a common reservoir.
1. Fold out the wiper arm. IMPORTANT

2. Grip the inner section of the blade (by the Use Volvo genuine washer fluid or equiva-
arrow). lent with a recommended pH of between 6
and 8, in working dilution (e.g. 1:1 with
3. Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's end neutral water).
position against the wiper arm as a lever
to detach the blade more easily.
IMPORTANT
4. Press the new wiper blade into position.
Check that it is firmly installed. Use washer fluid with antifreeze during the
winter to avoid freezing in the pump, reser-
5. Lower the wiper arm. voir and hoses.
368
For capacities, see Washer fluid - quality and Starter battery - general IMPORTANT
volume (p. 410). The starter battery is used to drive the starter
When replacing the starter battery, in cars
motor and other electrical equipment in the with Start/Stop function, a battery of the
Related information
car. correct type must be fitted, EFB14 in cars
• Wiper blades (p. 366) 10
The starter battery is a traditional 12 V bat- with manual gearbox and AGM15 in cars
with automatic gearbox.
tery.
When replacing the support battery, a bat-
The service life and function of the starter tery of AGM type must be fitted.
battery is influenced by factors such as the
number of starts, discharging, driving style,
driving conditions, climatic conditions, etc. IMPORTANT
• Never disconnect the starter battery when If the starter battery is replaced, make sure
the engine is running. you replace it with a battery with the same
cold starting capacity and type as the orig-
• Check that the cables to the starter bat- inal battery (see the label on the battery).
tery are correctly connected and properly
tightened.
NOTE
Engine
• The starter battery's container size
Petrol Diesel should be consistent with the original
(Ethanol) battery's dimensions.
Voltage (V) 12 12
• The starter battery's height is different
depending on size.
Cold start
capacityA - 520–800 700–800
CCAB (A)
A In accordance with SAE or EN standard.
B Cold Cranking Amperes.
14 Enhanced Flooded Battery.

15 Absorbed Glass Mat.
}}
369
||
WARNING IMPORTANT NOTE
• The battery can generate oxyhydrogen If the following instruction is not observed The life of the battery is shortened if it
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark then the energy saving function for info- becomes discharged repeatedly.
can be formed if a jump lead is con- tainment system may be temporarily dis-
10 The life of the battery is affected by several
nected incorrectly, and this can be engaged, and/or the message in the com-
factors, including driving conditions and
enough for the battery to explode. bined instrument panel's information dis-
climate. Battery starting capacity decrea-
play about the starter battery's state of
• The battery contains sulphuric acid, ses gradually with time and therefore
charge may be temporarily inapplicable,
which can cause serious burns. needs to be recharged if the car is not
following the connection of an external
used for a longer time or when it is only
• If sulphuric acid comes into contact starter battery or battery charger:
driven short distances. Extreme cold fur-
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with • The negative battery terminal on the ther limits starting capacity.
large quantities of water. If acid car's starter battery must never be To maintain the battery in good condition,
splashes into the eyes - seek medical used for connecting an external starter at least 15 minutes of driving/week is rec-
attention immediately. battery or battery charger - only the ommended or that the battery is con-
car chassis may be used as the nected to a battery charger with automatic
grounding point. trickle charging.
IMPORTANT
See Jump starting with battery (p. 264) for A battery that is kept fully charged has a
When charging the starter battery or the a description of how the cable clamps maximum service life.
support battery (p. 373), only use a mod- must be attached.
ern battery charger with controlled charg-
ing voltage. Fast charging function must Related information
not be used since it may damage the bat- • Battery - symbols (p. 371)
tery.
• Starter battery - replacement (p. 371)
370
Battery - symbols Avoid sparks and naked Starter battery - replacement

There are information and warning symbols flames. The starter battery in the car can be replaced
on the battery. without the help of a workshop.
Symbols on the battery The starter battery is a traditional 12 V bat- 10

tery.
Use protective goggles.
Risk of explosion. Removal
First of all: Take the remote control key from
the ignition switch and wait at least 5 minutes
before any electrical connections are touched
- this is because the car's electrical system
Further information in the needs to store the necessary information to
owner's manual for the control modules.
Must be taken for recy-
car.
cling.
Store the battery out of

the reach of children.
NOTE
An expended battery must be recycled in
an environmentally safe manner as it con-
tains lead.
The battery contains cor-
rosive acid. Related information
• Starter battery - general (p. 369)
}}
371
||
Remove the rear cover by screwing one 1. Lower the battery into the battery box.
quarter turn and lifting it away.
2. Move the battery inward and to the side
until it reaches the rear edge of the box.
WARNING
10 3. Tighten the clamp that holds the battery.
Connect and remove the positive and neg-
ative cables in the correct order. 4. Connect the ventilation hose.
> Check that it is correctly connected to
both battery and outlet in the body.
5. Connect the red positive cable.
Detach the black negative cable.
6. Connect the black negative cable.
Detach the red positive cable.
7. Press in the rear cover. (See earlier sec-
Detach the ventilation hose from the bat- tion "Removal".)
tery. 8. Fit the rubber moulding. (See "Removal".)
Loosen the screw holding the battery 9. Align the front cover and secure it with
clamp. the clips. (See "Removal".)
For more information on the car's starter bat-
tery, see Jump starting with battery (p. 264).
Move the battery aside.
Lift it up.
Fitting
Open the clips on the front cover and

remove the cover.
Release the rubber moulding so that the
rear cover is free.
372
Battery - Start/Stop Battery Battery

Cars with the Start/Stop function are equip-
ped with a support battery in addition to the Start, 12 V Support, 12 Start, 12 V Support, 12
starter battery. V V
10
Cars with the Start/Stop function are equip- Left-hand Left-hand
ped with two 12 V batteries - one extra pow- drive car: drive car:
erful starter battery for starting and one sup- Cold
start 120E 8E
port battery that helps during the Start/Stop 720C Capacity
function's starting sequence. capacityA 170F 70 10F
760D (Ah)
- CCAB
For more information on the Start/Stop func- Right-hand Right-hand
(A)
tion, see Start/Stop* (p. 275). drive car: drive car:
For more information on the car's starter bat- 120 8
tery, see Jump starting with battery (p. 264).
Left-hand A In accordance with EN standard.
The following table shows specifications for drive car:
B Cold Cranking Amperes.
C Manual gearbox.
the starter battery and support battery D Automatic gearbox.
respectively in cars with Start/Stop function. 150×90×106E
Size, E Manual gearbox in combination with Start/Stop function
that only auto-stops when the car is completely stationary.
L×W×H 278×175×190 150×90×130F F Others.
(mm)
Right-hand
drive car: IMPORTANT
150×90×106 When replacing the starter battery, in cars
with Start/Stop function, a battery of the
correct type must be fitted, EFB16 in cars
with manual gearbox and AGM17 in cars
with automatic gearbox.
When replacing the support battery, a bat-
tery of AGM type must be fitted.
16 Enhanced Flooded Battery.

17 Absorbed Glass Mat.
}}

||
NOTE Location of the batteries IMPORTANT
• The higher the current take-off in the If the following instruction is not observed
car, the more the alternator must be then the Start/Stop function may tempo-
working and the batteries charging = rarily cease to work after the connection of
10 an external battery or battery charger:
Increased fuel consumption.
• When the capacity of the starter bat- • The negative battery terminal on the
tery has fallen below the lowest per- car's starter battery must never be
missible level then the Start/Stop func- used for connecting an external bat-
tion is disengaged. tery or battery charger - only the car
chassis may be used as the ground-
ing point.
Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due
to high current take-off means: See Jump starting with battery (p. 264) for
a description of how the cable clamps
• The engine starts automatically18 without A: Left-hand drive car. B: Right-hand drive car. must be attached.
(1) Starter battery19 (2) Support battery.
the driver depressing the clutch pedal
(manual gearbox). The support battery normally requires no
• The engine starts automatically without more service than the normal starter battery.
the driver lifting his/her foot off the foot A workshop should be contacted in the event
brake pedal (automatic gearbox). of questions or problems - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
18 Automatic starting can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position.
19 See Starter battery - general (p. 369) for detailed description of the starter battery.
374
NOTE Electrical system Fuses - general

The electrical system is single-pole and uses All electrical functions and components are
If the battery has become so discharged
that everything is "black" and in principle the chassis and engine casing as a conductor. protected by a number of fuses in order to
the car does not have all the normal elec- protect the car's electrical system from dam-
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alterna- age by short circuiting or overloading. 10
trical functions and the engine is subse-
quently started using an external battery or tor.
battery charger, then the Start/Stop func- If an electrical component or function does
The size, type and performance of the starter
tion will be activated. It will then be possi- not work, it may be because the component's
battery depend on the car's equipment and
ble for the engine to be auto-stopped but fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed. If
function.
in the event of an auto-stop the Start/Stop the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a
function may fail to auto-start the engine fault in the circuit. Volvo recommends that
due to inadequate capacity in the battery. IMPORTANT you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for
The battery must first be charged in order If the starter battery is replaced, make sure checking.
to ensure a successful auto-start after an you replace it with a battery with the same
auto-stop. At an outside temperature of cold starting capacity and type as the orig- Changing
+15 °C the battery needs to be charged for inal battery (see the label on the battery). 1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the
at least 1 hour. At a lower outside tem- fuse.
perature a charging time of 3-4 hours is
recommended. The recommendation is Related information 2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side
that the battery is charged using an exter- • Starter battery - replacement (p. 371) to see whether the curved wire has
nal battery charger. • Starter battery - general (p. 369) blown.
If this is not possible then the recommen- 3. If this is the case, replace it with a new
dation is to temporarily deactivate the fuse of the same colour and amperage.
Start/Stop function until the battery has
been adequately recharged.
WARNING
For more information on charging the
starter battery, see Starter battery - gen- Never use a foreign object or a fuse with
eral (p. 369). an amperage higher than that specified
when replacing a fuse. This could cause
significant damage to the electrical system
Related information and possibly lead to fire.
• Battery - symbols (p. 371)
}}
375
||
Location of central electrical units • Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold
zone (p. 386)
10
Central electrical unit locations in a left-hand

drive car. In a right-hand drive car the central
electrical units under the glovebox change
sides.
Engine compartment
Under the glovebox
Under the glovebox
Cargo area
Engine compartment cold zone (only

Start/Stop)
Related information
• Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 377)
• Fuses - under glovebox (p. 381)
• Fuses - in the control module under the
glovebox (p. 383)
• Fuses - in cargo area (p. 385)
376
Fuses - in engine compartment

Fuses in the engine compartment protect
engine and brake functions, amongst other
things.
10
}}
377
||
General fuses, engine compartment Function A Function A
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers
that facilitate the procedure for the removal Primary fuse for the central 50 ABS pump 40
and fitting of fuses. electronic module (CEM) under
10 the gloveboxA ABS valves 20
Positions (see preceding illustration)
Engine compartment, upper Primary fuse for the central 50 Headlamp washers* 20
electronic module (CEM) under
Engine compartment, front the glovebox Headlamp levelling*; Active 10
Xenon headlamps - ABL*
Engine compartment, lower Primary fuse for central electri- 60
cal unit in cargo areaA Primary fuse for the central 20
These fuses are all located in the engine com-
electronic module (CEM) under
partment box. The fuses in (C) are located Primary fuse for relay/fuse box 60 the glovebox
under (A).
under the gloveboxA
On the inside of the cover is a label that ABS 5
shows the location of the fuses. Primary fuse for relay/fuse box 60
under the gloveboxA Adjustable steering force* 5
• Fuses 1-7 and 42-44 are of the "Midi
Fuse" type and must only be replaced by - - Engine control module; Trans- 10
a workshop20. mission control module; Air-
• Fuses 8-15 and 34 are of the "JCASE" Electric additional heater*A 100 bags
type and should be replaced by a work-
Heated windscreen*, left-hand 40 Heated washer nozzles* 10
shop20
side
• Fuses 16-33 and 35-41 are of the "Mini - -
Fuse" type. Windscreen wipers 30
Headlamp control 5
Parking heater* 25
- -
Ventilation fanA 40
- -
Heated windscreen*, right- 40
hand side - -

Function A Function A Function A

Relay coils 5 Ignition coils (1.6 l petrol, 10 Solenoid clutch A/C (5, 6-cyl.); 10
engine B4204T7); Glow control Valves (1.6 l, engine B4204T7,
Auxiliary lamps* 20 module (5-cyl. diesel) 5, 6-cyl.); Engine control mod- 10
ule (6-cyl.); Solenoids (6-cyl.
Horn 15 Engine control module (4-cyl. 20 without turbo); Actuator
2.0 lB); Ignition coils (5, 6-cyl. motors, intake manifold (6-cyl.
Relay coil in main relay for 10 petrol); Capacitor (6-cyl.) without turbo); Mass air flow
engine management system; sensor (engine B4204T7, 5-cyl.
Engine control module (4-cyl. Engine control module (petrol 10
petrol); Oil level sensor (5-cyl.
2.0 lB, 5, 6-cyl.) except 4-cyl. 2.0 lC)
diesel)
Transmission control module 15 Engine control module (1.6 l 15
Valves (4-cyl. 2.0 lB); Oil pump 15
diesel, 5-cyl. diesel)
(4-cyl. 2.0 l petrolB); Lambda-
Solenoid clutch A/C (not 4-cyl. 15
Engine control module (4-cyl. 20 sond, centre (4-cyl. 2.0 l pet-
2.0 lC, not 5-cyl. diesel); Sup-
2.0 lB) rolB); Lambda-sond, rear (4-cyl.
porting coolant pump (4-cyl.
2.0 l diesel)
2.0 l diesel) Valves (1.6 l petrol); mass air 10
flow sensor (1.6 l, 4-cyl. 2.0 lB); Lambda-sonds (1.6 l petrol, 10
Relay coil in relay for solenoid 5
Thermostat (4-cyl. 2.0 l pet- engine B4204T7); Lambda-
clutch A/C (not 5-cyl. diesel);
rolB); EVAP valve (4-cyl. 2.0 l sond (5-cyl. diesel); Control
Relay coil in relay for coolant
petrolB); Cooling pump for EGR module, radiator roller cover
pump (1.6 l petrol Start/Stop);
(4-cyl. 2.0 l diesel) (1.6 l diesel, 5-cyl. diesel)
Relay coils in central electrical
unit in engine compartment Lambda-sond, front (4-cyl. 15
Mass air flow sensor (5-cyl. 15
cold zone (Start/Stop) 2.0 lB); Lambda-sond, rear (4-
diesel, 6-cyl.); Control valves
30 (5-cyl. diesel); Injectors (5, 6- cyl. 2.0 l petrolB); EVAP valve
Start relayA
cyl. petrol); Engine control (5, 6-cyl. petrol); Lambda-
module (5, 6-cyl. petrol) sonds (5, 6-cyl. petrol)
}}

||
Function A Function A
Coolant pump (5-cyl. petrol); 10 Cooling fan (1.6 l, 4-cyl. 2.0 l 60
Crankcase ventilation heater petrol, 5-cyl. petrol)
10 (5-cyl. petrol); Oil pump auto-
matic gearbox (5-cyl. petrol Cooling fan (6-cyl., 4-cyl. 2.0 l 80
Start/Stop) diesel, 5-cyl. diesel)
Ignition coils (4-cyl. 2.0 l pet- 15 Power steering 100

rolB) A For cars with the Start/Stop function this fuse location is
empty - see instead Fuses - in the engine compartment's
Diesel filter heater (diesel) 20 cold zone (p. 386).
B Does not apply to the B4204T7 engine.
C However, does apply to the B4204T7 engine.
Control module, radiator roller 5
cover (5-cyl. petrol) Related information
Solenoid clutch A/C (4-cyl. 7.5 • Fuses - under glovebox (p. 381)
2.0 l petrolB) • Fuses - in the control module under the
glovebox (p. 383)
Crankcase ventilation heater 10 • Fuses - in cargo area (p. 385)
(5-cyl. diesel); Oil pump auto-
matic gearbox (5-cyl. diesel
Start/Stop)
Solenoid clutch A/C (4-cyl. 15

2.0 l diesel); Glow control mod-
ule (4-cyl. 2.0 l diesel); Oil
pump (4-cyl. 2.0 l diesel)
Coolant pump (4-cyl. 2.0 l pet- 50

rolB)
Glow plugs (diesel) 70
380
Fuses - under glovebox

Fuses under the glovebox protect the info-
tainment system and seat functions, amongst
other things.
10
Positions Function A Function A

Function A
- - Control panel, rear passenger 20
Primary fuse for audio control 40 door, right
module*; Primary fuse for fuses - -
16-20: Infotainment Control panel, rear passenger 20
12 V socket, cargo area* 15 door, left
Windscreen washers; Rear win- 25
dow washer Control panel, driver's door 20 Keyless* 20
- - Control panel, front passenger 20 Power seat, driver's side* 20

door
- - Power seat, passenger side* 20
}}

||
Function A Function A
- - Parking assistance*; Parking 5
camera*
10 Infotainment Control Module or 5
Towbar control module*
ScreenA
BLIS*
Audio control unit (amplifier)*; 10
Digital radio*; TV* AWD control module* 15
Audio control module or Control 15 Active chassis Four-C* 10

module SensusA
A Certain model variants.
Telematics*; Bluetooth* 5
Related information
- - • Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 377)
Sunroof*; Interior lighting roof; 5 glovebox (p. 383)
Climate sensor*; Damper
motors, air intake
• Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold
12 V socket, tunnel console 15 zone (p. 386)
Seat heating, rear right* 15
Seat heating, rear left* 15
- -
Seat heating, front passenger 15

side
Seat heating, front driver's side 15

Fuses - in the control module under

the glovebox
Fuses in the control module under the glove-
box protect airbag and collision warning sys-
tem functions, amongst other things. 10

Function A
Adaptive cruise control, ACC*; 10 Heated windscreen* 15
Rear window wiper 15 collision warning system*
Unlocking, tailgate 10
- - Interior lighting; Rain sensor* 7.5
Folding head restraint* 10
Interior lighting; Driver's door 7.5 Steering wheel module 7.5
control panel, power windows; Fuel pump 20
Power seats* Central locking system, fuel 10
filler flap Movement detector alarm*; Cli- 5
Combined instrument panel 5 mate panel
Heated steering wheel* 15
}}

||
Function A
Steering lock 15
10 Siren*; Data link connector 5

OBDII
- -
Airbags 10
Collision warning system* 5
Accelerator pedal sensor; Dim- 7.5

ming interior rearview mirror*;
Seat heating, rear*
Electric additional heater*
Infotainment control module 15

(Performance); Audio (Perform-
ance)
Brake light 5
Sunroof* 20
Immobiliser 5
Related information
zone (p. 386)

Fuses - in cargo area

Fuses in the cargo area protect the electric
parking brake, amongst other things.
10
The fuse box is located behind the upholstery on the left-hand side.

Function A
- - Trailer socket 1* 40
Electric parking brake, left 30
- - - -
Electric parking brake, right 30
- - Related information
Rear window defroster 30 • Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 377)
- -
Trailer socket 2* 15 • Fuses - under glovebox (p. 381)
- - • Fuses - in the control module under the
Power operated tailgate* 20 glovebox (p. 383)
zone (p. 386)

Fuses - in the engine compartment's

cold zone
Fuses in the engine compartment's cold zone
are fitted in cars with the Start/Stop function.
10
Location of fuses for the Start/Stop function.

• Fuses A1 and A2 are of the "MEGA Fuse" Positions Function A
type and must only be replaced by a
Function A
workshop21. Electric additional heater* 100
• Fuses 1-11 are of the "Midi Fuse" type Main fuse for central electrical 175
and must only be replaced by a work- unit in the engine compartment Primary fuse for the central 50
shop21. electronic module (CEM) under
Main fuse for central electronic 175 the glovebox
• Fuse 12 is of the "Mini Fuse" type. module (CEM) under the glove-
For more information on Start/Stop - see box, relay/fuse box under the Primary fuse for relay/fuse box 60
Start/Stop* (p. 275). glovebox, central electrical unit under the glovebox
in cargo area

Function A
Primary fuse for relay/fuse box 60
under the glovebox
10
Primary fuse for central electri- 60
cal unit in cargo area
Ventilation fan 40
- -
- -
Start relay 30
Internal diode 50
Support battery 70
Central electronic module 15

(CEM) - reference voltage sup-
port battery; Charging point
support battery
Related information
glovebox (p. 383)
387
Car wash WARNING NOTE

The car should be washed as soon as it
Always have the engine cleaned by a Wash the wiper blades and windscreen
becomes dirty. Wash the car in a car wash workshop. There is a risk of fire if the regularly with lukewarm soap solution or
with oil separator. Use car shampoo. engine is hot. car shampoo. Do not use any strong sol-
10 vents.
Washing by hand
• Remove bird droppings from the paint- IMPORTANT
work as soon as possible. Bird droppings Automatic car washes
contain chemicals that affect and discol- Dirty headlamps have impaired functional- An automatic car wash is a simple and quick
ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling way of washing the car, but it cannot reach
our paintwork very quickly. An authorised for example.
Volvo workshop is recommended for the everywhere. Handwashing the car is recom-
removal of any discoloration. Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents mended for achieving optimum results.
but use water and a non-scratching
• Hose down the underbody. sponge instead.
• Rinse the whole car until the loose dirt NOTE
has been removed in order to reduce the The car must only be washed by hand
risk of scratches from washing. Do not NOTE over the first few months. This is because
spray directly onto the locks. Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog the paint is more delicate when it is new.
• If necessary, use cold degreasing agent lamps and rear lamps may temporarily
on very dirty surfaces. Note that the sur- have condensation on the inside of the High-pressure washing
faces must not then be warmed up by the lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is
designed to withstand this. Condensation When using high-pressure washing, use
sun! sweeping movements and make sure that the
is normally vented out of the lamp housing
• Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and when the lamp has been switched on for a nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to
plenty of lukewarm water. time. the surface of the car (the distance applies to
• Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm all exterior parts). Do not spray directly onto
soap solution or car shampoo. the locks.
Wiper blades
• Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper
a water scraper. If you avoid allowing blades, as well as insects, ice etc. on the
water droplets to dry in strong sunlight windscreen, impair the service life of wiper
then the risk of water stains that may blades.
need to be polished away is reduced.
For cleaning:
- Set the wiper blades to the service position,
see Wiper blades (p. 366).
388
Testing the brakes IMPORTANT Polishing and waxing

Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
WARNING rubber. or to give the paintwork extra protection.
Always test the brakes after washing the When using degreasant on plastic and The car does not need to be polished until it
10
car, including the parking brake, to ensure rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is is at least one year old. However, the car can
that moisture and corrosion do not attack necessary. Use a soft washing sponge. be waxed during this time. Do not polish or
the brake linings and reduce braking per- wax the car in direct sunlight.
formance. Polishing glossy trim mouldings could
wear away or damage the glossy surface
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you
layer.
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt
Polishing agent that contains abrasive and tar stains using tar remover or white spi-
when driving long distances in rain or slush.
must not be used. rit. More stubborn stains can be removed
The heat from the friction causes the brake
linings to warm up and dry. Do the same using fine rubbing paste designed for car
thing after starting in very damp or cold Rims paintwork.
weather. Only use rim cleaning agent recommended Polish first with a polish and then wax with
by Volvo. liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the the packaging carefully. Many preparations
components contain both polish and wax.
surface and cause stains on chrome-plated
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
aluminium rims.
dealers is recommended for the cleaning and
care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim
IMPORTANT
Related information
components, such as glossy trim mouldings. • Polishing and waxing (p. 389) Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
When using such a cleaning agent the rubber.
instructions must be followed carefully.
• Cleaning the interior (p. 391)
When using degreasant on plastic and
• Water and dirt-repellent coating (p. 390) rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is
necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could
wear away or damage the glossy surface
layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive
must not be used.
}}
389
||
IMPORTANT Water and dirt-repellent coating Rustproofing
The windows are treated with a surface coa- The car received a thorough and complete
Only paint treatment recommended by
Volvo should be used. Other treatment ting that improves visibility in difficult weather rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body
such as preserving, sealing, protection, conditions. are made of galvanised sheet metal. The
10 lustre sealing or similar could damage the underbody is protected by a wear-resistant
paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by Water and dirt-repellent coating* anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating
such treatments is not covered by Volvo There is natural wear of the water- rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the
warranty. repellent coating. exposed members, cavities, closed sections
Maintenance: and side doors.
Related information
• Car wash (p. 388) • Never use products such as car wax, Inspection and maintenance
degreaser or similar on glass surfaces as Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it
this could ruin their water-repellent prop- is important to keep the car clean. The car's
erties. rustproofing needs to be checked regularly
• Take care when cleaning so as not to and touched-up if necessary in order for it to
damage the glass surface. be maintained.
• To avoid damaging glass surfaces when Under normal conditions the rustproofing
removing ice – only use plastic ice scra- does not require treatment for approximately
pers. 12 years. After this period, it should be trea-
• Treatment with a special finishing agent ted at three-year intervals. Volvo recom-
available from Volvo dealers is recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo
mended in order to maintain the water- workshop for assistance if the car needs fur-
repellent properties. This should be used ther treatment.
first after three years and then each year.
Related information
IMPORTANT • Paint damage (p. 392)
Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove

ice from the windows. Use the heating to
remove ice from the door mirrors, see Win-
dows and rearview and door mirrors -
heating (p. 104).
Related information
• Car wash (p. 388)

Cleaning the interior of the upholstery. The fabric care product is Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong
Only use cleaning agents and car care prod- available at your Volvo dealer. stain removers. A special cleaning agent
ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly available from Volvo dealers can be used for
Leather upholstery more difficult cleaning.
and treat stains at once for best results. Vac-
Volvo's leather upholstery is treated to pre- 10
uuming is important prior to using cleaning
serve its original appearance. Seatbelts
agents.
Use water and a synthetic detergent. A spe-
Leather upholstery is a natural product that
cial textile cleaning agent is available from
IMPORTANT changes and acquires a beautiful patina over
your Volvo dealer. Ensure that the seatbelt is
time. Regular cleaning and treatment are
• Certain items of coloured clothing (e.g.
required in order that the properties and col-
dry before allowing it to retract.
dark jeans and suede garments) may
stain the upholstery. If this occurs, it is ours of the leather shall be preserved. Volvo Inlay mats and floor mat
important to clean and treat these offers a comprehensive product, Volvo Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning
parts of the upholstery as soon as Leather Care Kit/Wipes, for the cleaning and of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use
possible. treatment of leather upholstery which, when a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.
used in accordance with the instructions, pre- Each inlay mat is secured with pins.
• Never use strong solvents such as
serves the leather's protective coating.
washer fluid, pure petrol or white spirit Remove the inlay mat by taking hold of the
to clean the interior, since this may To achieve best results, Volvo recommends inlay mat at each pin and lifting the mat
damage the upholstery as well as the cleaning and application of the protective straight up.
other interior materials. cream once to four times per year (or more if
required). The Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at
• Never spray the cleaning agent directly
onto components that have electrical is available from your Volvo dealer. each pin.
buttons and controls. Wipe them
instead using a moistened cloth con- Leather steering wheel WARNING
taining the cleaning agent. Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the
leather steering wheel with protective plastic. Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and
• Sharp objects and Velcro may damage
Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is recom-
check before setting off that the mat by
the fabric upholstery. the driver's seat is firmly affixed and
mended for cleaning the leather steering secured in the pins so that it does not get
wheel. caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
Fabric upholstery and ceiling upholstery
Volvo offers a comprehensive fabric care Interior plastic, metal and wood parts
A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly A special textile cleaner is recommended for
product for fabric upholstery and ceiling
moistened with water, available from Volvo stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor
upholstery which, when used in accordance
dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior mats should be cleaned with agents recom-
with the instructions, preserves the properties
parts and surfaces. mended by your Volvo dealer.
}}
391
||
Related information Paint damage Colour code
• Car wash (p. 388) Paint is an important part of the car's rust-
proofing and should therefore be checked
regularly. The most common types of paint-
10 work damage are stone chips, scratches, and
marks on the edges of wings, doors and
bumpers.
Touching up minor paintwork damage

To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paint-
work should be rectified immediately.
Materials
• primer22 - a special adhesive primer in a
spray can is available for e.g. plastic- Exterior colour code
coated bumpers Any secondary exterior colour code
• base coat and clear coat - are available in
spray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks23 It is important that the correct colour is used.
For product label location, see Type designa-
• masking tape tions (p. 395).
• fine sand paper22.
22 If required.
23 Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.
392
Repairing minor paint damage such as 3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
stone chips and scratches brush, matchstick or similar. Finish with
base coat and clear coat once the primer
has dried.
4. For scratches, proceed as above, but 10
mask around the damaged area to pro-
tect the undamaged paintwork.
NOTE
If the stone chip has not penetrated down
to the meal and an undamaged layer of
paint remains in place, fill in with base coat
G021832
and clear coat as soon as the surface has
been cleaned.
Before work is started, the car must be clean
and dry as well as at a temperature above Related information
15 °C. • Rustproofing (p. 390)
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the
damaged surface. Then remove the tape
to remove any loose paint.
If the damage has reached down to a
metal surface (sheet steel), it is preferable
to use a primer. In the event of damage to
a plastic surface, an adhesive primer
should be used for better results - spray
into the spray can's cap and brush thinly.
2. Before painting, gentle polishing using a
very fine polishing agent may be carried
out locally if required (e.g. if there are any
uneven edges). Clean the surface thor-
oughly and allow to dry.
393
SPECIFICATIONS
11 Specifications
Type designations
Type designation, vehicle identification num-
ber, etc., i.e. information unique to the car,
can be read on a label in the car.
11
}}
395
11 Specifications
||
Label location
11
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle dealer regarding the car and when ordering Type designation, vehicle identification
identification and engine numbers can facili- spare parts and accessories. number, permissible maximum weights
tate all contact with an authorised Volvo and code designation for exterior colour
and type approval number. The decal is
396
11 Specifications
positioned on the door pillar, and will be

visible when the right-hand rear door is
opened.
Label for parking heater.
Engine code and engine serial number.
Label for engine oil.
Gearbox type designation and serial num- 11

ber.
Manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
Car's identification number. (VIN Vehicle
Identification Number)
Further information on the car is presented in
the registration document.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated
in the owner's manual should be exact
replicas of those in the car. They are
included to show their approximate
appearance and location in the car. The
information that applies to your particular
car is available on the respective decals
for your car.
Related information
• Weights (p. 399)
• Engine specifications (p. 402)
397
11 Specifications
Dimensions
Measurement of car length, height, etc. can
be read in the table.
11
Dimensions mm Dimensions mm
A Wheelbase 2774 H Rear track 1586
B Length 4644 I Load width, floor 1090
C Load length, floor, folded rear J Width 1891

seat 1789
K Width including door mirrors 2120
D Load length, floor 972
L Width including folded-in door
E Height 1713 mirrors 1891
F Load height 802
G Front track 1632
398
11 Specifications
Weights WARNING
Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read
The car's driving characteristics change
on a label in the car. depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
90% full and all fluids.
The weight of passengers and accessories,
and towball load (p. 400) (when a trailer is
hitched) influence the load capacity and are 11
not included in the kerb weight.
Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight -
Kerb weight.
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to
cars in the standard version - i.e. a car
without extra equipment or accessories.
This means that for every accessory added For information on label location, see Type des-
the loading capacity of the car is reduced ignations (p. 395).
correspondingly by the weight of the
accessory. Max. gross vehicle weight
Examples of accessories that reduce load- Max. train weight (car+trailer)
ing capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/
Summum equipment levels, as well as Max. front axle load
other accessories such as Towbar, Load
carrier, Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary Max. rear axle load
lamps, GPS, Fuel-driven engine block
heater, Safety grille, Carpets, Cargo cover, Equipment level
Power seats, etc.
Max. load: See registration document.
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer-
taining the kerb weight of your own partic- Max. roof load: 100 kg.
ular car.
Related information
• Towing capacity and towball load
(p. 400)
399
11 Specifications
Towing capacity and towball load Max. weight braked trailer

Towing capacity and towball load for driving
with a trailer can be read in the tables.
NOTE
The use of a stabiliser hitch on the towing
bracket is recommended for trailers heav-
ier than 1800 kg.
11
Engine Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
All All All 0–1200 50
T5 B4204T11 Automatic, TG-81SC 1600 75
T5 AWD B5254T12 Automatic, TF-80SC / TF-80SD 1800 90
T5 AWD B5254T14 Automatic, TF-80SC 1800 90
T6 AWD B6304T4 Automatic, TF-80SC 2000 90
D3 D5204T7 Manual, M66 1600 75
D3 D5204T7 Automatic, TF-80SC 1600 75
D4 D5204T3 Manual, M66 1600 75
D4 D5204T3 Automatic, TF-80SCB / TF-80SDC 1600 75
D4 D4204T5 Manual, M66 1600 75
D4 D4204T5 Automatic, TG-81SC 1600 75
D4 AWD D5244T12 Manual, M66 1800 90
400
11 Specifications
Engine Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
D4 AWD D5244T12 Automatic, TF-80SC 2000 90
D4 AWD D5244T17 Manual, M66 1800 90
D5 AWD D5244T11 Manual, M66 1800 90

11
A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 395).
B Without Start/Stop.
C With Start/Stop.
Max. weight unbraked trailer

Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
750 50
Related information
• Weights (p. 399)
• Driving with a trailer* (p. 301)
• Trailer Stability Assist - TSA (p. 307)

11 Specifications
Engine specifications NOTE

Engine specifications (output etc.) for each
Not all engines are available in all markets.
respective engine alternative can be read in
the table.
Engine Engine codeA Output Output Torque No. of cylin- Bore Stroke Swept vol- Compres-
(kW/rpm) (hp/rpm) (Nm/rpm) ders (mm) (mm) ume sion ratio
11 (litres)
T5 B4204T7 177/5500 240/5500 320/1800-5000 4 87.5 83.1 1.999 10.0:1
T5 B4204T11 180/5500 245/5500 350/1500–4800 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 10.8:1
T5 B4204T15 162/5500 220/5500 350/1500–4000 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 10.8:1
T5 AWD B5204T9 157/6000 213/6000 300/2700–5000 5 81.0 77 1.984 10.5:1
T5 AWD B5254T12 187/5400 254/5400 360/1800–4200 5 83 92,3 2,497 9.5:1
T5 AWD B5254T14 183/5400 249/5400 360/1800–4200 5 83 92,3 2,497 9.5:1
T6 B4204T9 225/5700 306/5700 400/2100-4500 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 10.3:1
T6 AWD B6304T4 224/5600 304/5600 440/2100–4200 6 82.0 93.2 2.953 9.3:1
D3 D5204T7 100/3500 136/3500 350/1500-2250 5 81.0 77 1.984 16.5:1
D4 D5204T3 120/3500 163/3500 400/1500-2750 5 81.0 77 1.984 16.5:1
D4 D4204T5 133/4250 181/4250 400/1750-2500 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 15.8:1
D4 AWD D5244T12 133/4000 181/4000 420/1500–2500 5 81.0 93.2 2.400 16.5:1
D4 AWD D5244T17 120/4000 163/4000 420/1500–2500 5 81.0 93.2 2.400 16.5:1
402
11 Specifications
Engine Engine codeA Output Output Torque No. of cylin- Bore Stroke Swept vol- Compres-
(kW/rpm) (hp/rpm) (Nm/rpm) ders (mm) (mm) ume sion ratio
(litres)
D5 AWD D5244T11B 158/4000 215/4000 420/1500–3250 5 81.0 93.15 2.400 16.5:1
D5 AWD D5244T15C 158/4000 215/4000 440/1500-3000 5 81.0 93.15 2.400 16.5:1

B Manual gearbox 11
C Automatic gearbox
Related information
• Coolant - grade and volume (p. 407)
• Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 405)
403
11 Specifications
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions Related information

Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor- • Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 405)
mally high oil temperature or oil consumption. • Engine oil - general (p. 352)
Below are some examples of adverse driving
conditions.
Check the oil level (p. 353) more frequently for

long journeys:
11 • towing a caravan or trailer
• in mountainous regions
• at high speeds
• in temperatures colder than -30 °C or
hotter than +40 °C. IMPORTANT
The above also apply to shorter driving dis-
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
tances at low temperatures. engine's service intervals all engines are
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse filled with a specially adapted synthetic
driving conditions. It provides extra protection engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard
for the engine.
to service life, starting characteristics, fuel
Volvo recommends: consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service inter-
vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war-
ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are
carried out at an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
404
11 Specifications
Engine oil - grade and volume

Engine oil grade and volume for each respec-
tive engine alternative can be read in the
table.
Volvo recommends:
11
Engine Engine codeA Oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter

(litres)
T6 AWD B6304T4 Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5 approx 6.8
D3 D5204T7 Viscosity: SAE 0W–30 approx. 5.9
D4 D5204T3 approx. 5.9
D4 AWD D5244T12 approx. 5.9
D4 AWD D5244T17 approx. 5.9
D5 AWD D5244T11B approx. 5.9
D5 AWD D5244T15C approx. 5.9
}}
405
11 Specifications
||
Engine Engine codeA Oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter
(litres)
T5 B4204T11 Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0w20 approx. 5.4
T5 B4204T15 approx. 5.4
T6 B4204T9 approx. 5.4

11 D4 D4204T5 approx 5.2
T5 AWD B5204T9 Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5 approx. 5.5
T5 AWD B5254T12 Viscosity: SAE 0W–30 approx. 5.5
T5 AWD B5254T14 approx. 5.5
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5

T5 B4204T7 Viscosity: SAE 5W–30 approx. 5.4
When driving under adverse conditions, use ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.
B Manual gearbox.
C Automatic gearbox.
Related information
• Engine oil - adverse driving conditions
(p. 404)
406
11 Specifications
Coolant - grade and volume EngineA Volume

Approved coolant volume for each respective
engine alternative can be read in the table. (litres)
Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by T5 B4204T11 8,3 (8,7B)

Volvo mixed with 50% water2, see the pack- T5 B4204T15
aging.
T6 B4204T9
EngineA Volume T5 B4204T7 10.5 11
(litres) A Engine code, component and serial number can be read
on the engine; see Type designations (p. 395).
T5 AWD B5204T9 8.9 B Applies to cars with fuel-driven heater.
T5 AWD B5254T12 Related information

• Coolant - level (p. 357)
T5 AWD B5254T14
T6 AWD B6304T4
D3 D5204T7
D4 D5204T3
D4 AWD D5244T12
D4 AWD D5244T17
D5 AWD D5244T15
D5 AWD D5244T11
D4 D4204T5 8,9 (9,2B)
2 Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
407
11 Specifications
Transmission fluid - grade and volume

The prescribed transmission fluid and volume
for each respective gearbox alternative can be
read in the table.
Manual gearbox
Manual gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid
M66 approx. 1.9 (approx. 1.45A) BOT 350M3
11
A Applies to the D4204T5 engine.
NOTE
For the MPS6, oil changes must take place
within certain service intervals.
For other gearboxes the gearbox oil does
not need to be changed under normal driv-
ing conditions. However, it may be neces-
sary under adverse driving conditions.
Automatic gearbox
Automatic gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid
MPS6 approx 7.3 BOT 341
TF-80SC
approx 7.0 AW1
TF-80SD
approx. 6.6A
TG-81SC AW1
approx. 7.5B
A Petrol engines
B Diesel engines
408
11 Specifications
NOTE
For the MPS6, oil changes must take place
within certain service intervals.
For other gearboxes the gearbox oil does
not need to be changed under normal driv-
ing conditions. However, it may be neces-
sary under adverse driving conditions.
11
Related information
• Engine oil - adverse driving conditions
(p. 404)
• Type designations (p. 395)
409
11 Specifications
Brake fluid - grade and volume Power steering fluid - grade Washer fluid - quality and volume
The medium in a hydraulic brake system is Power steering fluid is the denomination of Washer fluid is used, together with wind-
called brake fluid, and it is used to transfer the medium used in the car's power steering screen and rear window wipers, to keep the
pressure from e.g. a brake pedal via a master system. car's windows and headlamps clean and
brake cylinder to one or more slave cylinders, ensure visibility while driving.
which in turn act on a mechanical brake. Prescribed grade: Power steering fluid rec-
ommended by Volvo. Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recom-
Prescribed grade: DOT 4 mended by Volvo - with frost protection dur-
Related information ing cold weather and below freezing point.
11 Volume: 0.6 litres • Power steering fluid - level (p. 358)
Volume:
Related information
• Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 358) • Cars with headlamp washing: 6.5 litres.
• Cars without headlamp washing: 4.5
litres.
Related information
• Washer fluid - filling (p. 368)
• Wiper blades (p. 366)
• Wipers and washing (p. 99)
410
11 Specifications
Fuel tank - volume

Fuel tank volume for each respective engine
alternative can be read in the table.
Engine Volume (litres) Prescribed grade

Petrol engine approx. 70 Fuel - petrol (p. 297)
Diesel engine approx. 70 Fuel - diesel (p. 297)

11
Related information
• Filling up with fuel (p. 295)
• Engine specifications (p. 402)
411
11 Specifications
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions Urban driving manual gearbox

Fuel consumption in a vehicle is measured in
litres per 100 km and CO2 emissions in grams Extra-urban driving Automatic gearbox
per km.
Explanation Combined driving

NOTE
gram/km
If the consumption and emission data is
11 missing then it is included in the enclosed
litre/100 km supplement.
XC60
T5 AWD (B5254T12) 277 11.9 168 7.2 208 8.9
T5 (B4204T11) 208 8.9 128 5.5 157 6.7
T6 (B4204T9) 220 9.5 140 6.0 169 7.3
T6 AWD (B6304T4) 354 15.2 188 8.1 249 10.7
D3 (D5204T7) 169 6.4 122 4.6 139 5.3
D3 (D5204T7) 207 7.9 131 5.0 159 6.0
412
11 Specifications
XC60
D4 (D5204T3) 169 6.4 122 4.6 139 5.3
D4 (D5204T3) 207 7.9 131 5.0 159 6.0 11
D4 (D4204T5) 128 4.9 111 4.3 117 4.5
D4 (D4204T5) 141 5.3 115 4.4 124 4.7
D4 AWD (D5244T12) 158 6.0 128 4.9 139 5.3
D4 AWD (D5244T12) 222 8.5 139 5.3 169 6.4
D4 AWD (D5244T17) 158 6.0 128 4.9 139 5.3
D4 AWD (D5244T17) 222 8.5 139 5.3 169 6.4
D5 AWD (D5244T11) 158 6.0 128 4.9 139 5.3
D5 AWD (D5244T15) 222 8.5 139 5.3 169 6.4
Fuel consumption and emission values in the that apply to cars with kerb weight in the The car's weight may increase depending on
table above are based on specific EU cycles3, basic version and without extra equipment. equipment. This, as well as how heavily the
}}
413
11 Specifications
||
car is loaded, increases fuel consumption and NOTE
carbon dioxide emissions.
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
There are several reasons for increased fuel trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi-
consumption compared with the table's val- nation with fuel grade are factors that
ues. Examples of this are: could affect the car's performance.
• The driver's driving style.
Related information
• If the customer has specified wheels
• Economical driving (p. 300)
larger than those fitted as standard on the
11 • Weights (p. 399)
model's basic version, then resistance
increases.
• High speed results in increased wind
resistance.
• Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
weather and the condition of the car.
Even a combination of the above-mentioned
examples can result in significantly improved
consumption. For further information, please
refer to the regulations referred to3.
Large deviations in fuel consumption may
arise in a comparison with the EU driving
cycles3 which are used in the certification of
the car and on which the consumption figures
in the table are based.
3 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Regulation no 692/2008 and 715/2007
(Euro 5 / Euro 6) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for urban driving and extra-urban driving. - Urban driving - the measurement starts with cold starting the
engine. The driving is simulated. - Extra-urban driving - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0 and 120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - A car with D4 AWD or D5 AWD engine
and 6-speed manual gearbox is started in 2nd gear. The combined driving value given in the table is a combination of urban driving and extra-urban driving, in accordance with applicable legisla-
tion. CO2 emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2
emissions.
414
11 Specifications
Tyres - approved tyre pressures NOTE

Approved tyre pressures for each respective
All engines, tyres or combinations of these
engine alternative can be read in the table. are not always available in all markets.
XC60 Tyre size Speed Load, 1 - 3 persons Max. load ECO pressureA
Engine (km/h) Front Rear Front Rear Front/rear
(kPa)B (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) 11
235/65 R 17 0 - 160 240 240 270 270 270

235/60 R 18
All engines
235/55 R 19 160 + 240 240 270 270 -
255/45 R 20
Temporary Spare Tyre max. 80 420 420 420 420 -

A Economical driving.
B In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
Related information
• Tyres - air pressure (p. 315)
• Type designations (p. 395)
415
A Airbag All Wheel Drive (AWD).............................. 273

activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 32 Approach lighting.............................. 98, 165
ACC – Adaptive cruise control................. 197 driver's side.................................... 30, 38
Automatic car washes............................. 388
Active Bending Lights (ABL)...................... 93 passenger side......................... 31, 32, 38
Automatic gearbox.......................... 267, 270
Active chassis - FOUR-C......................... 187 AIRBAG ............................................... 30, 31
manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 267
Active main beam...................................... 91 Airbag system............................................ 29 towing and recovery........................... 309
warning symbol.................................... 28 trailer................................................... 303
Active Xenon headlamps........................... 93
Air cleaning Automatic relocking................................. 175
Active Yaw Control.................................. 187
material............................................... 129
Adapting driving characteristics...... 187, 251 AWD, All Wheel Drive............................... 273
passenger compartment.... 127, 128, 129
Adaptive Cruise Control........................... 197 Air conditioning........................................ 135
12
change cruise control functionality..... 206
Air conditioning system
deactivate........................................... 204
repair................................................... 359
B
fault tracing......................................... 209
Air distribution.......................................... 130 Backrest..................................................... 81
function............................................... 198
Recirculation....................................... 137 front seat, lowering............................... 81
managing speed................................. 201
overtaking........................................... 203 table.................................................... 138 Backrest rear seat, lowering...................... 83
overview.............................................. 200 Air quality system IAQS........................... 129 Bag holder .............................................. 155
radar sensor........................................ 206 Alarm........................................ 182, 183, 184 Battery............................................. 293, 369
setting the time interval...................... 202 alarm indicator.................................... 183 jump starting....................................... 264
standby mode..................................... 202 alarm signals....................................... 184 maintenance....................................... 369
temporary deactivation....................... 202 automatic re-arming........................... 183 overload.............................................. 293
Additional heater checking the alarm............................. 167 remote control key/PCC..................... 169
electric........................................ 146, 147 reduced alarm level............................ 184 symbols on the battery....................... 371
fuel-driven........................................... 146 remote control key not working.......... 184 warning symbols................................. 371
Adjusting the steering wheel...................... 85 Alcohol lock............................................. 254 Blind
Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 128 panorama roof.................................... 108
All Wheel Drive, (AWD)............................. 273 BLIS................................................. 246, 247
416
Bonnet, opening...................................... 350 Cargo area types..................................................... 54

Book service and repair........................... 345 cargo cover......................................... 159 upper mounting points for child seats.. 56
lighting.................................................. 97 City Safety™............................................ 215
Booster seat
mounting points.................................. 155
lowering................................................ 51 Cleaning
protective net...................................... 156
raising................................................... 50 automatic car wash............................ 388
seating position.................................... 49 Cargo cover............................................. 159 car washing........................................ 388
Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 358 Car key memory...................................... 162 rims..................................................... 389
Car upholstery......................................... 391 seatbelts............................................. 391
Brake fluid
upholstery........................................... 391
grade and volume............................... 410 Car washing............................................. 388
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)........ 128
Brake light.................................................. 95 Catalytic converter................................... 299
Recovery............................................. 309 Climate control
Brakes.............................................. 286, 287 12
actual temperature............................. 127
Anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 287 Chassis settings...................................... 187
auto-regulation................................... 134
brake light............................................. 95 Checking the engine oil level................... 352 general................................................ 126
brake system.............................. 286, 287
Children personal preferences.......................... 129
Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 287
child safety locks.................................. 41 sensors............................................... 127
emergency brake lights........................ 95
child seat and airbag............................ 48 temperature control............................ 135
filling brake fluid.................................. 358
child seats and side airbags................. 35 Clock, adjustment...................................... 74
handbrake........................................... 288
location in car....................................... 48
symbols in the combined instrument CO2 emissions......................................... 412
safety.............................................. 35, 41
panel................................................... 286 Collision..................................................... 39
Child safety locks.................................... 181
Bulbs, see Lighting.................................. 360 Collision warning............................. 222, 223
Child seat
integrated two-stage booster seat....... 49 Collision warning system
function............................................... 223
Child seats................................................. 41
C ISOFIX fixture system for child seats... 52
general limitations............................... 227
operation............................................. 226
Camera sensor................................ 217, 228 recommended...................................... 43
Pedestrian detection........................... 225
Car care................................................... 388 size classes for child seats with ISO-
Radar sensor.............................. 206, 215
Leather upholstery.............................. 391 FIX fixture system................................. 52
417
Collision Warning System with Auto D Driver Alert Control.................................. 232

Brake....................................................... 222 operation............................................. 233
Colour code, paint................................... 392 Daytime running lights............................... 89 Driver Alert System.................................. 232
Combined instrument panel................ 64, 65 Deadlock.................................................. 180 Driving...................................................... 294
deactivation........................................ 180 cooling system.................................... 292
Compass................................................. 106
temporary deactivation....................... 180 with a tailer......................................... 301
calibration........................................... 106
Defroster.................................................. 136 with the tailgate open......................... 293
Condensation in headlamps.................... 388
Detachable towbar Driving in water........................................ 292
Controls, lights........................................... 87
storage................................................ 304 Driving with a trailer
Control symbols................................... 65, 67
Diesel....................................................... 297 towball load........................................ 400
Coolant run out of fuel..................................... 298 towing capacity.................................. 400
12
volume and grade............................... 407
Diesel particle filter.................................. 299
Coolant, checking and filling................... 357
Dimensions.............................................. 398
Cooling system........................................ 292
Dipstick, electronic.......................... 354, 355 E
overheating......................................... 292
Direction indicator..................................... 96 ECC, electronic climate control............... 132
Cornering lights......................................... 94
Direction indicators.................................... 96 Eco Cruise............................................... 284
Corner Traction Control........................... 188
direction of rotation................................. 314 EcoGuide................................................... 68
Crash, see Collision................................... 39
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 272 Ecolabelling, FSC, owner's manual........... 23
Cruise control.......................................... 195
deactivate........................................... 197 Display lighting.......................................... 88 Economical driving.................................. 300
managing speed................................. 195 Distance Warning.................................... 212 ECO pressure.......................................... 415
resume set speed............................... 197 Limitations.......................................... 213 Electrical socket...................................... 152
temporary deactivation....................... 196 Symbols and messages..................... 214 cargo area........................................... 156
CTA.......................................................... 249 Door mirrors............................................. 103 Electrical system...................................... 375
Cyclist detection...................................... 224 automatic dimming............................. 104
Electric parking brake
CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package)......... 128 Driveable punctured tyres........................ 329 low battery voltage............................. 288
Electronic climate control - ECC............. 132
418
Emergency equipment Engine compartment First aid kit............................................... 324

first aid kit........................................... 324 coolant................................................ 357 Fluids, capacities............. 407, 408, 410, 411
warning triangle.................................. 323 oil........................................................ 352
Fluids and oils.......................... 407, 408, 410
Emergency puncture repair............. 332, 333 overview.............................................. 350
power steering fluid............................ 358 Fog lamp
action.................................................. 334
rear........................................................ 94
inflating the tyres................................ 337 Engine drag control................................. 188
rechecking.......................................... 336 Foot brake....................................... 286, 287
Engine oil......................................... 352, 404
Emergency puncture repair kit adverse driving conditions.................. 404 FOUR-C - Active chassis......................... 187
location............................................... 333 filter..................................................... 352 FSC, ecolabelling....................................... 23
overview.............................................. 333 grade and volume............................... 405 Fuel.................................................. 296, 297
sealing fluid......................................... 337 Engine specifications............................... 402 fuel consumption................................ 412
Emissions of carbon dioxide................... 412 12
Error messages fuel economy.............................. 315, 316
Engine Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 210 fuel filter.............................................. 298
deactivate........................................... 260 Driver Alert Control............................. 234 Fuel-driven heater
overheating......................................... 301 Lane Departure Warning..................... 238 timer.................................................... 142
start..................................................... 259 see Messages and symbols....... 210, 290 Fuelling
Start/Stop........................................... 275 Error messages in BLIS........................... 251 filling................................................... 295
Engine and passenger compartment heater ERS - Remote Start................................. 261 fuel cap............................................... 295
messages........................................... 144 fuel filler flap....................................... 295
exhaust gases, toxic, sucked in.............. 293
timer.................................................... 142 fuel filler flap, manual opening............ 295
External dimensions................................ 398
Engine block heater................................. 140 Fuel tank
Engine block heater and passenger com- volume................................................ 411
partment heater Fuse box.................................................. 376
direct start.......................................... 141 F Fuses....................................................... 375
immediate stop................................... 142 Fan cargo area........................................... 385
Engine braking, automatic....................... 274 ECC.................................................... 134 changing............................................. 375
Fault tracing for the camera sensor......... 218 cold zone............................................ 386
engine compartment.......................... 377
First aid.................................................... 324
419
General............................................... 375 Headlamp control...................................... 87 I

Start/Stop........................................... 386 Headlamp levelling.................................... 88
under glovebox........................... 381, 383 IAQS - Interior Air Quality System........... 129
Headlamp pattern, adjusting..................... 99
Immobiliser.............................................. 163
Headlamp pattern adjustment................... 99
Active Bending Lights .......................... 99 Indicator symbols...................................... 69
G Headlamps............................................... 360 Inflatable curtain.................................. 35, 38
Gearbox................................................... 265 head restraint Information button, PCC.................. 166, 167
automatic.................................... 267, 270 centre seat, rear.................................... 83 Information display.............................. 64, 65
manual................................................ 265 lowering.......................................... 83, 84 Inlaid mats............................................... 152
Gear indicator.......................................... 266 Heated washer nozzles............................ 100 Instrument lighting, see Lighting................ 88
12 Gear selector inhibitor............................. 272 Heating Instrument overview
Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disen- rearview and door mirrors.................. 104 left-hand drive car................................ 58
gagement................................................. 272 rear window........................................ 104 right-hand drive car.............................. 61
Geartronic................................................ 267 seats................................................... 133
Instruments and controls..................... 58, 61
steering wheel....................................... 86
Glass Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)
windscreen......................................... 104
laminated/reinforced............................. 23 Air cleaning......................................... 129
Heat-reflecting windscreen........................ 19
Glovebox................................................. 151 Interior lighting, see Lighting..................... 96
locking................................................ 177 High engine temperature......................... 301
Interior rearview mirror............................. 105
Gross vehicle weight............................... 399 High-pressure headlamp washing........... 100
automatic dimming............................. 105
GSI - Gear selector assistance................ 266 Hill Descent Control................................. 274
Intermittent wiping..................................... 99
Hill Start Assist........................................ 273
Internet-connected car
Home safe light duration........................... 98 book service and repair...................... 345
H Horn........................................................... 86
Handbrake............................................... 288
Hazard warning flashers............................ 95
HDC......................................................... 274
420
J Lane keeping assistant main beam (cars with active xenon

operation..................................... 236, 237 headlamps)......................................... 363
Jack......................................................... 324 Laser sensor............................................ 219 main beam (cars with halogen head-
Journey statistics..................................... 124 lamps)................................................. 362
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 391
number plate lighting.......................... 364
Jump starting........................................... 264 Light indications, PCC............................. 167 vanity mirror........................................ 365
Lighting.................................................... 359 Loading
Active Xenon headlamps...................... 93 cargo area........................................... 153
K approach lighting.......................... 98, 165 General............................................... 153
automatic lighting, passenger com- long load............................................. 154
Kerb weight.............................................. 399
partment............................................... 97 roof load............................................. 155
Key................................................... 161, 163 bulbs, specifications........................... 366
Lock 12
Key blade......................................... 168, 169 controls................................................. 96
locking................................................ 175
Keyless drive............ 171, 172, 173, 174, 259 cornering lights..................................... 94
unlocking.................................... 175, 176
daytime running lights.......................... 89
Keyless - locking..................................... 172 Lockable wheel bolts............................... 318
display lighting...................................... 88
Keyless start (keyless drive)..... 171, 172, headlamp levelling................................ 88 Lock confirmation ................................... 163
173, 174, 259 home safe lighting................................ 98 Locking/unlocking
Keyless - unlocking................................. 173 instrument lighting................................ 88 glovebox............................................. 177
in the passenger compartment............. 96 inside.................................................. 176
Keypad in the steering wheel.................... 85
main/dipped beam............................... 90 tailgate................................................ 177
Key positions............................................. 79 position/parking lamps......................... 88
rear fog lamp........................................ 94
tunnel detection.................................... 90
L Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 360
M
bulb holder, rear................................. 363 Main/dipped beam, see Lighting............... 90
Labels...................................................... 395
cargo area........................................... 365 Main beam, automatic activation.............. 91
Laminated glass......................................... 23 dipped beam (cars with halogen head-
maintenance
Lamps, see Lighting................................ 359 lamps)................................................. 362
Rustproofing....................................... 390
Lane Departure Control................... 235, 236 direction indicators, front.................... 363
421
Manual gearbox....................................... 265 Misting Panorama roof

GSI - Gear selector assistance........... 266 condensation in headlamps............... 388 blind.................................................... 108
Towing and recovery.......................... 309 Mood lighting............................................. 97 opening and closing........................... 108
trailer................................................... 302 ventilation position.............................. 109
MY CAR................................................... 112
Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 267 Park Assist............................................... 239
Max. roof load.......................................... 399 backward............................................ 240
fault indicator...................................... 242
Memory function in seat............................ 82 O function............................................... 239
Menus parking assistance sensors................ 242
Oil, see also Engine oil..................... 404, 405
Combined instrument panel............... 110
Oil level low.............................................. 352 Park assist camera.................................. 243
menu overview.................................... 110
settings............................................... 245
12 Messages................................................ 112 Output...................................................... 402
Parking brake........................................... 288
Information display............................. 111 outside temperature gauge....................... 73
Passenger compartment filter................. 128
Messages and symbols Overheating............................................. 301
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 210 Passenger compartment heater.............. 140
Owner's manual, ecolabelling.................... 23
Collision Warning with Auto PCC – Personal Car Communicator
Brake.......................................... 221, 230 functions............................................. 164
Driver Alert Control............................. 234 range........................................... 167, 171
Engine block heater and passenger P Pedestrian detection................................ 222
compartment heater........................... 144
PACOS....................................................... 32 Personal Car Communicator................... 167
Lane Departure Warning..................... 238
Paddle on the steering wheel.................... 85 Petrol grade............................................. 297
Messages in BLIS.................................... 251
Paintwork Polishing.................................................. 389
Meters
colour code......................................... 392 Position/parking lamps.............................. 88
fuel gauge....................................... 64, 66
damage and touch-up........................ 392
speedometer................................... 64, 66 Power guide............................................... 68
tachometer..................................... 64, 66 Panel lighting............................................. 88
Power operated tailgate.......................... 178
misting Panic function.......................................... 165
Power panorama roof.............................. 107
attending to the windows................... 126
Power seat................................................. 82
422
Powershift gearbox.......................... 270, 309 heating................................................ 104 Road sign information............................. 192
Power steering fluid interior................................................. 105 Limitations.......................................... 194
grade................................................... 410 Rear window operation............................................. 192
Power windows....................................... 101 heating................................................ 104 Roll-over protection

Recommendations during driving............ 294 ROPS (Roll Over Protection System).... 38
Protective grille........................................ 158
Recommended child seats Roof load, max. weight............................ 399
Protective net........................................... 158
table...................................................... 43 ROPS (Roll Over Protection System)......... 38
Recovery.................................................. 311 Rustproofing............................................ 390
Q Refrigerant............................................... 359
Regeneration........................................... 299
Queue Assist............................................ 204 S 12
Relay/fuse box, see Fuses....................... 375
Queue Assistant....................................... 204
Remote control immobiliser..................... 164 Safety lock
Remote control key................. 161, 162, 163 children................................................. 41
battery replacement............................ 169 Safety mode.............................................. 39
R detachable key blade................. 168, 169 moving the car...................................... 41
Radar sensor........................................... 198 functions............................................. 164 start attempt......................................... 40
Limitations.................................. 206, 207 loss..................................................... 161 Sealing fluid............................................. 337
range........................................... 166, 171
Rain sensor................................................ 99 Seat, see Seats.......................................... 81
Remote control key system, type appro-
Rear bulbs Seatbelt...................................................... 25
val............................................................ 185
location............................................... 364 loosen................................................... 26
Remote Start - ERS................................. 261 pregnancy............................................. 27
Rear seat
Heating............................................... 133 Resetting, trip meter........................ 117, 121 putting on............................................. 26
Rearview and door mirrors Resetting the door mirrors....................... 104 rear seat................................................ 27
compass............................................. 106 seatbelt reminder.................................. 27
Resetting the power windows................. 103
door.................................................... 103 seatbelt tensioner................................. 28
Retractable power door mirrors............... 104
electrically retractable......................... 104 Seatbelt reminder...................................... 27
Reverse gear inhibitor.............................. 266
Seatbelt tensioner................................ 28, 38
423
Seats.......................................................... 81 Stains....................................................... 391 Driver Alert Control............................. 234

head restraints, rear.............................. 83 Start/Stop................................................ 275 Lane Departure Warning..................... 238
heating................................................ 133 function and operation....................... 276 System
Heating............................................... 133 the engine does not stop.................... 277 tripping.................................................. 38
lowering the front backrest................... 81
Steering force, speed related.................. 251
lowering the rear backrest.................... 83
power.................................................... 82 Steering force level, see Steering force... 251
Self Supporting run flat Tyres (SST)........ 329 Steering lock............................................ 260 T
Sensus....................................................... 78 Steering wheel........................................... 85 Tailgate.................................................... 178
heating.................................................. 86 close................................................... 178
Service position....................................... 366
keypad.................................................. 85 Locking/unlocking.............................. 177
Service programme................................. 345 paddle................................................... 85 Open................................................... 178
12
Set time interval....................................... 212 steering wheel adjustment.................... 85 power.................................................. 178
Side airbag SIPS.................................. 34, 38 Stone chips and scratches...................... 392 Temperature
SIPS airbag................................................ 34 Storage spaces actual temperature............................. 127
Skidding................................................... 294 glovebox............................................. 151 Temperature control................................ 135

tunnel console.................................... 151 TM - Tyre Monitor.................................... 330
slippery driving conditions....................... 294
Storage spaces in the passenger com- Tools........................................................ 323
Soot filter................................................. 299
partment.................................................. 149
SOOT FILTER FULL................................. 299 Total airing function......................... 126, 176
Switching off the engine.......................... 260
spare wheel............................................. 319 Towbar
Symbols detachable, attachment...................... 305
installation........................................... 322
indicator symbols..................... 65, 67, 69 detachable, removal........................... 306
Speed ratings, tyres................................. 318 warning symbols............................. 65, 67
Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 303
Spin control............................................. 187 Symbols and messages
Towbar - detachable
Stability and traction control system 187, Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 210
attachment/removal.................... 305, 306
190 Collision Warning with Auto
operation............................................. 188 Brake.......................................... 221, 230 Towing..................................................... 309
towing eye.......................................... 310
Stability system....................................... 187
424
Towing bracket................................ 303, 304 Tunnel console........................................ 151 tyre pressure monitoring..... 325, 327, 330
specifications...................................... 304 12 V socket......................................... 152 winter tyres......................................... 319
Towing capacity and towball load........... 400 cigarette lighter and ashtray............... 151
Towing eye.............................................. 310 Tunnel detection........................................ 90
TPMS - Tyre Pressure Monitoring... 325, 327 Type approval U

radar system....................................... 251
Traction control........................................ 187 Unlocking
remote control key system................. 185
Trailer....................................................... 301 from the inside.................................... 176
tyre pressure monitoring..................... 338
cable................................................... 301 from the outside................................. 175
Type designations................................... 395
driving with a trailer............................ 301 Unlocking with the key blade................... 173
snaking............................................... 307 Tyre dimension........................................ 317
Trailer stability assist............................... 188 Tyre load index........................................ 317 12
Trailer Stability Assist.............................. 307 Tyre pressure label.................................. 315 V

Transmission............................................ 265 Tyre pressure monitoring......... 325, 327, 330
Vanity mirror...................................... 97, 152
Adjust.................................................. 326
Transmission oil Ventilation................................................ 130
arming................................................. 328
volume and grade............................... 408
deactivate........................................... 328 Vibration damper..................................... 303
Transponder.............................................. 19 driveable punctured tyres (SST)......... 329
Volvo ID..................................................... 20
Tread depth............................................. 319 low tyre pressure................................ 330
recommendations............................... 328 Volvo Sensus............................................. 78
Tread wear indicators.............................. 315
Trip computer.......... 114, 115, 119, 123, 124 Tyres
direction of rotation............................ 314
Trip meter.................................................. 73
maintenance....................................... 313
Trip meter, resetting........................ 117, 121 pressure...................................... 315, 415
Troubleshooting puncture repair................................... 332
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 209 specifications...................................... 415
TSA - trailer stability assist ............. 188, 307 tread depth......................................... 319
tread wear indicators.......................... 315
425
W Waxing..................................................... 389 Cleaning.............................................. 368

Weights replacing, rear window....................... 368
Warning lamp kerb weight......................................... 399 Service position.................................. 366
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 198 Wipers and washing.................................. 99
Wheel bolts.............................................. 318
collision warning system.................... 226
lockable.............................................. 318
stability and traction control system.. 187
Wheel rim, dimensions............................ 316
Warning lamps
Airbags – SRS....................................... 71 Wheel rims
alternator not charging......................... 71 cleaning.............................................. 389
Fault in brake system........................... 71 Wheels
Low oil pressure................................... 71 installation........................................... 322
12 Parking brake applied........................... 71 removal............................................... 319
seatbelt reminder............................ 27, 71 snow chains........................................ 319
Warning................................................ 71 Whiplash injury, WHIPS............................. 36
Warning sound WHIPS
collision warning system.................... 226 child seat/booster cushion................... 37
Warning symbols........................... 65, 67, 71 seating position.................................... 37
Warning triangle....................................... 323 whiplash protection........................ 36, 38
Washer fluid Windows, rearview and door mirrors....... 390
volume................................................ 410 Windscreen
Washer fluid, filling................................... 368 heating........................................ 104, 136
Washer nozzles, heated........................... 100 Windscreen washing................................ 100
Washers Windscreen wiper...................................... 99

rear window........................................ 101 rain sensor............................................ 99
washer fluid, filling.............................. 368 Winter driving........................................... 294
windscreen......................................... 100 Winter tyres.............................................. 319
Water and dirt-repellent coating.............. 390 Wiper blades............................................ 366
Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 390 changing............................................. 367
426
TP 18267 (English), AT 1448, MY15, Printed in Sweden, Göteborg 2014, Copyright © 2000-2014 Volvo Car Corporation

XC60 Owners Manual MY11 en-GB Tp18267

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

XC60 Owners Manual MY11 en-GB Tp18267

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

XC60 Owners Manual MY11 en-GB Tp18267

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WEB EDITION

2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3

04 Climate control 05 Loading and storage

4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

06 Locks and alarm 07 Driver support

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5

6 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

08 Starting and driving

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 7

09 Wheels and tyres 10 Maintenance and service

8 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Owner information Reading the owner's manual 01

1 Applies to certain car models.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 13

White ISO symbols and white text/image on

Information When there is a series of illustrations for Related information 01

NOTE Position lists Related information

2 Applies to certain car models.

3 The character for each button may vary depending on market/country/language.

Accessories and extra equipment Information on the Internet 01

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 19

01 Volvo ID ate a Volvo ID via one of the following serv-

20 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Volvo Car Corporation's tured in one of the cleanest and most 01

22 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The owner's manual and the Laminated glass 01

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 23

General information on seatbelts Remember Related information

Seatbelt - putting on Seatbelt - loosening

As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant dri- • Provides information on which seatbelts

Service required or SRS airbag Service Airbag system

Warning triangle and warning symbol for the air-

32 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Side airbag (SIPS) WARNING

• Passenger airbag (p. 31)

The SIPS bag system consists of two main

Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster Inflatable Curtain (IC) WARNING

General information on WHIPS WARNING

The WHIPS system is actuated by a rear-end

WHIPS - child seats WHIPS - seating position WARNING

Do not place objects on the rear seat that may

System Triggered WARNING General information on safety mode

First, check that no fuel is leaking from the

WARNING If the message Safety mode See manual is

Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats,

Child safety locks

42 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Child seats NOTE

Look in the installation instructions for the

Child seats and airbags are not compatible.

Group 1 Britax Fixway – rear-facing child seat, secured with

Child seats - location WARNING

Alternative 1: Position of airbag label on passen- WARNING

Child seat - two-stage booster seat* WARNING

• the seatbelt is in contact with the child's

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 49

Two-stage booster seat* - raising Stage 24

Press the booster cushion backwards to